B 1000 – en

Gear units
Manual with installation instructions
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

Pos : 4 /Anl eitung en/El ektr onik /FU und Starter/0. Pr olog/_Pr olog: Anleitung les en (2022- 07- 20 12:21:40) @ 88\m od_1651830289006_388.docx @ 2909470 @ @ 1

Read document and

keep for future reference

Read this document carefully prior to performing any work on or putting the device into operation. It is
essential to read and observe the instructions in this document. They serve as the prerequisite for
smooth and safe operation and the fulfilment of any warranty claims.
Contact Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG if your questions regarding the handling of the device are
not answered in this document or if you require further information.
The German version of this document is the original. The German document is always decisive. If this
document is available in other languages, this will be a translation of the original document.
Keep this document in the vicinity of the device so that it is available if required.
Pos : 5 /Anl eitung en/El ektr onik /FU und Starter/0. Pr olog/_Pr olog: Anleitung les en_Ergänzung für all e Ger äte auß er Safety [M ot, Getr., FU] @ 87\m od_1649858437113_388.doc x @ 2904576 @ @ 1

Use the version of this documentation that is valid for your device at the time of delivery. You can find
the currently valid version of the documentation under www.nord.com.
Pos : 6 /Anl eitung en/Getriebe/0. Prol og/_Prol og: Anl eitung lesen_Zus atz [B1000, B1050] @ 87\m od_1649859843798_388.doc x @ 2904652 @ @ 1

Please also note the following documents:

• Gear unit catalogues,
• Documentation for the electric motor,
• Documentation for equipment which is attached or provided.
Pos : 8 /Allgemei n/D as deutsches Dok um ent ist das Original - für alle deutss prachigen D ok umente (Originale) @ 81\mod_1632925491644_388.docx @ 2831390 @ @ 1

Pos : 9 /Allgemei n/Allgemei ngültige Modul e/---------- Seitenumbr uch ---------- @ 1\mod_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

2 B 1000 en-2822
 Documentation
Pos : 10 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/0. Pr olog/D ok umentati on - Versionsliste [B 1000] @ 89\m od_1656676863157_388.docx @ 2920320 @ @ 1

Documentation
Designation: B 1000
Part No.: 6052802
Series: Gear units and geared motors
Type series:
Gear unit types: Helical gear unit
NORDBLOC.1® helical in-line gear units
Standard helical gear units
Parallel shaft gear unit
Bevel gear unit
Helical worm gear units
MINIBLOC worm gear units
UNIVERSAL worm gear units

Version list
Title, Order number / Remarks
Date Version

Internal code
B 1000, 6052802 / 0713 -
February
2013
B 1000, 6052802 / 3814 • General corrections
September
2014
B 1000, 6052802 / 1915 • New gear unit types SK 10382.1 + SK 11382.1
April 2015
B 1000, 6052802 / 0916 • General corrections
March 2016 • New bevel gear units SK 920072.1 + SK 930072.1
B 1000, 6052802 / 3816 • General corrections
September • New helical gear units SK 071.1, SK 171.1, SK 371.1, SK 571.1,
2016 SK 771.1;
B 1000, 6052802 / 2518 • General corrections
June 2018 • New parallel shaft gear units SK 0182.1, SK 0282.1, SK 1282.1,
SK 1382.1
• New worm gear unit SK 02040.1
B 1000, 6052802 / 5018 • General corrections
December • Revision of safety and warning information
2018 • New parallel shaft gear units NORDBLOC SK 871.1, SK 971.1,
SK 1071.1

B 1000 en-2822 3
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

Title, Order number / Remarks

Date Version

Internal code
B 1000, 6052802 / 4419 • General corrections
October • Addition of GRIPMAXX™ (Option M)
2019
B 1000, 6052802 / 3921 • Editorial revision
September • General corrections and amendments
2021

32551

B 1000, 6052802 / 2822 • Revision of the maximum motor weights

July 2022
34343

Table 1: Version list B 1000

Pos : 14 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------- Seitenum bruc h ---------- @ 1\m od_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

4 B 1000 en-2822
 Copyright notice
Pos : 15 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/Urheberrechtsv ermerk @ 5\mod_1410955083459_388.docx @ 150427 @ @ 1

Copyright notice
As an integral component of the device described here, this document must be provided to all
users in a suitable form.
Any editing or amendment or other utilisation of the document is prohibited.
Pos : 16 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/H erausgeber @ 67\mod_1613484928402_388.docx @ 2738552 @ @ 1

Publisher
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 • 22941 Bargteheide, Germany • http://www.nord.com
Fon +49 (0) 45 32 / 289-0 • Fax +49 (0) 45 32 / 289-2253

Member of the NORD DRIVESYSTEMS Group

=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Copyright ===

B 1000 en-2822 5
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

6 B 1000 en-2822
 Table of Contents
Pos : 18 /Allgem ein/Steuermodul e/Inhaltsverz eic hnis @ 0\m od_1317978518480_388.docx @ 4078 @ @ 1

Table of Contents
=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Inhaltsv erz eichnis ===

1 Safety information ..................................................................................................................................... 11

1.1 Intended use .................................................................................................................................... 11
1.2 Do not make any modifications. ....................................................................................................... 11
1.3 Performing inspection and maintenance work ................................................................................. 11
1.4 Personnel qualification ..................................................................................................................... 11
1.5 Safety for particular activities ........................................................................................................... 12
1.5.1 Check for transport damage ............................................................................................... 12
1.5.2 Safety information for installation and maintenance ........................................................... 12
1.6 Hazards............................................................................................................................................ 12
1.6.1 Hazards when lifting ........................................................................................................... 12
1.6.2 Hazards due to rotating parts ............................................................................................. 12
1.6.3 Hazards due to high or low temperatures ........................................................................... 12
1.6.4 Hazards due to lubricants and other substances ................................................................ 13
1.6.5 Hazards due to noise.......................................................................................................... 13
1.6.6 Hazards due to pressurised coolants ................................................................................. 13
2 Description of gear units .......................................................................................................................... 14
2.1 Gear unit types and type designations ............................................................................................. 14
2.2 Name plate....................................................................................................................................... 16
3 Transport, storage, assembly .................................................................................................................. 17
3.1 Transporting the gear unit ................................................................................................................ 17
3.2 Storage and downtimes ................................................................................................................... 17
3.2.1 General measures .............................................................................................................. 17
3.2.2 Storage and downtimes in excess of 3 months .................................................................. 18
3.2.3 Storage and downtimes in excess of 9 months .................................................................. 18
3.3 Preparing for installation .................................................................................................................. 19
3.3.1 Check for damages ............................................................................................................ 19
3.3.2 Remove corrosion protection agents .................................................................................. 19
3.3.3 Check rotational direction ................................................................................................... 19
3.3.4 Check ambient conditions .................................................................................................. 19
3.3.5 Drives with nsd tupH surface treatment .............................................................................. 19
3.3.6 Installing the oil expansion chamber (Option: OA).............................................................. 20
3.3.7 Installing the oil reservoir tank (Option: OT) ....................................................................... 20
3.4 Installing the gear unit ...................................................................................................................... 21
3.5 Installation of a hub on solid shaft (option: V, L) .............................................................................. 22
3.6 Fitting push-on gear units with fastening element (option: B)........................................................... 24
3.7 Fitting a hollow shaft with shrink disc (Option: S) ............................................................................. 26
3.8 Fitting a hollow shaft with GRIPMAXX™ (Option: M) ....................................................................... 29
3.9 Fitting the covers (option: H, H66).................................................................................................... 31
3.10 Fitting the covers .............................................................................................................................. 32
3.11 Fitting a standard motor (Option: IEC, NEMA, AI, AN) ..................................................................... 32
3.12 Mounting of the cooling coil onto the cooling system ....................................................................... 37
3.13 Installation of the external oil/air cooler ............................................................................................ 38
3.13.1 Connecting hoses ............................................................................................................... 38
3.13.2 Electrical connection........................................................................................................... 38
3.14 Installation of an oil expansion chamber (Option: OA) ..................................................................... 39
3.14.1 Installation of the sizes I, II and III ...................................................................................... 39
3.14.2 Installation of sizes 0A and 0B............................................................................................ 39
3.15 Subsequent painting ........................................................................................................................ 40
3.16 Electrical connection of the mounted motor ..................................................................................... 40
4 Commissioning ......................................................................................................................................... 41
4.1 Checking the oil level ....................................................................................................................... 41
4.2 Activating the vent ............................................................................................................................ 41
4.3 Activating the automatic lubricant dispenser .................................................................................... 42
4.4 Cooling coil (Option: CC) ................................................................................................................. 43
4.5 Running-in time for the worm gear unit ............................................................................................ 44

B 1000 en-2822 7
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
4.6 Checklist .......................................................................................................................................... 44
5 Service and maintenance ......................................................................................................................... 45
5.1 Inspection and maintenance intervals .............................................................................................. 45
5.2 Service and maintenance work ........................................................................................................ 45
5.2.1 Visual inspection for leaks .................................................................................................. 46
5.2.2 Check for running noises .................................................................................................... 46
5.2.3 Checking the oil level.......................................................................................................... 46
5.2.4 Visual inspection of the rubber buffers (Option: G, VG)...................................................... 47
5.2.5 Visual inspection of the hoses (Option: OT, CS2-X) ........................................................... 47
5.2.6 Re-greasing (Option: VL2, VL3, W, AI, AN) ........................................................................ 47
5.2.7 Replacing the automatic lubricant dispenser ...................................................................... 48
5.2.8 Change the oil .................................................................................................................... 49
5.2.9 Clean and check vent screw ............................................................................................... 49
5.2.10 Replacing the shaft sealing ring.......................................................................................... 49
5.2.11 Re-lubrication of bearings in the gear unit .......................................................................... 50
5.2.12 General overhaul ................................................................................................................ 50
6 Disposal ..................................................................................................................................................... 51
7 Appendix .................................................................................................................................................... 52
7.1 Versions and mounting position ....................................................................................................... 52
7.1.1 Explanation of symbols ....................................................................................................... 52
7.1.2 UNIVERSAL/MINIBLOC worm gear units .......................................................................... 53
7.1.3 Parallel shaft gear units with oil level tank .......................................................................... 54
7.1.4 Overview of mounting positions .......................................................................................... 55
7.2 Lubricants ........................................................................................................................................ 68
7.2.1 Roller bearing greases ....................................................................................................... 68
7.2.2 Gear oils ............................................................................................................................. 69
7.3 Screw tightening torques.................................................................................................................. 71
7.4 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................... 72
7.5 Leakage and leak-tightness ............................................................................................................. 73
7.6 Repair information ............................................................................................................................ 74
7.6.1 Repairs ............................................................................................................................... 74
7.6.2 Internet information............................................................................................................. 74
7.7 Warranty .......................................................................................................................................... 74
7.8 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................... 75

8 B 1000 en-2822
 List of illustrations
Pos : 20 /Allgem ein/Steuermodul e/Abbildungsv erz eichnis @ 0\m od_1317978515699_388.doc x @ 3917 @ @ 1

List of illustrations
=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Abbildungsv erzeic hnis ===

Figure 1: Name plate ............................................................................................................................................. 16

Figure 2: Example of a simple pulling device ........................................................................................................ 22
Figure 3: Permissible application of force to drive and driven shafts ..................................................................... 23
Figure 4: Applying lubricant to the shaft and the hub............................................................................................. 24
Figure 5: Removing the factory-fitted closing cap .................................................................................................. 25
Figure 6: Gear unit mounted on shaft with a shoulder using the fastening element .............................................. 25
Figure 7: Gear unit mounted on shaft without a shoulder using the fastening element ......................................... 25
Figure 8: Removal using dismantling device ......................................................................................................... 25
Figure 9: Mounting the rubber buffer (Option G and/or VG) on parallel shaft gear units ....................................... 26
Figure 10: Attaching the torque support on bevel gear and worm gear units ........................................................ 26
Figure 11: Hollow shaft with shrink disc ................................................................................................................. 27
Figure 12: GRIPMAXX™, exploded diagram ........................................................................................................ 29
Figure 13: Fitting the covers, Option SH, Option H, and Option H66..................................................................... 31
Figure 14: Disassembly and assembly of the cover cap........................................................................................ 32
Figure 15: Fitting the coupling onto the motor shaft - various types of coupling .................................................... 34
Figure 16: Cooling cover ....................................................................................................................................... 37
Figure 17: Connection of the oil/air cooler ............................................................................................................. 38
Figure 18: Position of the oil expansion chamber .................................................................................................. 39
Figure 19: Position of the oil expansion chamber .................................................................................................. 40
Figure 20: Activating the vent screw ...................................................................................................................... 41
Figure 21: Activating the pressure vent screw ....................................................................................................... 41
Figure 22: Removing the vent plug and fitting the special pressure vent............................................................... 42
Figure 23: Fitting the grease collection container .................................................................................................. 42
Figure 24: Activating the automatic lubricant sensor with standard motor mounting ............................................. 43
Figure 25: Adhesive label ...................................................................................................................................... 43
Figure 26: Checking the oil level with a dipstick .................................................................................................... 47
Figure 27: Re-grease IEC/NEMA adapters AI and AN with option BRG1 ............................................................. 48
Figure 28: Switching the automatic lubricant sensor with standard motor mounting ............................................. 48
Figure 29: Parallel shaft gear units with oil level tank ............................................................................................ 54

B 1000 en-2822 9
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
Pos : 22 /Allgem ein/Steuermodul e/T abellenv erzeic hnis @ 0\mod_1317978519199_388.docx @ 4124 @ @ 1

List of tables
=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Tabellenverz eic hnis ===

Table 1: Version list B 1000 ..................................................................................................................................... 4

Table 2: Gear unit types and type designations..................................................................................................... 14
Table 3: Versions and options ............................................................................................................................... 15
Table 4: Permissible machine shaft tolerances ..................................................................................................... 30
Table 5: Motor weights IEC motors ....................................................................................................................... 33
Table 6: Motor weights NEMA motors ................................................................................................................... 33
Table7: Motor parallel keys.................................................................................................................................... 35
Table 8: Position of the half-coupling on the NEMA motor shaft............................................................................ 36
Table 9: Checklist for commissioning .................................................................................................................... 44
Table 10: Inspection and maintenance intervals.................................................................................................... 45
Table 11: Materials ................................................................................................................................................ 51
Table 12: Roller bearing greases........................................................................................................................... 68
Table 13: Gear oils ................................................................................................................................................ 70
Table 14: Screw tightening torques ....................................................................................................................... 71
Table 15: Overview of malfunctions....................................................................................................................... 72
Table 16: Definition of leaks according to DIN 3761 .............................................................................................. 73

Pos : 25.1 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/1. Hinw eis e/Sic herheits hinw eis e/01. Sic herheits hinw eise [_Titel] @ 22\m od_1530531998385_388.docx @ 2429407 @ 1 @ 1

10 B 1000 en-2822
 1 Safety information
1 Safety information
Pos : 25.2.1 /Anlei tungen/Getriebe/1. Hinw eise/Sic herheits hinw eise/Bestimm ungsg emäß e Verw endung 01 [Getriebe MR L/EAC ] @ 79\m od_1630574000235_388.docx @ 2819264 @ 2 @ 1

1.1 Intended use

These gear units are used to transmit rotary movements. They convert velocity and torque. They are
intended for use as part of a drive system in commercially used plant and machinery. The gear units
must not be operated until it has been established that the plant or machinery can be safely operated
with the gear unit. Suitable protective measures must be provided if failure of a gear unit or a geared
motor could result in a risk to persons. The machine or system must comply with local legislation and
directives. All applicable health and safety requirements must be met. In particular, the Machinery
Directive 2006/42/EC, TR CU 010/2011 and the TR CU 020/2011 must be especially observed in the
relevant areas of application.
Pos : 25.2.2 /Anlei tungen/Getriebe/1. Hinw eise/Sic herheits hinw eise/Bestimm ungsg emäß e Verw endung 01a_Kom ponenten [B1000 - Getri ebe k ein ex] @ 81\mod_1633339495928_388.docx @ 2833440 @ @ 1

The gear units and geared motors to which this manual with installation instructions refers to are usually
components for installation in machines according to the current EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EG.
In certain individual cases in which the gear unit or the geared motor is considered as a ready-to-install
drive system for specific applications, this drive system is classified as a incomplete machine according
to the current EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EG. A corresponding declaration of incorporation is
enclosed with the product.
Pos : 25.2.4 /Anlei tungen/Getriebe/1. Hinw eise/Sic herheits hinw eise/Bestimm ungsg emäß e Verw endung 02 [Getriebe kei n ex] @ 33\mod_1559642580030_388.docx @ 2538049 @ @ 1

The gear units may not be used in environments in which an explosive atmosphere can occur.
Pos : 25.2.5 /Anlei tungen/Getriebe/1. Hinw eise/Sic herheits hinw eise/Bestimm ungsg emäß e Verw endung 03 [Getriebe] @ 33\m od_1559642705569_388.docx @ 2538086 @ @ 1

The gear units may only be used according to the information in the technical documentation from
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG. Damage to the gear unit may result if the gear unit is not used as
intended and according to the information in the operating and assembly manual. This may also result
in personal injury.
The base or the gear unit mount must be appropriately designed for the weight and torque. All of the
fastenings provided must be used.
Some gear units are equipped with a cooling coil. These gear units may only be operated if the cooling
circuit is connected and in operation.
Pos : 25.5 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/1. Hinw eis e/Sic herheits hinw eis e/Kei ne Veränderungen v ornehmen @ 79\mod_1630576679987_388.docx @ 2819864 @ 2 @ 1

1.2 Do not make any modifications.

Do not make any structural modifications to the gear unit. Do not remove any protective guards.
Pos : 25.6 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/1. Hinw eis e/Sic herheits hinw eis e/Ins pek tionen und Wartung durchführen @ 22\mod_1530529678502_388.docx @ 2429333 @ 2 @ 1

1.3 Performing inspection and maintenance work

Due to lack of maintenance and damage, malfunctions may occur which can result in personal injury.
• Carry out all servicing and maintenance work at the specified intervals.
• Also note that servicing is necessary after long storage periods prior to commissioning.
• Do not operate damaged gear units. The gear unit must not have any leaks.
Pos : 25.7 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/1. Hinw eis e/Sic herheits hinw eis e/Pers onalqualifikation @ 64\m od_1611907700018_388.docx @ 2725830 @ 2 @ 1

1.4 Personnel qualification

All transport, storage, installation, commissioning and maintenance work must be carried out by qualified
specialist personnel.
Qualified specialist personnel are persons who have the training and experience to recognise and avoid
any possible risks.
Pos : 25.9 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------- Seitenum bruc h ---------- @ 1\m od_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 11
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
Pos : 25.10.1 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Sic her heit bei bestimmten Tätigkeiten [_Titel] @ 22\m od_1531811512686_388.docx @ 2433220 @ 2 @ 1

1.5 Safety for particular activities

Pos : 25.10.2 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Auf Tr ansportsc häden k ontr ollieren @ 22\mod_1530528472640_388.docx @ 2429296 @ 3 @ 1

1.5.1 Check for transport damage

Transport damage may cause malfunctions of the gear unit, which may cause personal injury. Oil which
escapes due to leaks may cause a slipping hazard.
• Check the packaging and the gear unit for transport damage.
• Do not operate damaged gear units.
Pos : 25.10.3 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e für Install ati on und Instandhal tung @ 22\m od_1530537922788_388.docx @ 2429600 @ 3 @ 1

1.5.2 Safety information for installation and maintenance

Before starting work on the gear unit disconnect the drive from the power supply and secure it against
accidental switch-on. Allow the gear unit to cool down. Depressurise the cooling circuit lines.
Damaged or defective components, attachment adapters, flanges and covers may have sharp edges.
Wear work gloves and work clothing.
Pos : 25.11.1 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefähr dungen [_Titel] @ 22\mod_1531812422755_388.docx @ 2433257 @ 2 @ 1

1.6 Hazards
Pos : 25.11.2 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefähr dungen beim Anheben 01 @ 34\m od_1559807063051_388.doc x @ 2539250 @ 3 @ 1

1.6.1 Hazards when lifting

Persons may be injured by falling or swinging gear units. Therefore also observe the following
information:
• Cordon off a wide area around the hazard area. Take care that there is adequate space to avoid
swinging loads.
• Never stand under suspended loads.
• Use adequately dimensioned means of transport which are suitable for the purpose. The weight of
the gear unit can be obtained from the type plate.
Pos : 25.11.3 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefähr dungen beim Anheben 02 [Getri ebe] @ 34\m od_1559808648235_388.docx @ 2539334 @ @ 1

• Only lift the gear units by the eye bolts which are provided. The eye bolts must be fully screwed in.
Only pull on the eye bolts vertically, never cross-wise or at an angle. Only use the eye bolts to lift the
gear unit without other components. The eye bolts are not designed for lifting the gear unit with
attachments. Use the eye bolts on both the gear unit and the motor to lift a geared motor.
Pos : 25.11.5 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefähr dung durc h rotier ende Teil ez @ 51\mod_1601301700867_388.docx @ 2674505 @ 3 @ 1

1.6.2 Hazards due to rotating parts

Rotating parts cause a risk of entanglement. This may lead to severe injuries such as crushing or
strangling.
• Provide contact protection. In addition to shafts, this also applies to fans as well as drives and driven
elements such as belt drives, chain drives, shrink discs and couplings. Take possible run-on of the
machine into consideration for the design of protective devices.
• Do not operate the drive without covers or hoods.
• Secure the drive to prevent activation during installation and maintenance work.
• For test operation do not switch on the drive without an installed driven element or secure the motor
shaft key.
• Also observe the safety information in the operating and installation instructions provided by
manufacturers of components supplied.
Pos : 25.11.6 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefähr dungen durc h hohe oder ti efe T emperatur en @ 22\m od_1530531214142_388.docx @ 2429370 @ 3 @ 1

1.6.3 Hazards due to high or low temperatures

The gear unit may heat up to 90 °C during operation. Touching hot surfaces or contact with hot oil may
result in burns. At very low ambient temperatures freezing may occur on contact.
• Only touch the gear unit when wearing gloves after operation or at very low ambient temperatures.

12 B 1000 en-2822
 1 Safety information
• Before starting maintenance work, allow the gear unit to cool down sufficiently after operation.
• Provide a contact guard if there is a risk that persons may touch the gear unit when it is in operation.
• Bursts of hot oil mist may be emitted from the pressure vent screw during operation. Provide a
suitable guard so that persons cannot be injured by this.
• Do not place any flammable materials on the gear unit.
Pos : 25.11.7 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefähr dungen durc h Sc hmierstoffe und ander e Substanzen @ 22\mod_1530535266235_388.docx @ 2429558 @ 3 @ 1

1.6.4 Hazards due to lubricants and other substances

Chemical substances which are used with the gear unit may be toxic. Eye injuries may result if these
substances enter the eyes. Lubricants and adhesives may cause skin irritation.
Oil mist may escape when vent screws are opened.
Due to lubricants and conservation materials, gear units may be slippery and slip out of the hands. There
is a slipping hazard from spilled lubricants.
• When working with chemical substances wear chemical-resistant gloves and work clothing. Wash
your hands after working.
• Wear protective goggles if there is a possibility of splashed chemicals, for example when filling oil or
during cleaning work.
• If chemicals enter the eyes, rinse with large amounts of cold water immediately. Consult a physician
in case of symptoms.
• Observe the safety data sheets for the chemicals. Keep the safety data sheets in the vicinity of the
gear unit.
• Collect spilled lubricants immediately with a binding agent.
Pos : 25.11.8 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefähr dung durc h Lärm @ 22\mod_1530611473949_388.docx @ 2429977 @ 3 @ 1

1.6.5 Hazards due to noise

Some gear units or attached components may cause hazardous noise levels during operation. Wear
hearing protection if work has to be carried out close to such gear units.
Pos : 25.11.9 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefähr dung durc h unter Dr uck s tehendes Kühlmittel @ 22\m od_1531484732839_388.docx @ 2433177 @ 3 @ 1

1.6.6 Hazards due to pressurised coolants

The cooling system is under high pressure. Damage or opening a cooling line which is under pressure
may result in injury. Depressurise the cooling circuit before working on the gear unit.
Pos : 27 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/2. Getriebebesc hrei bung/2. Getriebebesc hreibung [Titel] @ 3\m od_1368691027023_388.doc x @ 65591 @ 1 @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 13
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

2 Description of gear units

Pos : 28 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/2. Getriebebesc hrei bung/Ty penbezeic hnungen und Getriebearten [B1000, B2000]z @ 42\mod_1591254842786_388.docx @ 2629830 @ 2 @ 1

2.1 Gear unit types and type designations

Gear unit types/ Type designations

UNICASE helical gear units
2-stage: SK 02, SK 12, SK 22 SK 32, SK 42, SK 52, SK 62N, SK 62, SK 72, SK 82, SK 92, SK 102
3-stage: SK 03, SK 13, SK 23, SK 33N, SK 43, SK 53, SK 63, SK 73, SK 83, SK 93, SK 103
NORDBLOC.1® helical gear unit
1-stage: SK 071.1, SK 171.1, SK 371.1, SK 571.1, SK 771.1, SK 871.1, SK 971.1, SK 1071.1
2-stage: SK 072.1, SK 172.1, SK 372.1, SK 572.1, SK 672.1, SK 772.1, SK 872.1, SK 972.1
3-stage: SK 373.1, SK 573.1, SK 673.1, SK 773.1, SK 873.1, SK 973.1
STANDARD helical gear units
2-stage: SK 0, SK 01, SK 20, SK 25, SK 30, SK 33
3-stage: SK 010, SK 200, SK 250, SK 300, SK 330
UNICASE parallel gear units
2-stage: SK 0182NB, SK 0182.1, SK 0282NB, SK 0282.1, SK 1282, SK 1282.1, SK 2282, SK 3282, SK 4282,
SK 5282, SK 6282, SK 7282, SK 8282, SK 9282
3-stage: SK 2382, SK 3382, SK 4382, SK 5382, SK 6382, SK 7382, SK 8382, SK 9382, SK 10382,
SK 10382.1, SK 11382
UNICASE bevel gear units
3-stage: SK 9012.1, SK 9016.1, SK 9022.1, SK 9032.1, SK 9042.1, SK 9052.1, SK 9062.1, SK 9072.1,
SK 9082.1, SK 9086.1, SK 9092.1, SK 9096.1
4-stage: SK 9013.1, SK 9017.1, SK 9023.1, SK 9033.1, SK 9043.1, SK 9053.1
NORDBLOC.1® bevel gear unit
2-stage: SK 920072.1, SK 92072.1, SK 92172.1, SK 92372.1, SK 92672.1, SK 92772.1, SK 930072.1,
SK 93072.1, SK 93172.1, SK 93372.1, SK 93672.1, SK 93772.1
UNICASE worm gear units
2-stage: SK 02040, SK 02040.1, SK 02050, SK 12063, SK 12080, SK 32100, SK 42125
3-stage: SK 13050, SK 13063, SK 13080, SK 33100, SK 43125
UNIVERSAL SI worm gear units
1-stage: SK 1SI31, SK 1SID31, SK 1SI40, SK 1SID40, SK 1SI50, SK 1SID50, SK 1SI63, SK 1SID63, SK 1SI75
2-stage (Helical worm gear unit): SK 2SID40, SK 2SID50, SK 2SID63
UNIVERSAL SMI worm gear units
1-stage: SK 1SMI31, SK 1SMID31, SK 1SMI40, SK 1SMID40, SK 1SMI50, SK 1SMID50, SK 1SMI63,
SK 1SMID63, SK 1SMI75
2-stage (Helical worm gear unit): SK 2SMID40, SK 2SMID50, SK 2SMID63

Table 2: Gear unit types and type designations

Double gear units consist of two single gear units. The type designation of the SK 73/22 double gear
unit, for example, means that the double gear unit consists of the single gear units SK 73 and SK 22.
Pos : 33 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/2. Getriebebesc hrei bung/Optionen und Ausführ ung en [B1000] @ 43\m od_1591796627333_388.doc x @ 2633580 @ @ 1

14 B 1000 en-2822
 2 Description of gear units

Abbreviation

Description

(without) Foot mounting with solid shaft

/31 Worm gear first stage
/40 Worm gear first stage
5 Reinforced output shaft
A Hollow shaft
AI Standard IEC motor attachment
AI…BRG1 Standard IEC motor attachment with manual re-lubrication
AI…RLS Standard IEC motor attachment with integrated back stop
AL Reinforced axial bearing
AN Standard NEMA motor attachment
AN…BRG1 Standard NEMA motor attachment with manual re-lubrication
AN…RLS Standard NEMA motor attachment with integrated back stop
B Fastening element
CC Cooling coil
D Torque arm
DR Pressure vent
EA Splined hollow shaft
F B5 flange
G Rubber buffer for torque arm
H Cover cap
/H10 Modular helical pre-stage for universal worm gear units
H66 IP66 cover
IEC Standard IEC motor attachment
K Torque bracket
L Solid shaft both sides
M GRIPMAXX™
MK Motor bracket
NEMA Standard NEMA motor attachment
OA Oil expansion chamber
OT Oil level tank
R Back stop
S Shrink disc
SCP Screw conveyor flange
SO1 Synthetic oil ISO VG 220
V Solid shaft (for standard helical gear units: reinforced drive)
VG Reinforced rubber buffer
VI Viton radial shaft seals
VL Reinforced output bearings
Agitator version
VL2
- Reinforced bearings
Agitator version
VL3 - Reinforced bearings
- Drywell
VS Reinforced shrink disc
W Free drive shaft
X Housing foot mounting
Z B14 flange
Table 3: Versions and options
Pos : 36 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------- Seitenum bruc h ---------- @ 1\m od_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 15
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
Pos : 37 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/2. Getriebebesc hrei bung/Ty pens chil d nicht- Exz @ 50\mod_1601291511854_388.docx @ 2673525 @ 2 @ 1

2.2 Name plate

The name plate must be firmly attached to the gear unit and must not be subjected to permanent soiling.
Please contact the NORD service department if the name plate is illegible or damaged.

Figure 1: Name plate

Explanation
1 DataMatrix code 8 Weight
2 NORD gear unit type 9 Overall gear unit ratio
3 Modes of operation 10 Installation position
4 Year of manufacture 11 Rated speed of gear unit output shaft
5 Serial number 12 Lubricant type, viscosity and quantity
6 Rated torque of gear unit output shaft 13 Customer part number
7 Drive power 14 Operating factor

Pos : 43 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Kopi e v on 3. Tr ansport, Lagerung, M ontage @ 50\m od_1601291650567_388.docx @ 2673563 @ 1 @ 1

16 B 1000 en-2822
 3 Transport, storage, assembly
3 Transport, storage, assembly
Pos : 44 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Trans port/Trans port des Getriebes 01 headline @ 34\mod_1559812428776_388.docx @ 2539371 @ 2 @ 1

3.1 Transporting the gear unit

Pos : 45 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Trans port/Trans port des Getriebes 02 [Standardg etriebe - Ri ngschr aube] @ 34\m od_1559813589771_388.docx @ 2539562 @ @ 1

WARNING
Hazard due to falling loads
• The thread of the eyebolt must be fully screwed in.
• As shown in the illustration to the right, only lift on the
eyebolts vertically to the female thread and not more
oblique than 45° to the vertical.
• Note the centre of gravity of the gear unit.

Only use the eyebolts attached to the gear unit for transport. If geared motors have an additional eyebolt
attached to the motor, this must also be used.
Pos : 47 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Trans port/Trans port des Getriebes 03z @ 50\mod_1601291699716_388.docx @ 2673601 @ @ 1

Transport the gear unit with care. Impacts to the free ends of shafts may cause internal damage to the
gear unit.
No additional loads must be attached to the gear unit.
Use suitable aids such as cross-beams or similar to facilitate transportation of the gear unit. Gear units
may only be transported with shackles and lifting strapschains at an angle of 90° to 70° to the horizontal.
Pos : 62 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Lager ung/Lag erung und Stillstandsz eiten @ 75\mod_1623247972391_388.docx @ 2789027 @ 2 @ 1

3.2 Storage and downtimes

Pos : 63 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Lager ung/Lag erung allg. @ 75\mod_1623253002532_388.docx @ 2789186 @ 3 @ 1

3.2.1 General measures

• Store the gear unit in a dry space, relative humidity less than 60%.
• Store the gear unit at a temperature in the range of – 5 °C to + 50 °C without severe temperature
fluctuations.
• Do not expose the gear unit to direct sunlight or UV light.
• There must be no aggressive or corrosive substances (contaminated air, ozone, gases, solvents,
acids, alkalis, salts, radioactivity etc.) in the immediate vicinity.
• The gear unit must not be exposed to vibration or oscillation.
• Store the gear unit in the mounting position (see chapter 7.1 "Versions and mounting position").
Secure it against falling.

Pos : 64 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------Seitenum bruc h k om pak t --------- @ 13\mod_1476369695906_0.docx @ 2265495 @ @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 17
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
Pos : 65 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Lager ung/Lag erung 3- 9 M on. @ 75\m od_1623253008235_388.docx @ 2789226 @ 3 @ 1

3.2.2 Storage and downtimes in excess of 3 months

Note the following measures in addition to Section 3.2.1 "General measures".
• Repair damages to the coating. Check if a corrosion protection agent has been applied to the flange
bearing surfaces, the shaft ends and the unpainted surfaces. If required, apply a suitable corrosion
protection agent to the surfaces.
• Seal all openings on the gear unit.
• The output shaft must be rotated by at least one revolution every 3 months so that the contact position
of the gear teeth and the roller bearings are changed.
Pos : 67 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Lager ung/Langzei tlager ung _01 [B1000 - B2050] @ 75\m od_1623392639917_388.docx @ 2789860 @ 35 @ 1

3.2.3 Storage and downtimes in excess of 9 months

Under certain conditions, storage of 2 to 3 years is possible. The specified storage duration is for
guidance only. The actual storage duration depends on the local conditions. Note the following
measures in addition to Sections 3.2.1 "General measures"and 3.2.2 "Storage and downtimes in excess
of 3 months".
Gear units can be supplied prepared for long-term storage. The gear units are completely filled with
lubricant, have VCI corrosion protection agent mixed with the gear oil or are filled with small quantities
of VCI concentrate. The adhesive label on the housing shows the respective information.
Conditions of the gear unit and storage area for long-term storage prior to commissioning:
• Store the gear unit at a temperature in the range of -5 °C to +40 °C without severe temperature
fluctuations.
• Check if the sealing cord in the vent screw is in place. It must not be removed during storage.
• Store the gear unit in a dry space. With a relative humidity less than 60%, the gear unit can be stored
for up to two years; with a relative humidity less than 50%, storage of up to three years is possible.
• For gear units, which are filled with VCI concentrate for long-term storage, the VCI concentrate must
be renewed after 2 years and distributed in the oil by rotating the shaft.
• In tropical regions, protect the gear unit against damage by insects.
• Gear unit components such as brakes, couplings, belt drive, and cooling units must be protected for
a long-term storage in accordance to their operation instructions.
Pos : 68 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Lager ung/Langzei tlager ungz _03 @ 75\mod_1623419508584_388.docx @ 2790551 @ @ 1

In addition to the preparations listed in 4 "Commissioning", the following measures are necessary before
commissioning:
• Check the gear unit for external damage.
• After storage of more than 2 years, or with storage temperatures outside of the permissible range
from -5 °C to +40 °C, replace the lubricant in the gear unit before commissioning.
• If the gear unit is completely filled, the oil level must be reduced according to the mounting position.
For the lubricant quantity and lubricant type, refer to the information on the name plate.
• For gear units without oil filling, the oil level must be refilled and checked according to chapter 5.2.3
"Checking the oil level" before commissioning. The VCI concentrate may remain in the gear unit. The
VCI concentrate is not mixable with polyglycol-based lubricants (PG oils). If PG oils are used, the
VCI concentrate must be removed from the gear unit. When using VCI additive, only use the oil types
which are specified on the name plate and are approved by Getriebebau NORD (see chapter 7.2.2
"Gear oils").
Pos : 71 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Lager ung/Langzei tlager ung _04 [B1000, B2000] @ 79\m od_1630594429942_388.docx @ 2820515 @ @ 1

• For the option with manual re-lubrication, switch the bearing grease after a storage of more than 2
years. The service life of the grease is reduced after a storage time or gearbox shutdown of more
than 9 months (see chapter 5.2.6 "Re-greasing (Option: VL2, VL3, W, AI, AN)").
• Gear units filled with VCI concentrate for long-term storage are fully closed. Take care that the vent
is fitted and released as necessary prior to commissioning.
Pos : 76 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------- Seitenum bruc h ---------- @ 1\m od_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

18 B 1000 en-2822
 3 Transport, storage, assembly
Pos : 77 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Vorbereitungen z um Aufstell en_01 @ 28\m od_1551437422532_388.doc x @ 2493987 @ 2 @ 1

3.3 Preparing for installation

Pos : 78 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Auf Sc häden über prüfen @ 50\mod_1601292567207_388.docx @ 2673757 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.1 Check for damages

Please examine the delivery for transport and packaging damage immediately on receipt. Pay particular
attention to radial shaft seals and sealing caps. Report any damage to the carrier immediately.
Do not put the drive into operation if damage such as leaks are visible.
Pos : 79 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Korrosi ons schutzmi ttel entfer nen @ 50\mod_1601292618930_388.docx @ 2673803 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.2 Remove corrosion protection agents

All bare metal surfaces and shafts of the drive are protected with corrosion protection agents before
shipping.
Thoroughly remove corrosion protection agents and any dirt (e.g. colour residues) from all shafts, flange
surfaces and gear unit attachment surfaces before assembly.
Pos : 80 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Drehrichtung pr üfen @ 51\mod_1601292660617_388.docx @ 2673849 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.3 Check rotational direction

If an incorrect rotational direction may result in damage or potential risk, check for the correct rotational
direction of the output shaft during a test run before attaching it to the machine. Ensure the correct
rotational direction during operation.
For gear units with an integrated back stop, switching the drive motor to the blocked direction of rotation,
may result in damage to the gear unit. Gears with integrated back stops are marked with arrows on the
drive/driven sides. The arrows point in the rotation direction of the gear unit. When connecting the motor
and during motor control, ensure, e.g. by testing the field of rotation, that the gear unit can only operate
in the direction of rotation.
Pos : 81 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Drehrichtung pr üfen Verweis G1000 WN @ 49\m od_1599579478202_388.docx @ 2666924 @ @ 1

For further explanations refer to Catalogue G1000 and document WN 0-000 40.
Pos : 82 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Umgebungsbedi ngungen prüfen @ 51\m od_1601292705144_388.docx @ 2673895 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.4 Check ambient conditions

Make sure that no aggressive or corrosive substances which attack metal, lubricants or elastomers are
present at the installation site or are subsequently expected during operation. If such substances are to
be expected, contact Getriebebau NORD.
The gear unit, especially its radial shaft seals should be protected from exposure to direct sunlight.
Pos : 83 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Umgebungsbedi ngungen prüfen _02 [B1000] @ 81\mod_1633344552750_388.docx @ 2833557 @ @ 1

The standard permissible ambient temperature range for synthetic gear unit oils (CLP PG … and
CLP HC…) is –20 °C to +40 °C. This temperature range can be extended according to the lubricant
table (see chapter 7.2.2 "Gear oils"), if all mounted materials of the gear unit and the application-related
speed, torques and modes of operation allow this. Note the project planning documents of the order for
this. In case of doubt, ask Getriebebau NORD.
For mineral oil (CLP), the permissible ambient temperature range in accordance to the above stated
lubricant table is restricted. The lubricant type is indicated on the name plate (see chapter 2.2 "Name
plate ").
For installation altitudes above 1000 m above sea level, the permissible speed and torques may be
reduced. Note the project planning documents of the order for this. In case of doubt, ask Getriebebau
NORD.
Pos : 84 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/ns d tupH @ 49\mod_1599579502101_388.docx @ 2667016 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.5 Drives with nsd tupH surface treatment

Drives with nsd tupH surface treatment must be electrically decoupled from other components by the
use of non-conductive intermediate layers in order to prevent galvanic corrosion.
Pos : 85 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Ölausgleic hs behälter monti eren [B1000] @ 49\m od_1599579513109_388.docx @ 2667062 @ 3 @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 19
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
3.3.6 Installing the oil expansion chamber (Option: OA)
Mount the oil expansion chamber (Option OA) according to document WN 0-530 04. For gear units with
a M10x1 vent screw or pressure relief vent, document WN 0-521 35 must also be observed during
installation.
Pos : 87 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------- Seitenum bruc h ---------- @ 1\m od_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

Pos : 88 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Ölstands behälter monti eren Getriebem otor [B1000] @ 79\m od_1630595346601_388.docx @ 2820591 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.7 Installing the oil reservoir tank (Option: OT)

Mount the oil reservoir tank (Option OT) according to document WN 0-521 30.
A pressure vent is optionally available. If available, screw the M12x1.5 pressure relief vent into the oil
reservoir tank.

20 B 1000 en-2822
 3 Transport, storage, assembly

Pos : 92 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Aufstellen des Getriebes 01 headline @ 30\m od_1552984754668_388.docx @ 2511994 @ 2 @ 1

3.4 Installing the gear unit

Pos : 93 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Aufstellen des Getriebes 02 [B1000] @ 34\mod_1559653394421_388.docx @ 2538251 @ 2 @ 1

NOTICE!
Gear unit damage through overheating
• For geared motors, check that the cooling air from the motor fan can circulate around the gear unit
without obstruction.

Pos : 96 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Aufstellen des Getriebes 03 [B1000, B2000]z @ 49\mod_1599730768336_388.docx @ 2667681 @ @ 1

NOTICE
Damage of bearing and gear wheel
• Do not carry out any welding work on the gear unit.
• Do not use the gear unit as earth connection for welding work.

The following conditions must be met at the installation site in order to prevent overheating during
operation:
• There must be adequate space around the gear unit.
• Air must be able to flow freely past all sides of the gear unit.
• For geared motors, the cooling air from the motor fan must be able to circulate around the gear unit
without obstruction.
• The gear unit must not be enclosed or encased.
• The gear unit must not be exposed to high energy radiation.
• Do not direct warm exhaust air from other units onto the gear unit.
• The base or flange to which the gear unit is attached must not input any heat into the gear unit during
operation.
• Do not allow dust to accumulate in the area of the gear unit
Install the gear unit in the correct mounting position (see chapter 7.1 "Versions and mounting
position"). Oil checking and oil drain screws must be accessible.
The base or flange to which the gear unit is fitted should be vibration-free, torsionally rigid and flat. The
flatness of the bolting surface on the base or flange must comply with DIN ISO 2768-2 tolerance class
K.
Precisely align the gear unit with the drive shaft of the machine in order to prevent additional forces from
being imposed on the gear unit due to distortion.
Fasten the gear unit to all gear unit feet of one side or to all flange holes. Use bolts with a minimum
quality of 8.8. Tighten the bolts with correct torques (see chapter 7.3 "Screw tightening torques").
For foot and flange-mounted gear units (Option XZ or XF), ensure tension-free bolting. The foot
mounting is used to fasten the gear unit. It is designed to absorb the reaction forces from the torque,
radial and axial forces as well as the weight. B5 or B14 flanges are basically not designed to absorb the
reaction forces. In case of doubt, contact Getriebebau NORD for investigation of the particular case.
Earth the gear unit housing. For geared motors, ensure the earthing via the motor connection.

B 1000 en-2822 21
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

Pos : 99 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Montage/M ontage v on Naben auf Vollwell en 01 - headlinez @ 58\m od_1606220641888_388.docx @ 2695640 @ 2 @ 1

3.5 Installation of a hub on solid shaft (option: V, L)

Pos : 102 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on N aben auf Getriebew ellen 02z_01 [B1000- B2050, B5010] @ 51\mod_1601292968188_388.docx @ 2674016 @ @ 1

NOTICE
The gear unit may be damaged by axial forces.
Bearings, gearwheels, shafts and housings may be damaged by incorrect fitting.
• Use a suitable pulling device.
• Do not hit the hub with a hammer.

Figure 2: Example of a simple pulling device

During fitting, ensure that the shaft axes are precisely aligned with each other. Comply with the
permissible tolerance details provided by the manufacturer.

Information
Use the end thread of the shafts for pulling. Fitting can be facilitated by coating the hub with lubricant
or heating it up to approx. 100 °C beforehand.

Pos : 104 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on N aben auf Getriebew ellen 02z_03 [B1000- B2050, B5010] @ 79\mod_1630661149694_388.docx @ 2820937 @ @ 1

The maximum radial forces FR1 and FR2 and axial forces FA2 which are imposed on the driving
and driven elements of the gear unit must not be exceeded (refer to the name plate). Pay particular
attention to the correct tension of belts and chains.
Additional loads due to unbalanced hubs are not permitted.

22 B 1000 en-2822
 3 Transport, storage, assembly

The transverse force must be applied as closely as possible to the gear unit. For drive shafts with free
shaft ends (Option W), the maximum permissible transverse force FR1 applies for the application of the
transverse force to the centre of the free shaft journal. For output shafts, the application of the transverse
force FR2 must not exceed the dimension xR2. If the radial force FR2 is stated on the name plate, but no
dimension xR2 is stated, application of force is assumed to be to the centre of the shaft journal.
Pos : 105 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on N aben auf Getriebew ellen 03 @ 79\m od_1630664786514_388.doc x @ 2821318 @ @ 1

Figure 3: Permissible application of force to drive and driven shafts

Pos : 106 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 1\mod_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 23
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
Pos : 107 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Aufsteckg etrieben 00 headlinez @ 49\m od_1599809016571_388.docx @ 2668530 @ 2 @ 1

3.6 Fitting push-on gear units with fastening element (option: B)

Pos : 108 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Aufsteckg etrieben 01 [B1000, B2000, B5010]z @ 61\m od_1608019903929_388.docx @ 2709290 @ @ 1

WARNING
Risk of severe injuries
If the screw fastenings of the torque arm are removed during operation, the gear unit will rotate around
the output shaft.
• Secure the screw fastening against loosening, e.g. with Loctite 242 or a second nut.

NOTICE
The gear unit may be damaged by axial forces.
Bearings, gearwheels, shafts and housings may be damaged by incorrect fitting.
• Use a suitable pulling device.
• Do not strike the gear unit with a hammer.

Assembly and subsequent dismantling is facilitated by applying an anti-corrosive lubricant to the shaft
before fitting (e.g. NORD Anti-Corrosion Part No. 089 00099). Excess lubricant may escape after fitting
and may drip off. This escape of grease is not due to a leak in the gear unit. Thoroughly clean these
points on the output shaft after a running-in time of approx. 24 hours.

Figure 4: Applying lubricant to the shaft and the hub

Pos : 109 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Aufsteckg etrieben 02 [B1000, B2000]z @ 61\m od_1608019925501_388.docx @ 2709328 @ @ 1

For push-on gear units with cover cap IP66 (Option H66) and fastening element (Option B) the pressed-
in closing cap must be pushed out before installing the gear unit. The pressed-in closing cap may be
destroyed during dismantling. A 2nd closing cap is supplied as a spare part. Fit the closing cap after
installation of the gear unit as described in Section 3.9 "Fitting the covers (option: H, H66)".

24 B 1000 en-2822
 3 Transport, storage, assembly

Figure 5: Removing the factory-fitted closing cap

Pos : 110 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Aufsteckg etrieben 03 [B1000, B2000, B5010]z @ 79\m od_1630916355996_388.docx @ 2821670 @ @ 1

The gear unit can be fitted to solid shafts with and without a shoulder using the fixing element (Option B).
Tighten the fastening element bolt with correct torque (see chapter 7.3 "Screw tightening torques").
When fastening without a contact shoulder, a circlip is used in the hollow shaft for axial fastening.

Figure 6: Gear unit mounted on shaft with a shoulder using the fastening element

Figure 7: Gear unit mounted on shaft without a shoulder using the fastening element

A gear unit can be removed from a shaft with a shoulder e.g. using the following device.

Figure 8: Removal using dismantling device

Pos : 111 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Aufsteckg etrieben 04 [B1000, B2000]z @ 61\m od_1608020615950_388.docx @ 2709404 @ @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 25
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
Do not distort the support when installing push-on gear units with a torque support. Tension-free
mounting is aided by the rubber buffer (Option G or VG).

Figure 9: Mounting the rubber buffer (Option G and/or VG) on parallel shaft gear units

To fit the rubber buffer, tighten the screw fastening until there is no play between the contact surfaces
when there is no load. For screw fastenings with standard thread, then rotate the fastening nut half a
turn in order to pre-tension the rubber buffer. Greater pre-tension is not permissible.

Explanation
1 Always support torque support
on both sides

Figure 10: Attaching the torque support on bevel gear and worm gear units

Tighten the fastenings of the torque support with the correct torque (see chapter 7.3 "Screw tightening
torques")and secure them against loosening, e.g. with Loctite 242 or Loxeal 54-03.
Pos : 114 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 00a_Ü bers chrift [B1000, B2000] @ 51\mod_1601293159649_388.docx @ 2674093 @ 2 @ 1

3.7 Fitting a hollow shaft with shrink disc (Option: S)

Pos : 116 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 00a @ 81\m od_1633418251803_388.docx @ 2834247 @ @ 1

NOTICE
Risk of damage to the gear unit if the shrink disk is installed incorrectly
• Do not tighten the tensioning bolts if the solid shaft is not installed. This would permanently deform
the hollow shaft.

Hollow shafts with shrink discs must be protected from dust, dirt and moisture. NORD recommends
option H/H66 (see chapter 3.9 "Fitting the covers (option: H, H66)").
Pos : 118 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 01 [B1000, B2000]z @ 49\mod_1600326280680_388.docx @ 2670400 @ @ 1

Explanation

26 B 1000 en-2822
 3 Transport, storage, assembly
1 Shrink disc, type, part no. and torque
details for tensioning bolts
2 Tensioning flanges
3 Solid shaft of machine
4 Shaft and hollow shaft bore
FREE OF GREASE
5 Hollow shaft of gear unit
6 Double half-slotted inner ring
7 Tensioning bolts DIN 931 (933) -10.9

Figure 11: Hollow shaft with shrink disc

Pos : 119 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 02 [B1000, B2000]z @ 59\mod_1606486948547_388.docx @ 2700168 @ @ 1

The shrink disc is supplied ready for fitting. It must not be dismantled prior to fitting.

The solid shaft material must have a minimum yield strength of 360 N/mm2. This ensures that no
permanent deformation occurs due to the clamping force.

If necessary, also observe the documentation from the manufacturer of the shrink disc.

Prerequisites
• The hollow shaft must be completely free of grease.
• The solid shaft of the machine must be completely free of grease.
• The external diameter of the solid shaft must be within the tolerance h6 or k6 for highly irregular
operation, unless otherwise specified in the order-related dimension sheet. The fit must be according
to DIN EN ISO 286-2.

Pos : 121 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 03 [B1000], B2000]z @ 50\mod_1600326313180_388.docx @ 2670514 @ @ 1

Fitting procedure
Pos : 123 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 04z @ 51\mod_1601293393181_388.docx @ 2674205 @ @ 1

1. Remove the cover, if any.

2. Loosen the tensioning bolts of the shrink disc, but do not unscrew them completely. Tighten the
tensioning bolts gently by hand until there is no play between the flanges and the inner ring.
Pos : 124 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 05 [B1000, B2000]z @ 50\mod_1600328935099_388.docx @ 2670629 @ @ 1

3. Lightly grease the bore of the inner ring. Push the shrink disc onto the hollow shaft until the outer
clamping flange is flush with the hollow shaft.

4. Grease the solid shaft of the machine in the area which will later come into contact with the bushing
in the hollow shaft. Do not grease the bronze bushing. It is essential that the tensioning seat of the
hollow shaft is free of grease.
Pos : 126 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 06z @ 51\mod_1601293531630_388.docx @ 2674280 @ @ 1

5. Insert the solid shaft of the machine into the hollow shaft so that the area around the shrink
connection is completely filled.

B 1000 en-2822 27
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

6. Tighten the tensioning bolts of the shrink disc in sequence with approx. ¼ rotation of the bolt per
turn in clockwise direction by several turns. Use a torque wrench to tighten tensioning bolts to the
tightening torque specified on the shrink disc.
Pos : 127 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 07 [B1000, B2000]z @ 50\mod_1600328954216_388.docx @ 2670705 @ @ 1

7. Check if there is an even gap between the clamping flanges. If this is not the case, the shrink disc
connection must be dismantled and checked for correct fit.
Pos : 129 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 08z @ 51\mod_1601293637311_388.docx @ 2674354 @ @ 1

8. Mark the hollow shaft of the gear unit and the solid shaft of the machine with a label in order to detect
any slippage under load.

Standard disassembly procedure:

Pos : 130 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 09 [B1000, B2000]z @ 50\mod_1600331634752_388.docx @ 2670819 @ @ 1

WARNING
Danger of injury due to sudden mechanical release
The elements of the shrink disc are under great mechanical tension. Sudden release of the outer rings
produces high separating forces and can result in uncontrolled detachment of shrink disc components.
• Do not remove any tensioning bolts if you have not ensured that the external outer rings of the shrink
disc have been released from the inner ring.

1. Loosen the tensioning bolts of the shrink disc with approx. ¼ rotation of the bolt per turn in sequence
in a clockwise direction by several turns. Do not remove the tensioning bolts from their thread.

2. Loosen the clamping flanges from the cone of the inner ring.

3. Remove the gear unit from the solid shaft of the machine.
Pos : 132 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 10 Ins tandhaltungz @ 51\mod_1601293722756_388.docx @ 2674429 @ @ 1

If a shrink disc has been in use for a long period or is dirty, dismantle it and clean it before refitting.
Check the shrink disc for damage or corrosion. Replace the damaged elements if they are not in perfect
condition.
Pos : 133 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 11 [B1000, B2000] @ 75\m od_1624288142676_388.docx @ 2795770 @ @ 1

Coat the conical surfaces with MOLYKOTE® G-Rapid Plus or a similar lubricant. Place some multi-
purpose grease on the screw thread and the contact surfaces of the screw heads.
Pos : 135 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 1\mod_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

28 B 1000 en-2822
 3 Transport, storage, assembly
Pos : 136 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on H ohlwell e mit GRIPMAXXz @ 50\m od_1600432726756_388.docx @ 2671629 @ 25 @ 1

3.8 Fitting a hollow shaft with GRIPMAXX™ (Option: M)

NOTICE
Damage to the gear unit due to incorrect installation
• Do not tighten the tensioning bolts of the shrink disc until the solid shaft and the torque bush are in
the correct position.

1 Shrink disc 5 Hollow shaft (gear unit)

2 Tensioning bolts 6 Solid shaft (machine)
3 Torque bush 7 Support bush
4 Clamping ring
Figure 12: GRIPMAXX™, exploded diagram

Take all expected peak loads into account when dimensioning the solid shaft or the machine shaft.

The solid shaft material must have a minimum yield strength of 360 N/mm2. This ensures that no
permanent deformation occurs due to the clamping force.
Do not use corrosion protection, assembly paste or other coatings on the fitting surfaces of the
shaft, the bushes, the clamping rings or the shrink disc.

Prerequisites
• The solid shaft [6] must be free from burrs, corrosion, lubricants or other foreign bodies.
• The hollow shaft [5], the bushes [3], [7], the clamping ring [4] and the shrink disc [1] must be free
from dirt, grease and oil.
• The solid shaft diameter must be within the following tolerances:

B 1000 en-2822 29
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

Metric machine shafts Imperial machine shafts

ISO 286-2 ISO 286-2
From to From to
Tolerance h11(-) Tolerance h11(-)
Ø [mm] Ø [mm] [mm] Ø [in] Ø [in] [in]
10 18 -0.11 0.4375 0.6875 -0.004
18 30 -0.13 0.7500 1.0625 -0.005
30 50 -0.16 1.1250 1.9375 -0.006
50 80 -0.19 2.0000 3.1250 -0.007
80 120 -0.22 3.1875 4.6875 -0.008
120 180 -0.25 4.7500 7.0625 -0.009

Table 4: Permissible machine shaft tolerances

Fitting procedure
1. Determine the correct installation position of the shrink disc [1] on the gear unit. Ensure that the
position of the hollow shaft [5] corresponds to the details in the order.
2. Push the support bush [7] and the clamping ring [4] on the solid shaft [6]. Ensure that the support
bush is correctly positioned. Secure the support bush [7] with the clamping ring [4] by tightening the
clamping ring bolt.
3. Push the gear unit up to the stop on the secured support bush [7].
4. Slightly loosen the tensioning bolts [2] and push the shrink disc [1] on the solid shaft.
5. Push the torque bush [3] on the solid shaft.
6. Tighten the 3 or 4 clamping bolts [2] finger tight and ensure that the outer rings of the shrink disc are
pulled together parallel. Then tighten the remaining bolts.
7. Tighten the tensioning bolts successively in a clockwise direction by several turns – not crosswise
– with approx. ¼ rotation of the bolt per turn. Use a torque wrench to achieve the specified tightening
torque on the shrink disc.
When the tensioning bolts have been tightened, there must be an even gap between the clamping
flanges. If this is not the case, dismantle the shrink disc connection and check the fit.

Dismantling procedure

WARNING
Danger of injury due to sudden mechanical release
The elements of the shrink disc are under great mechanical tension. Sudden release of the outer rings
produces high separating forces and can result in uncontrolled detachment of shrink disc components.
• Do not remove any tensioning bolts if you have not ensured that the external outer rings of the shrink
disc have been released from the inner ring.

1. Unscrew the tensioning bolts [2] of the shrink disc in sequence, with approximately half a turn (180°),
until the inner ring of the shrink disc can be moved.
2. Pull the shrink disc [1] with the torque bush [3] off from the shaft.
3. Remove the outer rings of the shrink disc from the conical inner ring. For this it may be necessary to
lightly tap the bolts with a soft-face hammer or to lightly lever the outer rings apart.
4. Pull the gear unit off the machine shaft.

Clean all individual components before refitting. Check the bushes and the shrink disc for damage or
corrosion. Replace the bushes and the shrink disc if they are not in perfect condition. Coat the conical

30 B 1000 en-2822
 3 Transport, storage, assembly
seat of the outer rings and the outside of the clamping ring with MOLYKOTE® G-Rapid Plus or a similar
product. Place some multi-purpose grease on the screw thread and the contact surfaces of the screw
heads.
Pos : 154 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Abdeck hauben 00 headline [B1000, B2000] @ 59\m od_1606992303088_388.doc x @ 2703330 @ 2 @ 1

3.9 Fitting the covers (option: H, H66)

Pos : 160 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Abdeck hauben 02z @ 51\mod_1601372777513_388.docx @ 2674836 @ @ 1

Use all fastening screws. Secure the fastening screws by coating them with securing lubricant, e.g.
Loctite 242, Loxeal 54-03. Tighten the fastening screws with the correct torque (see chapter 7.3 "Screw
tightening torques").
Pos : 161 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Abdeck hauben 03 [B 1000, B 2000] @ 35\mod_1560335100666_388.docx @ 2540919 @ @ 1

For covers with Option H66, press in the new condition closing cap by tapping it lightly with a hammer.

Figure 13: Fitting the covers, Option SH, Option H, and Option H66
Pos : 162 /Allgem ein/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 3\mod_1375347474401_0.docx @ 84886 @ @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 31
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

Pos : 163 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Abdeckk appen [B1000, B2000]z @ 51\m od_1601385023932_388.docx @ 2674875 @ 2 @ 1

3.10 Fitting the covers

Some versions of universal worm gear units are delivered as standard with a plastic cover cap. The
cover cap protects the radial shaft seals against the entry of dust and other contamination. The cover
cap can attached on the A side or the B side. It can be removed by hand without tools.

NOTICE
Damage to the expansion elements of the cover cap
• Do not jam the cover cap when pulling it off or attaching it.

Pull the cover cap off vertically prior to the installation of the universal worm gear unit. After completing
the fitting, attach the cover cap onto the right side by attaching the expanding elements into the threaded
holes on the output flange.

Figure 14: Disassembly and assembly of the cover cap

Pos : 165 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 00 headline + Einl eitung [B1000, B2000] @ 89\m od_1656678308695_388.docx @ 2920510 @ 2 @ 1

3.11 Fitting a standard motor (Option: IEC, NEMA, AI, AN)

The maximum permitted motor weights indicated in the tables below must not be exceeded:
Pos : 168 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 01_Tabellenkopf_IEC-Motor en [B1000, B2000]z @ 89\mod_1656677983199_388.docx @ 2920396 @ @ 1

Maximum permitted motor weights

Motor size 63 71 80 90 100 112 132 160 180 200 225 250 280 315
Max. motor weight [kg] 25 30 50 50 80 80 100 250 250 350 500 1000 1000 1500
Pos : 169 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 01_Tabellenrum pf_IEC-M otoren [B1000, B2000] @ 89\m od_1656680433209_0.doc x @ 2920587 @ @ 1

32 B 1000 en-2822
 3 Transport, storage, assembly
SK 32, SK 3282, 100 100
SK 9032.1, SK 32100,
SK 772.1, SK 773.1
SK 42, SK 4282, 100 100 130 200
SK 9042.1, SK 42125
SK 52, SK 63, 100 100 130
SK 5282, SK 6382,
SK 9052.1,
SK 872.1, SK 873.1,
SK 972.1, SK 973.1
SK 62, SK 73, SK 83, 100 100 130
SK 6282,
SK 7382, SK 8382,
SK 9072.1
SK 72, SK 82, SK 93, 130
SK 103,
SK 7282, SK 8282,
SK 9382, SK 10382.1,
SK 9082.1, SK 9086.1,
SK 9092.1, SK 9096.1
SK 920072.1, 40
SK 92072.1, SK 0,
SK 071.1, SK 0182.1
SK 1382NB, 60
SK 1382.1,
SK 92372,
SK 92372.1,
SK 12063, SK 372.1,
SK 371.1
Pos : 170 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 01_Tabellenuntersc hrift_IEC-M otoren [B1000, B2000] @ 89\m od_1656680713523_388.docx @ 2920625 @ @ 1

Table 5: Motor weights IEC motors

Pos : 171 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 01_Tabellenkopf_N EMA-Motor en [B1000, B2000] @ 89\mod_1656681174654_388.docx @ 2920701 @ @ 1

Maximum permitted motor weights

Motor size
140TC

180TC

201TC

250TC

280TC

320TC

360TC

400TC
56C

Max. motor weight [kg] 30 50 80 100 200 250 350 700 700
Pos : 172 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 01_Tabellenrum pf_NEM A-Motoren [B1000, B2000] @ 89\m od_1656681528259_0.docx @ 2920739 @ @ 1

SK 62, SK 72, SK 73, 500 500

SK 83, SK 93,
SK 9072.1, SK 6282,
SK 7282, SK 7382,
SK 8382, SK 9382
Pos : 173 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 01_Tabellenuntersc hrift_N EM A-Motoren [B1000, B2000] @ 89\m od_1656681691355_388.docx @ 2920777 @ @ 1

Table 6: Motor weights NEMA motors

Pos : 176 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 03z @ 59\mod_1606742688607_388.docx @ 2701400 @ 5 @ 1

Fitting a standard motor to the IEC adapter (Option IEC) or NEMA adapter (Option NEMA)
1. Clean the motor shaft and the flange surfaces of the motor and motor adapter, and check them for
damage. Check the motor dimensions. The dimensions must be within the tolerances according to
DIN EN 50347 or NEMA MG1 Part 4.

2. For motor sizes 90, 160, 180 and 225, position the spacer bushes that may be provided onto the
motor shaft.

B 1000 en-2822 33
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
3. Position the half-coupling onto the motor shaft so that the motor parallel key engages into the groove
of the half-coupling. Tighten the half-coupling in accordance with the motor manufacturer's
instructions. With standard helical gear units, observe dimension B between the half-coupling and
the collar (see "Figure 15"). Adjust the coupling in accordance with the specifications indicated on
the adhesive plate for certain NEMA adapters .

4. If the half-coupling contains a setscrew, secure the coupling axially on the shaft. Coat the setscrew
with securing adhesive before screwing it in, e.g. Loctite 242 or Loxeal 54-03, and tighten it with the
correct torque (see chapter 7.3 "Screw tightening torques").
Pos : 178 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 04 [nic ht- ex]z @ 59\m od_1606742804556_388.doc x @ 2701475 @ @ 1

5. Sealing of the flange surfaces is recommended if the motor is installed outside or in a humid
environment. Completely coat the flange surfaces with surface sealant, e.g. Loctite 574 or Loxeal
58-14.
Pos : 179 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 05z @ 59\mod_1606742838397_388.docx @ 2701512 @ @ 1

6. Attach the motor to the adapter. Also attach the enclosed ring gear or the enclosed gear sleeve (see
figure below).

7. Tighten the adapter bolts with the correct torque (see chapter 7.3 "Screw tightening torques").

Figure 15: Fitting the coupling onto the motor shaft - various types of coupling

I Curved tooth coupling (BoWex), one-piece

II Curved tooth coupling (BoWex), two-piece
III Curved tooth coupling (BoWex), two-part with spacer bush
IV Claw coupling (ROTEX), two-piece
V Claw coupling (ROTEX), two-piece, observe dimension B:

Standard helical gear units:

SK 0, SK 01, SK 20, SK 25, SK 30, SK 33 (2-stage)
SK 010, SK 200, SK 250, SK 300, SK 330 (3-stage)
IEC size 63 IEC size 71
Dimension B (Fig. V) B = 4.5 mm B = 11.5 mm
VI Claw coupling (ROTEX ), two-piece with spacer bush 

Pos : 180 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 06 @ 75\mod_1624347935230_388.docx @ 2795890 @ 5 @ 1

34 B 1000 en-2822
 3 Transport, storage, assembly
Fitting a standard motor to the IEC adapters AI160–AI315 (Option AI) or NEMA adapter AN250TC–
AN400TC (Option AN)
1. Clean the motor shaft and the flange surfaces of the motor and motor adapter, and check them for
damage. Check the motor dimensions. The dimensions must be within the tolerances according to
DIN EN 50347 or NEMA MG1 Part 4.

2. Remove the motor shaft’s key.

3. With the adapters AI160, AI180 and AI225, attach the spacer bush supplied with the product.

4. Attach the key supplied with the product (see "Table7: Motor parallel keys").

5. For the attachment of the half-coupling, heat up the half-coupling to approx. 100 °C. Position the half-
coupling as follows:
− Push AI160, AI180 and AI225 on to the spacer bush.
− Push AI200, AI250, AI280 and AI315 on to the motor shaft collar.
− AN250TC–AN400TC until dimension A has been reached (see "Table 8: Position of the half-
coupling on the NEMA motor shaft").

6. If the half-coupling contains a setscrew, secure the coupling axially on the shaft. Coat the setscrew
with securing adhesive before screwing it in, e.g. Loctite 242 or Loxeal 54-03, and tighten it with the
correct torque (see chapter 7.3 "Screw tightening torques").
Pos : 181 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 04 [nic ht- ex]z @ 59\m od_1606742804556_388.doc x @ 2701475 @ @ 1

7. Sealing of the flange surfaces is recommended if the motor is installed outside or in a humid
environment. Completely coat the flange surfaces with surface sealant, e.g. Loctite 574 or Loxeal
58-14.
Pos : 183 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 07 @ 76\mod_1624353434411_388.docx @ 2795928 @ @ 1

8. Attach the motor to the adapter. Also attach the enclosed ring gear or the enclosed gear sleeve (see
Figure 15: Fitting the coupling onto the motor shaft - various types of coupling). For the AN360TC
and AN400TC adapters, attach the adapter flange to the motor first, and screw the motor onto the
adapter.

9. Tighten the adapter bolts with the correct torque (see chapter 7.3 "Screw tightening torques").

IEC/NEMA type Coupling Shaft ø Motor shaft’s key

AI 160 R42 42 AB12x8x45
AI 180 R48 48 AB14x9x45
AN 250 R42 41.275 B3/8x3/8x1 1/2
AN 280 R48 47.625 B1/2x1/2x1 1/2
AI 200 R55 55 B16x10x50x
AN 320 R55 53.976 B1/2x1/2x1 1/2
AI 225 R65 60 B18x11x70
AN 360 R350 R65 60.325 B5/8x5/8x2 1/4
AI 250 R75 65 B18x11x70
AI 280 R75 75 B20x12x70
AN 360 R450 R75 60.325 B5/8x5/8x3 1/8
AN 400 R75 73.025 B3/4x3/4x3 1/4

Table7: Motor parallel keys

B 1000 en-2822 35
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

NEMA type Coupling size A [mm]

N250TC R350 R42 83

N250TC 300S R42 86

N280TC R350 R48 87.5

N280TC 300S R48 102.5

N320TC R55 91

N360TC/350 R65 126.5

N360TC/450 R75 150.5

N400TC R75 164.5

Table 8: Position of the half-coupling on the NEMA motor shaft

Pos : 190 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------Seitenumbr uc h k ompakt --------- @ 13\m od_1476369695906_0.doc x @ 2265495 @ @ 1

36 B 1000 en-2822
 3 Transport, storage, assembly
Pos : 191 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage der Kühlsc hlange an das Kühlsystem 01 [B1000_2000]z @ 52\m od_1601476869971_388.docx @ 2676011 @ 2 @ 1

3.12 Mounting of the cooling coil onto the cooling system

Pos : 194 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Kühl anl agen/Interne Kühlanl age_02_(M ontag e)z @ 52\m od_1601480924595_388.docx @ 2676086 @ @ 1

WARNING
Risk of injury due to pressure discharge
• Ensure that the pressure is released from the cooling circuit before carrying out any work on the
gear unit.

NOTICE
Damage to the cooling coil
• Do not twist the connection pieces during installation.
• Even after the installation, no external forces must be able to act on the cooling coil via the
connection pieces.
• Prevent vibrations from reaching the cooling coil during operation.
Pos : 196 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage der Kühlsc hlange an das Kühlsystem 03 [B1000_2000]z @ 52\m od_1601481884488_388.docx @ 2676123 @ @ 1

Explanation

1 Connection pieces with cutting ring

screw connections
2 Cooling coil
3 Housing cover

Figure 16: Cooling cover

The cooling coil is installed in the housing cover. For the inlet and outlet of cooling fluid, connection
pieces with cutting ring screw connections according to DIN 2553 are provided on the housing cover for
a connection of a pipe with an external diameter of 10 mm.
Pos : 200 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage der Kühlsc hlange an das Kühlsystem 04z @ 52\m od_1601486450433_388.docx @ 2676273 @ @ 1

Remove the sealing plug from the screw necks prior to assembly and flush the cooling coil to prevent
any contamination of the cooling system. Then, connect the connection pieces with the coolant circuit.
The flow direction of the coolant is irrelevant.
Pos : 201 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Kühl anl agen/Externer Öl-Luft-Kühl er [B1000]z @ 52\m od_1601487540358_388.docx @ 2676310 @ 233 @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 37
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
3.13 Installation of the external oil/air cooler

3.13.1 Connecting hoses

NOTICE
The gear unit is supplied without the oil filling.
• Fill the gear unit with oil before commissioning.

The scope of delivery includes the oil/air cooler and the necessary hoses.
Connect the oil/air cooler according to the illustration.

1 Oil/air cooler
2 Gear units
3 Optional temperature monitoring
S Intake connection/oil drain of the gear unit
Gear unit pressure connection/connection
P
above or below the oil level

Figure 17: Connection of the oil/air cooler

Fasten the union nuts according to 7.3 "Screw tightening torques".

After assembling the oil lines, fill the gear unit housing with the gear oil type that is printed on the name
plate. The oil quantity on the name plate is a guide value and may vary, depending on the gear ratio.
Approximately 4.5 l of oil are additionally required for the hose lines. When filling, use the oil level screw
as an indicator for the correct oil level.

3.13.2 Electrical connection

Ensure the electrical connection according to the operating and installation instructions of the oil/air
cooler.
Pos : 206 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------Seitenumbr uc h k ompakt --------- @ 13\m od_1476369695906_0.doc x @ 2265495 @ @ 1

38 B 1000 en-2822
 3 Transport, storage, assembly
Pos : 207 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage ei nes Öl ausgleic hsbehälter Option OA 00_Ü berschrift_z @ 52\m od_1601488859794_388.doc x @ 2676387 @ 2 @ 1

3.14 Installation of an oil expansion chamber (Option: OA)

Pos : 208 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage ei nes Öl ausgleic hsbehälter Option OA 01_Größ e I - III_z @ 81\m od_1633419860079_388.docx @ 2834331 @ 3 @ 1

3.14.1 Installation of the sizes I, II and III

The oil expansion chamber is available in 3 sizes with different capacities:
• 0.7 l (Size I)
• 2.7 l (Size II)
• 5.4 l (Size III)
The oil expansion chamber must be mounted vertically with the hose connection facing downwards and
the vent screw facing upwards. Taking the hose length into account, the container should be fitted as
high as possible. Suggestions for the position of the oil expansion chamber see the following illustration.

Figure 18: Position of the oil expansion chamber

1. After installing the gear unit, remove the vent screw.

2. Screw in the reduction or extension with the existing sealing ring.
3. If the fastening screw is screwed into a through hole, seal the thread with a medium strength screw
securing material such as LOXEAL 54-03 or Loctite 242.
4. Screw on the expansion tank. If the necessary screw insertion depth of 1.5 × d can no longer be
achieved, use a 5 mm longer screw. If a longer screw cannot be fitted, use a stud and a nut with
appropriate dimensions.
5. Attach the vent hose with the enclosed hollow screws and seals.
Pos : 209 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage ei nes Öl ausgleic hsbehälter Option OA 02 [B1000]z @ 52\m od_1601489765444_388.docx @ 2676425 @ @ 1

6. Screw the enclosed M12 x 1.5 vent plug and sealing ring into the tank.
Pos : 211 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage ei nes Öl ausgleic hsbehälters Option OA 03_Größ e 0A und 0B_01 @ 81\mod_1632989654868_388.docx @ 2832110 @ 3 @ 1

3.14.2 Installation of sizes 0A and 0B

The oil expansion chamber must be mounted vertically with the hose connection facing downwards and
the vent screw facing upwards. Taking the hose length into account, the container should be fitted as
high as possible. Suggestions for the position of the oil expansion chamber see Figure 18. Note that
with the M4 configuration with terminal box position in position 2, it is not possible to install the oil
expansion chamber.

B 1000 en-2822 39
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

Figure 19: Position of the oil expansion chamber

1. After installing the gear unit, remove the oil level or vent screw.
2. Install the oil expansion chamber according to Figure 18. Align it parallel to the motor shaft.
3. Maintain the maximum tightening torque of 12 Nm for screwing the oil expansion chamber onto the
gear unit housing.
Pos : 232 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/N ac hträglic he Lacki erung/Nac htr ägliche Lacki erung 00 headline @ 34\mod_1559724373206_388.docx @ 2538900 @ 2 @ 1

3.15 Subsequent painting

Pos : 234 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/N ac hträglic he Lacki erung/Nac htr ägliche Lacki erung 02 @ 34\mod_1559724405678_388.docx @ 2538974 @ @ 1

For retrospective painting of the gear unit, the shaft sealing rings, rubber elements, pressure vent
screws, hoses, type plates, adhesive labels and motor coupling components must not come into contact
with paints, lacquers or solvents, as otherwise the components may be damaged or made illegible.
Pos : 235 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Elek trischer Ans chl uss M otor [B1000] @ 81\m od_1633345694538_388.docx @ 2833596 @ 2 @ 1

3.16 Electrical connection of the mounted motor

For geared motors (gear units with attached electric motor), the electric motor has its own operating
instructions. If these operating instructions are not available, please request them from the motor
manufacturer Ensure the electrical connection of the motor in accordance with the operating instructions
of the motor. Usually, there is a connection diagram in the terminal box of the motor.
Pos : 237 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/4. Inbetri ebnahm e [_Titel] @ 3\m od_1368691822868_388.docx @ 65671 @ 1 @ 1

40 B 1000 en-2822
 4 Commissioning
4 Commissioning
Pos : 238 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Ölstand pr üfen_01z @ 53\m od_1603264683711_388.doc x @ 2679850 @ 2 @ 1

4.1 Checking the oil level

Pos : 239 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Ölstand_02 [B1000, B1050] @ 54\mod_1603271152794_388.docx @ 2680194 @ @ 1

Check the oil level before commissioning (see chapter 5.2 "Service and maintenance work").
Pos : 243 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Entl üftung ak tivier en_01z @ 53\mod_1603265459270_388.docx @ 2679888 @ 2 @ 1

4.2 Activating the vent

Pos : 244 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Aufstellen/Entlüftung aktivi eren Einl eitung nicht- ex @ 49\mod_1599579572645_388.docx @ 2667246 @ @ 1

If venting of the gear unit is provided, the vent or the pressure vent must be activated before
commissioning. Double gear units consist of two single units, are equipped with 2 oil chambers and
possibly 2 vents.
To activate, remove the sealing cord in the vent screw. For the vent screw position, see Section 7.1
"Versions and mounting position".
Pos : 246 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Aufstellen/Entlüftung aktivi eren Entl üftungssc hraube @ 49\mod_1599583285555_388.docx @ 2667383 @ @ 1

Explanation

1 Vent screw
2 Sealing cord

Figure 20: Activating the vent screw

Pos : 247 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Aufstellen/Entlüftung aktivi eren Druckentl üftungsschr aube @ 49\m od_1599583297738_388.docx @ 2667429 @ @ 1

Explanation

1 Vent screw
2 Sealing cord

Figure 21: Activating the pressure vent screw

Pos : 248 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------Seitenumbr uc h k ompakt --------- @ 13\m od_1476369695906_0.doc x @ 2265495 @ @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 41
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
Pos : 249 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Aufstellen/Entlüftung aktivi eren Sonderentl üftung @ 49\m od_1599583310626_388.docx @ 2667475 @ @ 1

Special pressure vents are supplied as loose parts. Unscrew the vent screw and replace it with the
special pressure vent and seal.

Explanation
1 Vent screw 2 Sealing cord 3 Special vent screw

Figure 22: Removing the vent plug and fitting the special pressure vent
Pos : 253 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Ak tivier ung des autom atisc hen Sc hmiers toffgebers _01 [B1000, B2000] @ 54\mod_1603295724455_388.docx @ 2681620 @ 2 @ 1

4.3 Activating the automatic lubricant dispenser

Some gear unit types with standard motor (Option IEC/NEMA, not AI/AN) have an automatic lubricant
dispenser for the roller bearings. The lubricant sensor must be activated prior to commissioning the gear
unit The cartridge case cover of the adapter for attaching an IEC/NEMA standard motor has a red
information sign for activation of the lubricant dispenser. Opposite to the lubricant dispenser there is a
grease escape hole which is closed with a G1/4 cap screw. After activation of the lubricant dispenser,
the cap screw can be removed and replaced with the grease collection container (Part No. 28301210)
which is supplied separately with the delivery.

Figure 23: Fitting the grease collection container

42 B 1000 en-2822
 4 Commissioning

Procedure:
1. Loosen and remove the cap screws.
2. Remove the cartridge cover.
3. Screw the activation screw into the lubricant dispenser until the lug breaks off at the defined fracture
point.
Pos : 255 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Ak tivier ung des autom atisc hen Sc hmiers toffgebers _03 [B1000, B2000] @ 76\mod_1624463716842_388.docx @ 2796900 @ 5 @ 1

4. Re-fit the cartridge cover. Attach the cartridge cover with the cap screws (see chapter 7.3 "Screw
tightening torques").
5. Mark month and year of activation on the adhesive label.

Explanation

1 Cap screws M8 x 16
2 Cartridge cover
3 Activation screw
4 Lug
5 Lubricant sensor
6 Position of adhesive label

Figure 24: Activating the automatic lubricant sensor with standard motor mounting

Adhesive label

Figure 25: Adhesive label

Pos : 271 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Kühls chl ang e/Interne Kühl anl age_01_(Inbetriebnahme) [B1000 ... B2050] @ 76\mod_1624459274579_388.docx @ 2796786 @ 2 @ 1

4.4 Cooling coil (Option: CC)

Pos : 273 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Interne Kühlanlag e_02_(Inbetri ebnahm e) [B1000, B1050] @ 36\m od_1560494617939_388.doc x @ 2542016 @ @ 1

NOTICE
Gear unit damage due to overheating
• The drive may only be commissioned after the cooling spiral has been connected to the cooling
circuit, and the cooling circuit has been put into operation.
Pos : 274 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Interne Kühlanlag e_02a_(Inbetriebnahme) [B1000, B1050]z @ 54\mod_1603467886065_388.docx @ 2683114 @ @ 1

If there is a danger of frost, a suitable anti-freeze solution must be added to the cooling water in due
time.
Pos : 275 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Interne Kühlanlag e_03_(Inbetri ebnahm e) [B1000- B2050] @ 56\m od_1604924743805_388.docx @ 2688580 @ @ 1

The coolant must have a thermal capacity similar to water.

• Specific thermal capacity of water at 20 °C: c = 4.18 kJ/kgK

B 1000 en-2822 43
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
Clean, industrial water without any air bubbles or sediments is recommended as a coolant. The
hardness of the water must be between 1 dH and 15 dH; the pH value must be between pH 7.4 and pH
9.5. No aggressive liquids may be added to the coolant!
Pos : 276 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Interne Kühlanlag e_03a ( Inbetriebnahme) [B1000, B2000)z @ 55\m od_1603787319406_388.doc x @ 2683808 @ @ 1

The coolant pressure must not exceed 8 bar. We also recommend fitting a pressure reducer at the
coolant inlet to avoid damage due to excessive pressure.
The coolant inlet temperature must not exceed 40 °C. 10 °C are recommended.
The required coolant flow rate is 10 l/min.
Pos : 279 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Interne Kühlanlag e_03b_(Inbetriebnahme) [B1000, B1050]z @ 54\mod_1603468701680_388.docx @ 2683151 @ @ 1

The temperature and the flow rate of the cooling fluid must be monitored and ensured. The drive must
be shut down if the permissible temperature is exceeded.
Pos : 282 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/ex ter ner Öl/Luft-Kühler [B1000l]z @ 55\mod_1603787323813_388.docx @ 2683845 @ 5 @ 1

External oil/air cooler(Option: CS2-X)

Refer to the catalogue G1000 for the version and all important data regarding the oil/air cooler. Pay
attention to the operating instructions of the cooling unit.
Pos : 315 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Ei nlaufz eit der Sc hneckengetriebe [B1000] @ 23\mod_1531908450259_388.docx @ 2434170 @ 2 @ 1

4.5 Running-in time for the worm gear unit

In order to achieve maximum efficiency of the worm gear unit, the gear unit must be subjected to a
running-in period of approx. 25 h – 48 h under maximum load.
There may be a reduction in efficiency before the running-in period is complete.
Pos : 317 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Checkliste [B1000]z @ 55\m od_1603902218068_388.doc x @ 2684119 @ 2 @ 1

4.6 Checklist
Checklist

Subject of check Date Information

of check: see Section
Is the vent screw activated or the pressure vent screwed in? 4.2
Does the required mounting position comply with the actual 7.1
position?
Are the external gear shaft forces within permitted limits (chain 3.5
tension)?
Is the torque arm installed correctly? 3.6
Are rotating parts covered with a contact guard? 3.9
Is the automatic lubricant sensor activated? 4.3
Is the cooling system connected? 3.12
3.13

Table 9: Checklist for commissioning

Pos : 322 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/5. Ins pektion und Wartung @ 23\mod_1531828817835_388.docx @ 2434012 @ 1 @ 1

44 B 1000 en-2822
 5 Service and maintenance
5 Service and maintenance
Pos : 323 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungsinterv alle/Inspekti ons- und W artungsinterv alle [B1000]z @ 55\m od_1603994774010_388.docx @ 2684676 @ 2 @ 1

5.1 Inspection and maintenance intervals

Inspection and
maintenance intervals Inspection and maintenance work Information
see Section
At least every six months • Visual inspection 5.2.1
• Check for running noises 5.2.2
• Check the oil level 5.2.3
• Visual inspection of hose 5.2.5
• Re-grease/remove excess grease 5.2.6
(only applicable for free drive shaft/option W, for agitator
bearings/option VL2/VL3 and for AI…/AN… adapter with
option BRG1)
• replacing the automatic lubricant dispenser/remove excess 5.2.7
grease
(for IEC/NEMA standard motor installation, a replacement
interval of a year is permissible for running times of < 8 h / day);
drain or replace the lubricant collection container with every
second replacement of the lubricant dispenser
For operating temperatures • Change the oil (if filled with synthetic products, the interval is 5.2.8
up to 80 °C doubled, with the use of SmartOilChange the interval is
every 10000 operating specified by SmartOilChange)
hours, • Clean or replace the vent screw as necessary 5.2.9
at least every 2 years • Replace the radial shaft seals at every oil change, at the latest 5.2.10
after 10,000 operating hours
Every 20000 operating • Re-lubricate the bearings in the gear unit 5.2.11
hours,
at least every 4 years
At least every 10 years • General overhaul 5.2.12

Table 10: Inspection and maintenance intervals

Information
The oil change intervals apply for normal operating conditions and operating temperatures up to 80 °C.
The oil change intervals are reduced in the case of extreme conditions (operating temperatures higher
than 80 °C, high humidity, aggressive environment and frequent fluctuations in the operating
temperature).

Information
SmartOilChange determines the optimum time for an oil change based on a continuous determination
of the oil temperature. With SmartOilChange from Getriebebau NORD, this is done entirely on the
basis of key data for the specific product, the specified ambient temperature and internal measurement
values of the power electronics such as the current consumption. Additional hardware is therefore not
required for the Getriebebau NORD solution.
The measurement results are processed and interpreted by the integrated software and result in the
display of the residual time until the next oil change.
Pos : 328 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_00 Übersc hrift @ 23\mod_1531828915132_388.docx @ 2434049 @ 2 @ 1

5.2 Service and maintenance work

Pos : 330 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_01_Sichtkontr olle U ndichtigkeitenz @ 55\m od_1603988815899_388.docx @ 2684504 @ 3 @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 45
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
5.2.1 Visual inspection for leaks
The gear unit must be checked for leaks. Attention should be paid to escaping gear oil and traces of oil
on the exterior or underneath the gear unit. In particular, the radial shaft seals, cover caps, screw fittings,
hoses and housing joints should be checked.

Information
Radial shaft seals are components with a limited life and are subject to wear and ageing. The service
life of radial shaft seals depends on various ambient conditions. Temperature, light (especially UV light),
ozone and other gases and liquids affect the ageing process of radial shaft seals. Some of these
influences may change the physical or chemical properties of the radial shaft seals and result in a
significant reduction of their service life. Foreign matter (e.g. dust, sludge, sand, metallic particles) and
excess temperature (excessive speed or external heating) accelerate the wear of the sealing lip. These
sealing lips are made of an elastomer material and are lubricated with a special grease at the factory.
This reduces the wear due to their function and ensures a long service life. An oil film in the region of
the rubbing sealing lip is therefore normal and is not due to leakage (see chapter 7.5 "Leakage and
leak-tightness").

NOTICE
Damage to the radial shaft seals through unsuitable cleaning agents
Unsuitable cleaning agents may damage the radial shaft seals, which may then cause an increased
risk of leaks.
• Do not clean the gear unit with cleaning agents which contain acetone or benzol.
• Avoid contact with hydraulic oils.

If leaks are suspected, the gear unit should be cleaned, the oil level checked and checked again for
leaks after approx. 24 hours. If a leak is confirmed (dripped oil), the gear unit must be repaired
immediately. Please contact the NORD service department.
Pos : 331 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_01_Sichtkontr olle U ndichtigkeiten Kühlschl ange @ 36\m od_1560758680370_388.docx @ 2542910 @ @ 1

If the gear unit is equipped with a cooling coil in the housing cover, the connections and the cooling coil
must be checked for leaks. If there are any leaks, these must be repaired immediately. Please contact
the NORD service department.
Pos : 332 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_02_Laufg eräusc he pr üfenz @ 55\m od_1603990546349_388.doc x @ 2684542 @ 3 @ 1

5.2.2 Check for running noises

If the gear unit produces unusual running noises or vibrations, this could indicate damage to the gear
unit. In this case the gear unit must be repaired immediately. Please contact the NORD Service
department.
Pos : 336 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Ölstand pr üfen [B1000]z @ 76\m od_1624864651296_388.docx @ 2799468 @ 3 @ 1

5.2.3 Checking the oil level

Section 7.1 "Versions and mounting position"describes the mounting positions and the corresponding
oil level screws. With double gear units, the oil level must be checked on both units. The pressure vent
must be at the position marked in Section 7.1 "Versions and mounting position".
The oil level does not need to be checked on gear units without oil level screw (see chapter 7.1 "Versions
and mounting position").
Gear unit types that are not supplied with an oil filling must be filled before the oil level is checked.
The oil level must only be carried out when the gear unit is at a standstill and has cooled down. Provide
protection against accidental activation. Check the oil level with an oil temperature of between 10 °C to
40 °C.

46 B 1000 en-2822
 5 Service and maintenance
Gear units with oil level screw
1. Unscrew the oil level screw corresponding to the mounting position (see chapter 7.1 "Versions and
mounting position").

Information
At the first oil level check a small amount of oil may escape, as the oil level may be above the lower
edge of the oil level hole.

2. The correct oil level is at the lower edge of the oil level hole. If the oil level is too low, adjust the oil
level with the corresponding oil type.
3. Screw the oil level screw and all previously loosened screw connectors back in correctly.
Gear units with an oil level tank

Figure 26: Checking the oil level with a dipstick

1. Screw the screw plug with dipstick (thread G1¼) out of the oil level container.
2. The oil level must be between the upper and lower marking when the dipstick is fully screwed in (see
Figure 26). If the oil level is too low, adjust the oil level with the corresponding oil type.
3. Screw the screw plug with dipstick and all previously loosened screw connectors back in correctly.
Gear units with oil inspection glass
1. The oil level can be seen directly in the window.
2. The correct oil level is:
– Maximum: the middle of the oil inspection glass,
– Minimum: Lower edge of the oil inspection glass.
3. If the oil level is not correct, adjust the oil level by draining off oil or topping up with the type of oil
stated on the name plate.
Pos : 353 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_04a_Sic htk ontroll e Gummi puffer _headli ne [B1000, B2000] @ 55\mod_1604308367231_388.docx @ 2685240 @ 3 @ 1

5.2.4 Visual inspection of the rubber buffers (Option: G, VG)

Pos : 356 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Gummiel emente [B1000, B2000, B1050_B2050]z @ 55\m od_1604335240091_388.doc x @ 2685886 @ @ 1

If these show damage such as tears to the surface, the rubber elements must be replaced. In this case,
please contact NORD Service.
Pos : 360 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_04b_Sic htk ontroll e Schl auchl eitung en [B1000]z @ 55\m od_1604426182409_388.doc x @ 2686398 @ 3 @ 1

5.2.5 Visual inspection of the hoses (Option: OT, CS2-X)

Gear units with an oil tank and external cooling units have rubber hoses.
Pos : 364 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Leitung en/Leitung en_05- Schl auchl eitungen_03 [B1050, B2050]z @ 56\mod_1604427094604_388.docx @ 2686474 @ @ 1

Check the hoses and screw connectors for leaks, cuts, tears, porous areas and chafing. In case of
damage, the hoses must be replaced. Please contact the NORD service department.
Pos : 374 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_05_F ett nac hsc hmier enz @ 56\m od_1604508039835_388.docx @ 2686910 @ 3 @ 1

5.2.6 Re-greasing (Option: VL2, VL3, W, AI, AN)

Some gear unit designs are equipped with a re-greasing device.
For the agitator versions VL2 and VL3, unscrew the vent screw opposite the grease nipple prior to re-
greasing. Inject grease until a quantity of 20 - 25g escapes from the vent hole. Screw the vent screw
back in.

B 1000 en-2822 47
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
For option W and the IEC/NEMA adapters AI and AN with option BRG1, grease the outer roller bearing
with approx. 20–25 g of grease at the grease nipple. The grease nipple is located under a bolt-on
inspection cover. Before re-greasing, unscrew the grease drain screw so that the excess grease can
drain off. Remove the excess grease on the motor adapter.

1 Conical grease nipple

2 Grease drain screw
3 Inspection cover

Figure 27: Re-grease IEC/NEMA adapters AI and AN with option BRG1

Recommended grease: Petamo GHY 133N (Klüber Lubrication) As an option, food-compatible grease
may be used (see chapter 7.2.1 "Roller bearing greases")..
Pos : 376 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_06_autom atisc hen Sc hmiers toffgeber ausw echsel nz @ 56\mod_1604576222529_388.docx @ 2687200 @ 3 @ 1

5.2.7 Replacing the automatic lubricant dispenser

Explanation

1 Cap screws M8 x 16
2 Cartridge cover
3 Activation screw
4 Lug
5 Lubricant dispenser
6 Position of adhesive label

Figure 28: Switching the automatic lubricant sensor with standard motor mounting

(Lubricant sensor: Part No.: 28301000 or for food-compatible grease Part No.: 28301010)
1. Unscrew the cartridge cover.
2. Unscrew the lubricant sensor.
3. Screw in the new lubricant sensor.
4. Remove excess grease from the adapter.
5. Activate the full lubricant sensor (see chapter 4.3 "Activating the automatic lubricant dispenser").
The grease collection container (Part No. 28301210) must be replaced or drained with every second
replacement of the lubricant sensor. Due to the form of the container, a residual amount of grease
remains in the container.
1. Unscrew the grease collection container from the screw connector.

48 B 1000 en-2822
 5 Service and maintenance
2. Press grease out of the grease collection container. To do this, push the internal piston back with a
rod. The rod may have a maximum diameter of 10 mm. Collect the extracted grease and dispose it
properly.
3. Check the collecting vessel. If the collecting vessel is damaged, replace it with a new one.
4. Screw the collecting vessel back into the drain hole on the motor adapter.
Pos : 377 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_07a_Öl w ec hs eln [B1000, B2000]z @ 55\mod_1603992874976_388.docx @ 2684627 @ 3 @ 1

5.2.8 Change the oil

On the figures in Section 7.1 "Versions and mounting position"the positions of the oil drain screw, the
oil level screw and the vent screw, if present, are shown depending on the mounting position.

WARNING
Danger of burns
The oil may be very hot. Use protective equipment.

Procedure:
1. Place a collection vessel under the oil drain screw or the oil drain tap.
2. Screw out the oil level screw (if present) and the oil drain screw. When using an oil reservoir tank,
screw out the screw plug with dipstick.
3. Completely drain the oil from the gear unit.
4. Check the sealing rings of the oil drain screw and the oil level screw. If a sealing ring is damaged,
replace the corresponding screw. You can also clean the threads and coat them with securing
adhesive e.g. Loctite 242 54-03 before screwing them in.
5. Screw the oil drain screw into the hole and tighten to the correct torque (see chapter 7.3 "Screw
tightening torques").
6. Using a suitable filling device, refill with oil of the same type through the oil level hole until oil emerges
from the oil level hole. The oil can also be filled through the hole of the pressure vent screw or of a
screw plug located higher than the oil level. If an oil reservoir tank is used, fill the oil through the
upper inlet (thread G1¼) until the oil level is set as described in Section 5.2.3 "Checking the oil level".
7. Check the oil level after at least 15 min, if using an oil level container after at least 30 min.
Pos : 379 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_07b_Öl w ec hs eln [B1000]z @ 56\m od_1604680072546_388.doc x @ 2688532 @ @ 1

Information
The oil does not need to be replaced for gear units without oil drain screws (see chapter 7.1 "Versions
and mounting position"). The gear unit are lifelong lubricated.
Standard helical gear units do not have an oil level screw. Here, new oil is injected through the threaded
hole of the vent.
Pos : 386 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_08_Entlüftungssc hraube r einigen ggf. wec hs elnz @ 56\m od_1605105766817_388.docx @ 2689068 @ 3 @ 1

5.2.9 Clean and check vent screw

1. Unscrew the vent screw.
2. Thoroughly clean the vent screw, e.g. with compressed air.
3. Check the vent screw and the sealing ring. If the sealing ring is damaged, use a new vent screw.
4. Screw the vent screw back in.
Pos : 399 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_09_W ellendic htring tausc hen - nur Ü bersc hrift [B1050, B2050] @ 39\mod_1571908320214_388.docx @ 2568030 @ 3 @ 1

5.2.10 Replacing the shaft sealing ring

Pos : 400 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_09_W ellendic htring tausc henz @ 76\m od_1624568803180_388.doc x @ 2798471 @ @ 1

Once the shaft sealing ring has reached the end of its service life, the oil film in the region of the sealing
lip increases and a measurable leakage with dripping oil occurs. The radial shaft seal must then be
replaced. The space between the sealing lip and the protective lip must be filled approximately 50 %
with grease on fitting (recommended grease: PETAMO GHY 133N). Take care that after fitting, the new
radial shaft seal does not run in the old wear track.
Pos : 402 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------Seitenumbr uc h k ompakt --------- @ 13\m od_1476369695906_0.doc x @ 2265495 @ @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 49
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
Pos : 403 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_10_N ac hfettung von Lag ernz @ 56\mod_1605111249160_388.docx @ 2689183 @ 3 @ 1

5.2.11 Re-lubrication of bearings in the gear unit

Pos : 404 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Lager im Getriebe 01z @ 56\mod_1605116310513_388.docx @ 2689334 @ @ 1

NOTICE
Damage to the gear unit due to insufficient lubricant
There is a risk of bearing failure in the event of inadequate lubrication.
• It is essential to comply with the recommended intervals.
• Only use greases which are approved by Getriebebau NORD.
• Never mix different greases. If different greases are mixed, the gear unit may be damaged due to
inadequate lubrication caused by incompatibility between the different greases.
• Avoid contamination of the grease with foreign substances and washing out of the grease by
lubricating oil.
Pos : 406 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Lager im Getriebe 03z @ 56\mod_1605116328395_388.docx @ 2689410 @ @ 1

Please contact the NORD Service department for replacement of the grease in the roller bearings.
Recommended grease: Petamo GHY 133N - Klüber Lubrication. (see chapter 7.2.1 "Roller bearing
greases")
Pos : 421 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Gener alüber hol ung/General überhol ung_01 [B1050, B2050] @ 31\m od_1553073833641_388.docx @ 2515184 @ 3 @ 1

5.2.12 General overhaul

Pos : 422 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Gener alüber hol ung/General überhol ung_02 [B1000, B1050] @ 36\m od_1560861879248_388.docx @ 2543669 @ @ 1

The general overhaul must be carried out by a specialist workshop with suitable equipment and be
qualified personnel with appropriate equipment in observance of national regulations and laws. We
recommend that the general overhaul is carried out by the NORD Service Department.
Pos : 425 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Gener alüber hol ung/General überhol ung_03z @ 57\mod_1605201612306_388.docx @ 2689807 @ @ 1

During general overhaul, the gear unit is completely dismantled. The following work steps are carried
out:

• All gear unit components are cleaned.

• All gear unit components are checked for damage.
• Damaged parts are replaced.
• All roller bearings are replaced.
• Replace all seals, radial shaft seals and Nilos rings.
• Optional: The back stop will be renewed.
• Optional: Replace the elastomers in the coupling.
Pos : 427 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/6. Ents orgung/Ents orgung @ 76\mod_1624624232863_388.docx @ 2799130 @ 1 @ 1

50 B 1000 en-2822
 6 Disposal
6 Disposal

Observe the current local regulations. In particular, lubricants must be collected and disposed of
correctly.
Gear unit components Material
Gearwheels, shafts, roller bearings, keys, circlips, … Steel
Gear unit housing, housing components, … Grey cast iron
Light alloy gear unit housing, light alloy housing components, … Aluminium
Worm gears, sockets, ... Bronze
Radial shaft seals, sealing caps, rubber components, … Elastomers with steel
Coupling components Plastic and steel
Flat seals Asbestos-free sealing material
Gear oil Additive mineral oil
Synthetic gear oil (adhesive label: CLP PG) Polyglycol-based lubricants
Synthetic gear oil (adhesive label CLP PG) Poly-alpha-olefin based lubricants
Cooling coil, embedding material of the cooling coil, screw fittings Copper, epoxy, yellow brass

Table 11: Materials

Pos : 429 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/7. Anhang @ 3\mod_1368691985561_388.docx @ 65721 @ 1 @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 51
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

7 Appendix
Pos : 430 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Bauform en und Ei nbaulage [_Titel] @ 57\m od_1605278904792_388.docx @ 2690060 @ 2 @ 1

7.1 Versions and mounting position

Pos : 431 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Bauform en und Wartung_lebens dauergesc hmier t [B1000]z @ 57\m od_1605283015149_388.docx @ 2690138 @ @ 1

Information
The gear unit types SK 320, SK 172, SK 272, SK 372 as well as SK 273 and SK 373, the gear unit
types SK 01282 NB, SK 0282 NB and SK 1382 NB and the UNIVERSAL/MINIBLOC gear unit types
are lifelong lubricated. These gear units do not have oil level screws.

Pos : 433 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Bauform en und Wartung_01-Z eichenerkl ärung [B1000, B2000]z @ 57\m od_1605283318175_388.doc x @ 2690214 @ 3 @ 1

7.1.1 Explanation of symbols

Vent

Oil level

Oil drain

Pos : 438 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------Seitenumbr uc h k ompakt --------- @ 13\m od_1476369695906_0.doc x @ 2265495 @ @ 1

52 B 1000 en-2822
 7 Appendix
Pos : 439 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Bauform en und Wartung_UNIVER SAL/M INIBLOC Schneck eng etriebe [B1000]z @ 57\m od_1605284611718_388.docx @ 2690252 @ 3 @ 1

7.1.2 UNIVERSAL/MINIBLOC worm gear units

NORD UNIVERSAL/MINIBLOC worm gear units are suitable for all installation positions. They have an
oil filling which is independent of the mounting position.
As an option, types SI and SMI can be equipped with a vent screw. Gear units with vents must be
installed in the stated mounting position.
Types SI, SMI, S, SM and SU as 2-stage gear unit types and types SI, SMI as worm gear units for direct
motor mounting have an oil filling which depends on the mounting position and must be installed in the
stated position.

Pos : 440 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------Seitenumbr uc h k ompakt --------- @ 13\m od_1476369695906_0.doc x @ 2265495 @ @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 53
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
Pos : 441 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Bauform en und Wartung_Flachg etriebe OT M4 [B1000]z @ 57\m od_1605297999086_388.doc x @ 2690329 @ 3 @ 1

7.1.3 Parallel shaft gear units with oil level tank

The following illustration applies to the M4 configuration of gear unit types SK 9282, SK 9382, SK 10282,
SK 10382, SK 10382.1, SK 11282, SK 11382, SK 11382.1 and SK 12382 with oil reservoir tank.

Figure 29: Parallel shaft gear units with oil level tank
Pos : 446 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------Seitenumbr uc h k ompakt --------- @ 13\m od_1476369695906_0.doc x @ 2265495 @ @ 1

54 B 1000 en-2822
 7 Appendix
Pos : 447 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Bauform en und Wartung_01-Ü bersic ht [B1000, B2000]z @ 57\mod_1605297657948_388.docx @ 2690291 @ 3 @ 1

7.1.4 Overview of mounting positions

Pos : 448 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Bauform und W artung _Teil 2 [Abb_B1000]_1 @ 6\mod_1430735162931_0.docx @ 214926 @ @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 55
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

56 B 1000 en-2822
 7 Appendix

B 1000 en-2822 57
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

58 B 1000 en-2822
 7 Appendix

B 1000 en-2822 59
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

60 B 1000 en-2822
 7 Appendix

B 1000 en-2822 61
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

62 B 1000 en-2822
 7 Appendix

B 1000 en-2822 63
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

64 B 1000 en-2822
 7 Appendix

B 1000 en-2822 65
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

66 B 1000 en-2822
 7 Appendix

Pos : 460 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------Seitenumbr uc h k ompakt --------- @ 13\m od_1476369695906_0.doc x @ 2265495 @ @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 67
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
Pos : 461 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Sc hmiers toffe - Titelz @ 58\m od_1605681315342_388.docx @ 2692530 @ 2 @ 1

7.2 Lubricants
Pos : 462 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Sc hmiers toffe Ei nleitung [B1000]z @ 58\m od_1605695457979_388.docx @ 2692734 @ @ 1

With the exception of types SK 11382.1, SK 12382 and SK 9096.1, the gear units are filled with lubricant
for the required mounting position and are ready for operation as delivered. The initial filling corresponds
to a lubricant from the column for the ambient temperatures (standard version) in the lubricant table.
Pos : 463 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Wälzlag erfette Titelz @ 58\mod_1605695236115_388.docx @ 2692614 @ 3 @ 1

7.2.1 Roller bearing greases

Pos : 464 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Wälzlag erefette Tabelle [B1000, B2000]z @ 58\mod_1605695286156_388.docx @ 2692654 @ @ 1

This table contains comparable roller bearing greases from various manufacturers. The manufacturer
can be changed within a grease type. When changing the grease type or the ambient temperature range,
please consult Getriebebau NORD. Otherwise no guarantee can be accepted for the function of the
gear units.

Lubricant type Ambient

temperature

Grease Renolit
Tribol GR 100-2
mineral oil-based GP 2 Gadus S2
-30 … 60 °C PD - Mobilux EP 2
Renolit V100 2
LZR 2 H
-50 … 40 °C Optitemp LG 2 Renolit WTF 2 - - -
Synthetic grease Renolit PETAMO
Tribol GR HLT 2 GHY 133 N Mobiltemp
-25 … 80 °C 4747/220-2 HAT
Renolit Klüberplex SHC 32
LST 2 BEM 41-132
Bio-degradable Mobil SHC
Plantogel Klüberbio Naturelle Grease
grease -25 … 40 °C - Grease
2S M 72-82 EP2
102 EAL

Table 12: Roller bearing greases

Pos : 466 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------Seitenumbr uc h k ompakt --------- @ 13\m od_1476369695906_0.doc x @ 2265495 @ @ 1

68 B 1000 en-2822
 7 Appendix
Pos : 467 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Getriebeöl e Titelz @ 58\m od_1605696108555_388.docx @ 2692777 @ 3 @ 1

7.2.2 Gear oils

Pos : 469 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Getriebeöl e Ei nlei tung @ 81\m od_1633002871223_388.docx @ 2832412 @ @ 1

This table shows comparable lubricants from various manufacturers. The oil manufacturer can be
changed within a viscosity and lubricant type. Only change the lubricant type or the viscosity after
consultation with Getriebebau NORD.
Mixing different oil types is not permissible. When changing gear oil, different oils of one oil type with
the same viscosity may be mixed in a maximum ratio of 1/20 (5 %).
Prior to the change of oils of different oil types, the gear unit must be thoroughly flushed with the new
oil type. It is recommended to use the new product with a lower viscosity for flushing. This is especially
valid when switching from a mineral oil (CLP) or synthetic oil CLP HC to to a synthetic oil CLP PG and
vice versa.
Pos : 470 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Getriebeöl e T abelle [B1000]z @ 58\m od_1605698018854_388.doc x @ 2692937 @ @ 1

Lubri- Details on DIN (ISO) /

cant name plate Ambient
type temperature

Alpha EP 680 Carter EP 680

Renolin CLP 680
ISO VG 680 Alpha SP 680 Klüberoil Mobilgear Omala Carter XEP 680
CLP 680 Renolin CLP 680
0...40 °C Optigear BM 680 GEM 1-680 N 600 XP 680 S2 G 680
Plus
Optigear 1100/680
Alpha EP 220 Renolin CLP 220 Carter EP 220
Mineral oil

ISO VG 220 Alpha SP 220 Renolin CLP 220 Carter XEP 220
Klüberoil Mobilgear Omala
CLP 220 -10…40 °C Optigear BM 220 Plus
GEM 1-220 N 600 XP 220 S2 G 220
Optigear 1100/220 Renolin Gear 220
VCI
Alpha EP 100 Carter EP 100
Renolin CLP 100
ISO VG 100 Alpha SP 100 Klüberoil Mobilgear Omala
CLP 100 Renolin CLP 100
-15…25 °C Optigear BM 100 GEM 1-100 N 600 XP 100 S2 G 100
Plus
Optigear 1100/100
ISO VG 680 Alphasyn GS 680 Carter SY 680
Renolin Klübersynth Mobil Omala
CLP PG 680 -20...40 °C Optigear Synthetic Carter SG 680
PG 680 GH 6-680 Glygoyle 680 S4 WE 680
Synthetic oil
(Polyglycol)

800/680
Alphasyn GS 220 -
ISO VG 220
Alphasyn PG 220 Renolin Klübersynth Mobil Omala
CLP PG 220 -25…80 °C
Optigear Synthetic PG 220 GH 6-220 Glygoyle 220 S4 WE 220
800/220
Alphasyn EP 460 Carter SH 460
ISO VG 460 Renolin Unisyn Klübersynth Mobil Omala
CLP HC 460
-30…80 °C Optigear Synthetic CLP 460 GEM 4-460 N SHC 634 S4 GX 460
(hydrocarbon)
Synthetic oil

PD 460
Alphasyn EP 220 Carter SH 220
Renolin Unisyn
Optigear Synthetic
ISO VG 220 CLP 220 Klübersynth Mobil Omala
CLP HC 220 PD 220
-40…80 °C Renolin Unisyn GEM 4-220 N SHC 630 S4 GX 220
Optigear Synthetic
Gear 220 VCI
X 220
ISO VG 680 -
CLP E 680 - Plantogear 680 S - - -
degradable oil

-5…40 °C
Naturelle -
Bio-

ISO VG 220 Performance Bio Klübersynth Gear

CLP E 220 Plantogear 220 S -
-5…40 °C GE 220 ESS GEM 2-220 Fluid
EP 220

B 1000 en-2822 69
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
Lubri- Details on DIN (ISO) /
cant name plate Ambient
type temperature

Optileb GT -
CLP PG H1 ISO VG 680 Klübersynth Mobil
1800/680 Cassida Fluid WG
680 -5…40 °C UH1 6-680 Glygoyle 680
680

Nevastane SY
Food grade oil

CLP PG H1 ISO VG 220 Optileb GT Klübersynth Mobil 220

Cassida Fluid WG
220 -25…40 °C 1800/200 UH1 6-220 Glygoyle 220
220

CLP HC H1 ISO VG 680 Cassida Fluid GL Klüberoil -

Optileb GT 680 -
680 -5…40 °C 680 4 UH1-680 N

Mobil Nevastane
CLP HC H1 ISO VG 220 Cassida Fluid GL Klüberoil
Optileb GT 220 SHC Cibus XSH 220
220 -25…40 °C 220 4 UH1-220 N
220
Tribol GR 100-00
Mineral oil-

PD Mobil
based

Renolit Duraplex MICROLUBE Alvania

Gear unit fluid grease

GP 00 K-30 Tribol GR Chassis Multis EP 00

EP 00 GB 00 EP(LF)2
3020/1000-00 PD Grease LBZ
Spheerol EPL 00
-25 … 60 °C

Mobil
based
PG oil

GP PG 00 K- Renolit Klübersynth
Glygoyle - Marson SY 00
30 LST 00 GE 46-1200
Grease 00

Table 13: Gear oils

Pos : 472 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Getriebeöl e Erl äuter ung [B1000] @ 76\mod_1624569928900_388.docx @ 2798510 @ @ 1

The required lubricant quantity and the lubricant type are stated on the name plate. The filling quantities
stated in the catalogue G1000 are for guidance only. The precise quantities vary depending on the exact
gear ratio. When filling, always observe the oil level screw hole as an indicator of the precise quantity of
oil.
After changing the lubricant, and in particular after the initial filling, the oil level may change during the
first few hours of operation, as the oil galleries and the hollow spaces only fill gradually during operation.
The oil level is still within the permissible tolerance.
If the gear unit contains an oil inspection glass, we recommend that the customer adjusts the oil level
after an operating time of 2 hours so that the oil level is visible in the oil inspection glass when the gear
unit is at a standstill and has cooled down. An oil level check with the oil inspection glass is only possible
after this time.
Gear unit types SK 11282, SK 11382, SK 11382.1, SK 12382 and SK 9096.1 are normally supplied
without oil.
Pos : 480 /Allgem ein/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 3\mod_1375347474401_0.docx @ 84886 @ @ 1

70 B 1000 en-2822
 7 Appendix

Pos : 481 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Sc hrauben-Anziehdrehmom entez @ 59\m od_1606484633288_388.docx @ 2700090 @ 2 @ 1

7.3 Screw tightening torques

Screw tightening torques [Nm]

Screw fastenings in strength classes Screw

Threaded pin fastenings on
Dimensions 8.8 10.9 12.9 V2A-70 Cap screws
on coupling covers
V4A-70
M4 3.2 5 6 2.8 - - -
M5 6.4 9 11 5.8 - 2 -
M6 11 16 19 10 - - 6.4
M8 27 39 46 24 11 10 11
M10 53 78 91 48 11 17 27
M12 92 135 155 83 27 40 53
M16 230 335 390 207 35 - 92
M20 460 660 770 414 - - 230
M24 790 1150 1300 711 80 - 460
M30 1600 2250 2650 1400 170 - -
M36 2780 3910 4710 2500 - - 1600
M42 4470 6290 7540 4025 - - -
M48 6140 8640 16610 5525 - - -
M56 9840 13850 24130 8860 - - -
G½ - - - - 75 - -
G¾ - - - - 110 - -
G1 - - - - 190 - -
G1¼ - - - - 240 - -
G1½ - - - - 300 - -

Table 14: Screw tightening torques

Pos : 482 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Sc hrauben-Anziehdrehmom ente_M ontag e v on Sc hlauc hv erschr aubung en @ 37\m od_1560935911886_388.doc x @ 2544450 @ 5 @ 1

Installing hose unions

Oil the thread of the union nut, the cutting ring and the thread of the connecting piece. Tighten the union
nut with a spanner until the union nut becomes more difficult to turn. Turn the union nut further by approx.
30° to 60° but only to a maximum of 90° while holding the connecting piece with a spanner. Remove
excess oil from the union.
Pos : 484 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------Seitenumbr uc h k ompakt --------- @ 13\m od_1476369695906_0.doc x @ 2265495 @ @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 71
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
Pos : 485 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Betriebss tör ungen_01 @ 31\mod_1553081366771_388.docx @ 2515892 @ 2 @ 1

7.4 Troubleshooting
Pos : 488 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Betriebss tör ungen_02 [B1000, B1050] @ 37\m od_1560937554866_388.docx @ 2544598 @ @ 1

NOTICE!
Gear unit damage
• Shut down the gear unit immediately in case of malfunction.
Pos : 489 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Betriebss tör ungen_04 [B1000, B2000] @ 58\m od_1606121941913_388.docx @ 2694810 @ @ 1

Gear unit malfunctions

Error Possible cause Remedy

Oil too low or
Unusual running noises,
bearing damage or Consult NORD Service department
vibrations
gear wheel damage
Oil escaping from
Defective seal Consult NORD Service department
gear unit or motor
Use oil expansion chamber
Incorrect oil level
Oil escaping from (Option OA)
pressure vent Incorrect, dirty oil Oil change
Unfavourable operating conditions Consult NORD Service department
Unfavourable installation conditions
Gear unit becomes too hot Consult NORD Service department
or gear unit damage
Motor coupling defective Replace elastomer ring
Shock when switching on, Tighten motor and gear unit
Gear unit fastening loose
vibrations fastening screws
Defective rubber element Replace rubber element
Breakage in gear unit
Output shaft does not rotate
Motor coupling defective Consult NORD Service department
although motor is running
Shrink disc slip

Table 15: Overview of malfunctions

Pos : 491 /Allgem ein/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 3\mod_1375347474401_0.docx @ 84886 @ @ 1

72 B 1000 en-2822
 7 Appendix

Pos : 492 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Leck age und Dichtheit @ 4\m od_1393493307129_388.doc x @ 120701 @ 2 @ 1

7.5 Leakage and leak-tightness

Gear units are filled with oil or grease to lubricate the moving parts. Seals prevent the escape of
lubricants. A complete seal is technically not possible, as a certain film of moisture, for example on the
radial shaft sealing rings is normal and advantageous for a long-term seal. In the region of vents,
moisture due to oil may be visible due to the escape of oil mist because of the function. In the case of
grease-lubricated labyrinth seals, e.g. Taconite sealing systems, used grease emerges from the sealing
gap due to the principle of operation. This apparent leak is not a fault.
According to the test conditions as per DIN 3761, the leak is determined by the medium which is to be
sealed, which in test bench tests exceeds the function-related moisture in a defined test period and
which results in dripping of the medium which is to be sealed. The measured quantity which is then
collected is designated as leakage.

Definition of leakage according to DIN 3761 and its appropriate use

Location of leak
Radial shaft
Term Explanation In IEC adapter Housing joint Venting
seal
No moisture No reason for No reason for No reason for No reason for
Sealed
apparent complaint complaint complaint complaint
Moisture film locally
No reason for No reason for No reason for No reason for
Damp restricted (not an
complaint complaint complaint complaint
area)
Moisture film beyond
No reason for No reason for Repair if No reason for
Wet the extent of the
complaint complaint necessary complaint
component
Measurable Recognisable Repair Repair Repair Repair
leakage stream, dripping recommended recommended recommended recommended
Temporary
malfunction of the
Temporary No reason for No reason for Repair if No reason for
sealing system or oil
leakage complaint complaint necessary complaint
leak due to
transport *)
Apparent leakage,
e.g. due to soiling,
Apparent No reason for No reason for No reason for No reason for
sealing systems
leakage complaint complaint complaint complaint
which can be re-
lubricated

Table 16: Definition of leaks according to DIN 3761

*) Previous experience has shown that moist or wet radial shaft sealing rings stop leaking later.
Therefore, under no circumstances can replacement be recommended at this stage. The reason for
momentary moisture may be e.g. small particles under the sealing lip.
Pos : 500 /Allgem ein/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 3\mod_1375347474401_0.docx @ 84886 @ @ 1

B 1000 en-2822 73
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

Pos : 501 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/0. Prol og/Reparatur hinw eise [B 1000 - B 2050] @ 68\m od_1614176946393_388.docx @ 2743640 @ 233 @ 1

7.6 Repair information

For enquiries to our technical and mechanical service department, please have the exact gear unit type
and, if applicable, the order number to hand. You can find this information on the name plate.

7.6.1 Repairs
In case of repair, remove all non-original parts from the gear unit or geared motor. No guarantee can be
given for any attached parts, such as rotary encoders or external fans.
Send the device to the following address:

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Serviceabteilung
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1
22941 Bargteheide

Information
If possible, state the reason for returning the component/device. Specify a contact person for queries.
This is important in order to keep repair times as short as possible.

7.6.2 Internet information

In addition, you will find the manuals in the available languages on our website: www.nord.com.
Pos : 502 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/1. Hi nw eise/Gewährleis tung @ 22\m od_1531824598381_388.docx @ 2433337 @ 2 @ 1

7.7 Warranty
NORD GmbH & Co. KG accepts no liability for damage to persons, materials or assets as a result of
failure to observe this operating manual, operating errors or incorrect use. General wearing parts, e.g.
radial seals are excluded from the warranty.
Pos : 503 /Allgem ein/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 3\mod_1375347474401_0.docx @ 84886 @ @ 1

74 B 1000 en-2822
 7 Appendix

Pos : 504 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/0. Prol og/Abk ürzungen [B 1000-2050] @ 56\m od_1604564182940_388.docx @ 2686999 @ 2 @ 1

7.8 Abbreviations
2D Dust explosion protected gear units, Zone 21 EN European standard
2G Gas explosion protected gear units, Zone 1 FR Radial force
3D Dust explosion protected gear units, Zone 22 FA Axial force
ATEX: ATmosphrères EXplosible H1 Lubricant for the food industry
B5 Flange fastening with through holes IE1 Standard efficiency motors
B14 Flange fastening with threaded holes IE2 High efficiency motors
CLP Mineral oil IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
CLP HC Synthetic polyalphaolefin oil NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
CLP PG Synthetic polyglycol oil IP55 International Protection
cSt Centistokes ISO International standardisation organisation
CW Clockwise, right rotation pH pH value
CCW Counter-clockwise, left rotation PPE Personal Protective Equipment
°dH Water hardness in German hardness degrees DIR Directive
1 dH = 0.1783 mmol/l
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung [German VCI Volatile Corrosion Inhibitor
Standards Institute]
E Ester oil VG Viscosity group
EC European Community WN Document from Getriebebau NORD
=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Inhalt ===

B 1000 en-2822 75
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions
Pos : 506 /Allgem ein/Steuerm odule/Stichw ortv erzeic hnis @ 0\mod_1317978518730_388.docx @ 4101 @ @ 1

Key word index

=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Stichw ortv erzeic hnis ===

A Lubricants ..................................................... 68

Activating the vent .........................................41 M

Address..........................................................74 Maintenance ................................................. 74
C Maintenance intervals ................................... 45

Change the oil ...............................................49 Maintenance work

Check the hose ..............................................47 Check for running noises .......................... 46

Checking the oil level.....................................46 Checking the oil level ................................ 46

Cooling coil ....................................................43 Leaks ......................................................... 46

Cooling system, internal ................................37 Lubricant dispenser ................................... 48

Covers ...........................................................31 Oil change ................................................. 49

Radial shaft seal ........................................ 49
D
Re-greasing VL2, VL3, W and AI/AN ........ 47
Disposal of materials .....................................51
Vent screw ................................................. 49
E
Visual inspection ....................................... 46
Electric motor .................................................40
Motor ............................................................. 40
Electrical connection ......................................40
N
F
Name plate .................................................... 16
Fault ............................................................... 72
nsd tupH ........................................................ 19
G
O
Gear unit types ..............................................14
Oil level ......................................................... 41
General overhaul ...........................................50
Option M ....................................................... 29
GRIPMAXX™ ................................................29
Options .......................................................... 14
H
P
H66 option .....................................................24
Pulling device ................................................ 22
Hollow shaft with GRIPMAXX™ (Option M) ..29
Push-on gear unit.......................................... 24
Hose union ....................................................71
R
I
Radial shaft seal ........................................... 49
Installation......................................................19
Re-grease the bearings ................................ 50
Intended use ..................................................11
Re-greasing .................................................. 47
Internet...........................................................74
Repairs .......................................................... 74
Introduction of forces .....................................22
Roller bearing greases .................................. 68
L Running noises ............................................. 46
Leakage .........................................................73 Running-in time ............................................. 44
Long-term storage .........................................18 S
Lubricant dispenser .................................42, 48
Safety information ......................................... 11
Lubricant quantities .......................................68
Service .......................................................... 74

76 B 1000 en-2822
 Key word index
Service intervals ............................................45 Transport ....................................................... 17
Shrink disc ...............................................26, 29 V
Standard motor ..............................................33 Vent ............................................................... 41
Surface treatment Vent screw .................................................... 49
nsd tupH .....................................................19 Visual inspection ........................................... 46
T Visual inspection of hose .............................. 47
Tightening torques .........................................71

B 1000 en-2822 77
Gear units – Manual with installation instructions

78 B 1000 en-2822
60528022 / 2822
B 1091 – en

Motors
Operating and Assembly Instructions
 Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions

Pos : 2 /Anl eitung en/Motor en/B1091 Drehstr ommotor en/1. Allgemei nes /0. Pr olog/Sic her heits- und Anw endungs hinw eise für El ektr omotor en @ 66\m od_1613048090652_388.doc x @ 2735079 @ @ 1

Safety and operating instructions for electric motors

(according to: Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU)

1 General The devices must be protected against impermissible loads.

During operation, devices may, depending on their protection class, have Especially during transport and handling, components must not
live, bare, moving or rotating parts or hot surfaces. be deformed and/or insulation distances must not be changed.
Unauthorised removal of covers, improper use, incorrect installation or Electrical components must not be mechanically damaged or
operation causes a risk of serious personal injury or material damage. destroyed (this may cause a health hazard!).
Further information can be found in this documentation. 5. Electrical Connection
All transportation, installation commissioning and maintenance work must When working on live devices, the applicable national accident
be carried out by qualified personnel (compliant with IEC 364 or. prevention regulations must be complied with.
CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IEC 664 or DIN VDE 0110 and The electrical installation must be implemented according to the
national accident prevention regulations). applicable regulations (e.g. cable cross-section, fuses, earth lead
For the purposes of these basic safety instructions, qualified personnel connections). Further instructions can be found in the
are persons who are familiar with the assembly, installation, documentation.
commissioning and operation of this product and who have the relevant Information regarding EMC-compliant installation – such as
qualifications for their work. shielding, earthing, location of filters and installation of cables –
2. Proper use in Europe can be found in the documentation for the devices. These
instructions must be complied with even with CE marked devices.
The devices are components intended for installation in electrical systems
or machines. Compliance with the limiting values specified in the EMC legal
regulations is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the system
When installed in machines, the devices must not be commissioned (i.e.
or machine.
commencement of the proper use) until it has been ensured that the
machine meets the provisions of the EC Directive 2006/42/EEC 6. Operation
(Machinery Directive); EN 60204 must also be complied with. Where necessary, systems in which the devices are installed
Commissioning (i.e. implementation of proper use) is only permitted if the must be equipped with additional monitoring and protective
EMC directive (2014/30/EU) is complied with. equipment according to the applicable safety requirements, e.g.
legislation concerning technical equipment, accident prevention
Devices with a CE label meet the requirements of the Low Voltage
regulations, etc.
Directive 2014/35/EU. The stated harmonized standards for the devices
are used in the declaration of conformity. The parameterisation and configuration of the devices must be
selected so that no hazards can occur.
Technical data and information for connection conditions can be found on
the rating plate and in the documentation, and must be complied with. All covers must be kept closed during operation.

The devices may only be used for safety functions which are described 7. Maintenance and repairs
and explicitly approved. The following applies in particular for operation with frequency
3. Transport, storage inverters:

Information regarding transport, storage and correct handling must be After the devices are disconnected from the power supply, live
complied with. equipment components and power connections should not be
touched immediately, because of possible charged capacitors.
4. Installation
Observe the applicable information signs located on the device.
The installation and cooling of the equipment must be implemented
Further information can be found in this documentation.
according to the regulations in the corresponding documentation.

These safety instructions must be kept in a safe place!

2 B 1091 en-2722
 Documentation
Pos : 3 /Anl eitung en/Motor en/B1091 Drehstr ommotor en/1. Allgemei nes /0. Pr olog/D ok umentati on - Versionsliste [B 1091] @ 76\m od_1625229689983_388.doc x @ 2802601 @ @ 1

Documentation
Title: B 1091
Order no.: 6051302
Series: Asynchronous motors / synchronous motors
• Single and three-phase asynchronous motors
SK 63*1)/*2) *3) to SK 315*1)/*2) *3)
1) Power labelling: S, SA, SX, M, MA, MB, MX, L, LA, LB, LX, R, X, Y, A, W
- optionally supplemented with: H, P
2)
Pole number labelling: 2, 4, 6, 8, …
3)
Further options

• Three-phase asynchronous motors

SK 63*1)/*2) 2D *3) to SK 250*1)/*2) 2D *3)
1)
Power labelling: S, SA, SX, M, MA, MB, MX, L, LA, LB, LX, R, X, Y, A, W
- optionally supplemented with: H, P
2)
Pole number labelling: 4, 6
3)
Options

with ATEX labelling II 2D Ex tb IIIC T . . . °C Db

SK 63*1)/*2) 3D *3) to SK 250*1)/*2) 3D *3)

1)
Power labelling: S, SA, SX, M, MA, MB, MX, L, LA, LB, LX, R, X, Y, A, W
- optionally supplemented with: H, P
2)
Pole number labelling: 4, 6
3) Options

with ATEX labelling II 3D Ex tc IIIB T . . . °C Dc

SK 63*1)/*2) 2G *3) to SK 200*1)/*2) 2G *3)

1)
Power labelling: S, SA, SX, M, MA, MB, MX, L, LA, LB, LX, R, X, Y, A, W
- optionally supplemented with: H, P
2)
Pole number labelling: 4, 6
3) Further options

with ATEX labelling II 2G Ex eb IIC T3 Gb

SK 63*1)/*2) 3G *3) to SK 200*1)/*2) 3G *3)

1)
Power labelling: S, SA, SX, M, MA, MB, MX, L, LA, LB, LX, R, X, Y, A, W
- optionally supplemented with: H, P
2)
Pole number labelling: 4, 6
3) Further options

with ATEX labelling II 3G Ex ec IIC T3 Gc

B 1091 en-2722 3
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions

Version list
Title, Order number / Remarks
Date Version

Internal code
B 1091, 6051302 / 0215 -
January
2015
B 1091, 6051302 / 1016 • General corrections
March 2016 • Structural modifications to the document
B 1091, 6051302 / 4816 • General corrections
December
2016
B 1091, 6051302 / 2417 • Technical supplements
June 2017
B 1091, 6051302 / 3517 • Technical supplements
August 2017
B 1091, 6051302 / 2318 • General corrections
June 2018 • Update of EU Declaration of Conformity 2D / 3D
B 1091, 6051302 / 3118 • General corrections
August 2018 • Section for operation with frequency inverter removed
• Section for special operating conditions, permissible surrounding area
supplemented
• Ignition protection type labelling and name plates updated
• Update of EU Declaration of Conformity 2G / 3G
B 1091, 6051302 / 2319 • General corrections
June 2019 • Update of EU Declaration of Conformity 3D
B 1091, 6051302 / 4020 • General corrections
October • Supplement to new section for use of explosion-protected electric
2020 motors in the People's Republic of China
B 1091, 6051302 / 1221 • General corrections
March 2021
B 1091, July 6051302 / 2721 • Supplement to section
2021 – Explosion-protected electric motors according to Class I Div.2
– Explosion-protected electric motors according to Class II Div.2
B 1091, July 6051302 / 2722 • General corrections
2022 • Update of standard specifications
• Removal of the chapter for synchronous motors (see new manual
34158 B5000)
• Incremental encoder added

4 B 1091 en-2722
 Copyright notice
Pos : 4 /Allgemei n/Allgemei ngültige Modul e/Ur heberrec htsv ermerk @ 5\m od_1410955083459_388.docx @ 150427 @ @ 1

Copyright notice
As an integral component of the device described here, this document must be provided to all
users in a suitable form.
Any editing or amendment or other utilisation of the document is prohibited.
Pos : 5 /Allgemei n/Allgemei ngültige Modul e/H erausgeber @ 67\m od_1613484928402_388.docx @ 2738552 @ @ 1

Publisher
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 • 22941 Bargteheide, Germany • http://www.nord.com
Fon +49 (0) 45 32 / 289-0 • Fax +49 (0) 45 32 / 289-2253

Member of the NORD DRIVESYSTEMS Group

=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Copyright ===

B 1091 en-2722 5
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions

6 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 7 /Allgemei n/Steuermodule/Inhaltsv erzeic hnis @ 0\mod_1317978518480_388.docx @ 4078 @ @ 1

Table of Contents
=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Inhaltsv erz eichnis ===

1 General .........................................................................................................................................................9
1.1 Safety and installation notes ............................................................................................................ 10
1.1.1 Explanation of labels used .................................................................................................. 10
1.1.2 List of safety and installation notes ..................................................................................... 11
1.2 Field of use ...................................................................................................................................... 12
1.3 Correct handling of electric motors................................................................................................... 13
1.3.1 Transport, storage .............................................................................................................. 13
1.3.2 Installation .......................................................................................................................... 13
1.3.3 Balancing, drive elements .................................................................................................. 14
1.3.4 Alignment ........................................................................................................................... 15
1.3.5 Output shafts ...................................................................................................................... 15
1.3.6 Maximum thermal expansion at rated values ..................................................................... 15
1.3.7 Electrical connection........................................................................................................... 16
1.3.8 Operation with frequency inverters ..................................................................................... 17
1.3.9 Checking the insulation resistance ..................................................................................... 20
1.3.10 Commissioning ................................................................................................................... 20
1.3.11 Disposal .............................................................................................................................. 21
2 Maintenance and servicing ...................................................................................................................... 22
2.1 Safety measures .............................................................................................................................. 22
2.2 Bearing replacement periods ........................................................................................................... 23
2.3 Maintenance intervals ...................................................................................................................... 24
2.4 General overhaul.............................................................................................................................. 24
3 ATEX Explosion hazard areas .................................................................................................................. 25
3.1 Motors with increased ignition protection, type Ex eb ...................................................................... 25
3.1.1 Cable glands....................................................................................................................... 26
3.1.2 Cable connections .............................................................................................................. 26
3.1.3 Terminal box cover seals .................................................................................................... 27
3.1.4 Motor position – special features IM V3, IM V6 .................................................................. 27
3.1.5 Further operating conditions ............................................................................................... 28
3.1.6 Protective devices .............................................................................................................. 28
3.1.7 Operation with frequency inverter ....................................................................................... 29
3.1.8 Repairs ............................................................................................................................... 30
3.1.9 Painting .............................................................................................................................. 30
3.1.10 Name plate of NORD Ex eb motors according to EN IEC 60079-0:2018 ........................... 31
3.1.11 Applied standard versions .................................................................................................. 31
3.2 Motors with ignition protection class Non Sparking Ex ec ................................................................ 32
3.2.1 Cable glands....................................................................................................................... 33
3.2.2 Cable connections .............................................................................................................. 33
3.2.3 Terminal box cover seals .................................................................................................... 34
3.2.4 Motor position – special features IM V3, IM V6 .................................................................. 34
3.2.5 Further operating conditions ............................................................................................... 35
3.2.6 Protective devices .............................................................................................................. 35
3.2.7 Repairs ............................................................................................................................... 35
3.2.8 Painting .............................................................................................................................. 36
3.2.9 Type plate for NORD Ex ec motors according to EN IEC 60079-0:2018 ............................ 37
3.2.10 Applied standard versions .................................................................................................. 37
3.3 Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22 according to EN 60079 and IEC 60079 ............................. 38
3.3.1 Commissioning information / Application area .................................................................... 39
3.3.2 Terminal box cover seals .................................................................................................... 40
3.3.3 Electrical Connection .......................................................................................................... 40
3.3.4 Cable glands....................................................................................................................... 41
3.3.5 Permissible ambient temperature range ............................................................................. 42
3.3.6 Painting .............................................................................................................................. 42
3.3.7 IEC-B14 motors .................................................................................................................. 42
3.3.8 Motor position – special features IM V3, IM V6 .................................................................. 42
3.3.9 Further operating conditions ............................................................................................... 43
3.3.10 Design and operating principle ........................................................................................... 43
3.3.11 Minimum cross section of bonding conductors ................................................................... 43
3.3.12 Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 44

B 1091 en-2722 7
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
3.4 Options for motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22 ......................................................................... 45
3.4.1 Operation with frequency inverters ..................................................................................... 45
3.4.2 External fan ........................................................................................................................ 46
3.4.3 Second temperature sensor 2TF ........................................................................................ 47
3.4.4 Back stop ............................................................................................................................ 47
3.4.5 Brake .................................................................................................................................. 47
3.4.6 Incremental encoder ........................................................................................................... 48
3.4.7 Overview of brake attachment for NORD ATEX motors ..................................................... 48
3.4.8 Name plate of motors (Ex tb, Ex tc) according to EN 60079 for FI operation ..................... 49
3.5 Motors according to TP TC012/2011 for the Eurasian Economic Union .......................................... 50
3.5.1 Type plates / Labelling........................................................................................................ 50
3.5.2 Standards ........................................................................................................................... 51
3.5.3 Service life .......................................................................................................................... 51
3.5.4 Special operating conditions (X-labelling)........................................................................... 51
3.6 Motors according to GB 12476.1-2013 / GB 12476.5-2013 for the People's Republic of China ...... 52
3.6.1 Type plates / Labelling........................................................................................................ 52
3.6.2 Standards to be observed during operation and maintenance ........................................... 53
3.7 Explosion-protected electric motors according to Class I Div.2 ........................................................ 54
3.7.1 Cable connections .............................................................................................................. 55
3.7.2 Terminal box cover seals .................................................................................................... 55
3.7.3 Electrical Connection .......................................................................................................... 56
3.7.4 Motor position – special features IM V3, IM V6 .................................................................. 56
3.7.5 Further operating conditions ............................................................................................... 57
3.8 Explosion-protected electric motors according to Class II Div.2 ....................................................... 58
3.8.1 Terminal box cover seals .................................................................................................... 59
3.8.2 Electrical Connection .......................................................................................................... 60
3.8.3 Motor position – special features IM V3, IM V6 .................................................................. 60
3.8.4 Cables and cable glands .................................................................................................... 61
3.8.5 Painting .............................................................................................................................. 61
3.8.6 IEC-B14 motors .................................................................................................................. 61
3.8.7 Further operating conditions ............................................................................................... 61
3.8.8 Minimum cross section of bonding conductors ................................................................... 62
3.8.9 Operation with frequency inverters ..................................................................................... 63
3.8.10 Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 64
4 Replacement parts .................................................................................................................................... 65
5 Declarations of Conformity ...................................................................................................................... 66

Pos : 10 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/!1! Allgem eines @ 7\m od_1431347018514_388.docx @ 217366 @ 1 @ 1

8 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
1 General
Pos : 11 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/!1! Allgem eines _Inhalt @ 7\m od_1431330112564_388.docx @ 217304 @ @ 1

These operating instructions must be read before NORD motors are transported, installed,
commissioned, serviced or repaired. All persons who are involved in these tasks must observe these
operating instructions. In order to prevent injury or damage, all of the safety information in these
operating instructions must be strictly observed.
The information and instructions in the instructions, safety and commissioning information which is
supplied, as well as all other instructions must be observed.
This is essential to prevent injury and damage.
The applicable national, local and plant-specific regulations and requirements and regulations must be
observed.
Technical details may vary for special designs and constructions. In case of doubt, we urgently
recommend that the manufacturer is contacted, giving details of the type designation and the
motor number.
Qualified personnel are persons who due to their training, experience and instruction, and their
knowledge of the relevant standards, accident prevention regulations and operating conditions are
authorised to carry out the necessary activities.
This also includes knowledge of first aid measures and the local emergency services.
It is assumed that the work for transport, assembly, installation, commissioning, maintenance and repair
will be performed by qualified staff.
In particular, the following must be observed:
• Technical data and information regarding permissible use, installation, connection, ambient and
operating conditions, which are contained in the catalogue, the order documents and other
documentation for the product.
• Local and plant-specific regulations and requirements
• Correct use of tools, lifting and transportation equipment
• Use of personal protective equipment
For reasons of clarity, the operating instructions do not contain detailed information about possible
versions and therefore do not consider all possible cases of installation, operation or servicing.
Because of this, these operating instruction essentially only contain the information which is necessary
for proper use by qualified personnel.
In order to prevent faults it is necessary that the prescribed service and inspection work is carried out
by appropriately qualified personnel.
• For the operation on an inverter, the planning guideline B1091-1 forms a part of these operating
instructions.
• The supplementary operating instructions must be observed if an external fan is present.
• For braking motors, the supplementary brake operating instructions must be observed..
If the operating instructions or the planning guide are lost for any reason, these documents must be
obtained from NORD.
Pos : 12 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------- Seitenum bruc h ---------- @ 1\m od_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

B 1091 en-2722 9
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Pos : 13 /Anl eitungen/Elek tronik/FU und Starter/1. Allgemei nes/Sicherheits- und Installati onshi nweis e und War n- Gefahr enhinw eis e/Sicherheits- und Installati onshi nweis e (i nkl. Einl eitung) @ 0\mod_1325780428207_388.docx @ 5385 @ 2 @ 1

1.1 Safety and installation notes

The devices are operating materials intended for use in industrial high voltage systems, and are
operated at voltages that could lead to severe injuries or death if they are touched.
The device and its accessories must only be used for the purpose which is intended by the manufacturer.
Unauthorised modifications and the use of spare parts and additional equipment which has not been
purchased from or recommended by the manufacturer of the device may cause fire, electric shock and
injury.
All of the associated covers and protective devices must be used.
Installation and other work may only be carried out by qualified electricians with strict adherence to the
operating instructions. Therefore keep these Operating Instructions at hand, together with all
supplementary instructions for any options which are used, and give them to each user.
Local regulations for the installation of electrical equipment and accident prevention must be complied
with.
Pos : 14 /Anl eitungen/Elek tronik/FU und Starter/1. Allgemei nes/Sicherheits- und Installati onshi nweis e und War n- Gefahr enhinw eis e/Erläuter ung der v erwendeten Kennzeic hnungen [B1091] ### auslaufend ### @ 33\mod_1558076342533_388.docx @ 2535760 @ 3 @ 1

1.1.1 Explanation of labels used

Indicates an immediate danger, which may result in death or serious

DANGER injury.

Indicates a possibly dangerous situation, which may result in death or

WARNING serious injury.

Indicates a possibly dangerous situation, which may result in slight or

CAUTION minor injuries.

Indicates a possibly harmful situation, which may cause damage to the

NOTICE product or the environment.

Note Indicates hints for use and useful information.

Pos : 15 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------- Seitenum bruc h ---------- @ 1\m od_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

10 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 16 /Anl eitungen/Elek tronik/FU und Starter/1. Allgemei nes/Sicherheits- und Installati onshi nweis e und War n- Gefahr enhinw eis e/Auflistung der Sic her heits- und Installations hinw eise @ 1\m od_1341560303401_388.docx @ 30325 @ 3 @ 1

1.1.2 List of safety and installation notes

Pos : 17 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefahr - Elek trischer Schl ag - Motor en [B1091] @ 11\m od_1459952302755_388.docx @ 316085 @ @ 1

DANGER! Electric shock

The motor is operated with a dangerous voltage. Touching certain conducting components (connection terminals
and supply cables) will cause electric shock with possibly fatal consequences.
Even when the motor is at a standstill (e.g. due to the electronic block of a connected frequency inverter or a
jammed drive unit) the connection terminals and supply cables may carry a dangerous voltage. A motor standstill
is not identical to electrical isolation from the mains.
Even if the drive unit has been disconnected from the mains, a connected motor may rotate and possibly generate
a dangerous voltage.
Installation and work must only be carried out when the motor is at a standstill and is disconnected (all phases
disconnected from the mains).
Follow the 5 Safety Rules (1. Switch off the power, 2. Secure against switching on, 3. Check for no voltage, 4.
Earthing and short circuiting, 5. Cover or fence off neighbouring live components).
Pos : 18 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/W arnung - schw er e Las ten - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\mod_1460533620869_388.docx @ 317935 @ @ 1

WARNING Hazard due to heavy loads

The large weight of the motor must be taken into account during any transportation or installation work.
Incorrect handling may cause the motor to fall or swing without control and therefore cause severe, and possibly
fatal injuries due to impact, crushing and other physical injuries. In addition, severe damage to the motor and its
surroundings are possible.
Therefore:
– Do not stand under suspended loads
– Only use the attachment points provided
– Check that lifting equipment and lashings have and adequate load capacity and are undamaged
– Avoid hectic movements
– Use personal protective equipment
Pos : 19 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/W arnung - Beweg ung - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\mod_1459953068537_388.docx @ 316120 @ @ 1

WARNING Injury due to movement

Under certain conditions (e.g. switching on the power supply, releasing a holding brake) the motor may start to
move. The machinery which it drives (press / chain hoist / roller / fan etc.) may then make an unexpected
movement. This may cause various injuries, including to third parties.
Before switching on, secure the danger area by warning and removing all persons from the danger area.
Pos : 20 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/W arnung - los e T eile - Motor en [B1091] @ 11\mod_1459954601199_388.docx @ 316155 @ @ 1

WARNING Hazard due to loose parts

Care must be taken that there are no loose parts on the motor. Otherwise, these may cause injury during
transportation and installation work, or when the motor in in operation.
Loose carrying or lifting eyes may cause the motor to fall during transportation.
Parallel keys on the motor shaft may be thrown out when the motor shaft rotates.
Fasten or remove loose parts and carrying or lifting eyes; secure or remove free parallel shaft keys on the motor
shaft(s).
Pos : 21 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Vorsic ht - Verbr ennungsgefahr @ 11\m od_1460532707435_388.docx @ 317900 @ @ 1

CAUTION Danger of burns

The surface of the motor may heat up to temperatures in excess of 70°C.
Touching the motor may cause local burns to the affected parts of the body (hands, fingers, etc.).
To prevent such injuries, allow sufficient time for cooling down before starting work - the surface temperature
should be checked with suitable measuring equipment. In addition, keep sufficient distance from adjacent
components during installation, or install protection against contact.

B 1091 en-2722 11
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Pos : 22 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Anwendungsbereic h @ 7\mod_1431330765571_388.docx @ 217335 @ 2 @ 1

1.2 Field of use

Use of the motors:
The motors may only be used for their intended purpose (to drive machinery).
The motors are constructed with at least protection class IP55 (for the protection class: see rating plate).
They may be installed in dusty or damp environments.
In principle the conditions of use and the ambient conditions determine the necessary protection class
and any other additional measures. For outdoor installation and vertical versions, e.g. V1 or V5 with the
shaft pointing downwards, Getriebebau NORD recommends the use of the double fan cover option
[RDD].
Motors must be protected against intensive sunlight, e.g. by the use of a protective cover. The insulation
is tropicalised.
Installation altitude: ≤ 1000 m
Ambient temperature: -20°C...+40°C
For standard motors an extended ambient temperature range from -20°C...+60°C is permissible.. In this
case, the rated power must be reduced to 82% of the value stated in the catalogue. If the maximum
ambient temperature is between +40°C and +60°C, the power output should be inversely linearly
interpolated between 100% and 82%.
The motor connection cables and the cable glands must be suitable for temperatures ≥ 90°C.

12 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 23 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Bestimmungsgem äßer Umg ang mit El ektr omotor en @ 7\m od_1431347154915_388.docx @ 217398 @ 2 @ 1

1.3 Correct handling of electric motors

All work must only be carried out with the power to the system switched off.
Pos : 24 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Tr ansport, Ei nlager ung @ 67\mod_1613401505511_388.docx @ 2737482 @ 35 @ 1

1.3.1 Transport, storage

WARNING Fall hazard

Incorrect handling during transport may result in the motor falling down or swivelling uncontrolledly, and thus
possibly causing serious or fatal injuries such as bruises, contusions and other physical injuries. It may also
result in serious damage to the motor and its environment.
That is why:
– Use the existing threads for ring bolts during transport (see following illustration).
– Do not attach additional loads! The lifting eyes are designed for the motor weight only.
– For transporting the machine units (e.g. gear unit attachments), only use the lifting eyes and pins
provided for this purpose!
– Machine units must not be lifted by attaching them to the individual machines!

To avoid any damage to the motor, the motor must always be lifted via suitable lifting equipment. If the
period between delivery and motor commissioning is more than four years under favourable conditions
(storage in dry and dust-free spaces protected from vibrations), the roller bearings should be replaced.
Unfavourable conditions significantly reduce the period. If necessary, unprotected and finished surfaces
(flange surface, shaft end, ...) may be treated with corrosion protection agents. If necessary, the
winding’s insulation resistance must be checked ( 1.3.9 "Checking the insulation resistance").
Changes compared to normal operation (increased power consumption, higher temperatures or
vibrations, unusual noises or odours, response of monitoring systems, etc.) may indicate that the
function is impaired. To avoid personal injury or material damage, the maintenance staff responsible
must be informed of these changes without delay.
In case of doubt, switch off the motor immediately as soon as this is allowed by the system’s state.
Mounting of ring bolts for transport
The number, position and thread size of the ring bolts provided for transport varies depending on the
motor size.

Size Threads Position

63 … …
71 … …
80 M6 2, 4
90 M8 1, 2, 3, 4
100 M8 1, 2, 3, 4
100 APAB M8 2, 4
112 M8 1, 2, 3, 4
132 M10 1, 2, 3, 4
160 M12 1, 2, 3, 4
180 M12 1, 2, 3, 4
200X M12 1, 2, 3, 4

Pos : 25 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Aufstellung @ 7\mod_1431348785190_388.docx @ 217460 @ 3 @ 1

1.3.2 Installation
• After installation, screwed-on lifting lugs must be tightened or removed.

B 1091 en-2722 13
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
• Smooth running: Precise alignment of the clutch and a well-balanced drive element (clutch, pulleys,
fan, etc.) are prerequisites for smooth vibration-free running.
• Complete balancing of the motor and the drive elements may be necessary.
• The top section of the terminal box and the position of the terminal box can be rotated by 4 x 90
degrees.
• Even if not required, on IEC B14 motors all four fixing screws, must be screwed into the flanged
bearing plate! The fixing screw threads must be inserted with a sealant, e.g. Loctite 242.

WARNING Electric shock

The maximum depth for screwing into the type plate is 2 x d. There is a danger that the motor windings may be
damaged if longer screws are used. This creates a danger of potential transfer to the housing and danger of
electric shock if touched.

• The motor must be inspected for damage before installation and commissioning. A damaged motor
must not be commissioned.
• Rotating shaft ends and unused shaft ends must be protected against contact. Unused parallel shaft
keys must be secured against being thrown out.
• The motor must be suitable for the installation location. (requirements prescribed by standards,
ambient conditions, installation altitude)
• Motor surfaces may become very hot during operation. Suitable protective measures must be taken
if there is a danger of contact or a hazard to the vicinity of the installation.
Pos : 26 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/W uc htung, Abtriebs elem ente @ 7\m od_1431349031782_388.docx @ 217491 @ 3 @ 1

1.3.3 Balancing, drive elements

The fitting and removal of drive elements (clutch, pulley, gear wheel,…) must be performed with suitable
equipment. As standard the rotors are balanced with half key balancing. The appropriate form of
balancing must be observed if drive elements are installed on the motor shaft. Drive elements
must be balanced according to ISO 1940.
The generally required measures for protection against touching the drive elements must be observed.
If a motor is started without a drive element, the parallel key must be secured against being thrown out.
This also applies for any second shaft end. Alternatively, the parallel shaft key must be removed.

14 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 27 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Ausrichten @ 7\mod_1431349204216_388.docx @ 217522 @ 3 @ 1

1.3.4 Alignment
In particular with direct coupling, the motor shafts and the driven machine must be axially and radially
aligned to each other. Incorrect alignment may result in damage to the bearings, excessive vibration
and breakage of the shaft.
Pos : 28 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Abtriebsw ellen @ 64\m od_1611922605855_388.docx @ 2726037 @ 3 @ 1

1.3.5 Output shafts

The maximum permissible axial (FA) and radial forces (FR) for the A side end of the motor shaft can be
obtained from the table below. Getriebebau NORD should be consulted if the radial force (FR) is applied
at a distance which is greater than the length E/2.

Type FR [N] FA [N]

63 530 480
71 530 480
80 860 760
90 910 810
100 1300 1100
112 1950 1640
132 2790 2360
160 3500 3000
180 .X 3500 3000
180 5500 4000
200 .X 5500 4000
225 8000 5000
250 8000 5000

No axial (FA) and radial forces (FR) are permissible for the B side shaft end.
NOTICE! Attachments must not cause rubbing (danger of excessive temperatures and sparking) or
impair the necessary flow of cooling air.
Pos : 29 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/M aximal e thermische Ausdehnung bei Bem ess ungsw erten @ 82\mod_1636719215815_388.docx @ 2843980 @ 3 @ 1

1.3.6 Maximum thermal expansion at rated values

Size Shaft Housing length Housing diameter
[mm] [mm] [mm]
63 0.19 0.39 0.28
71 0.22 0.47 0.31
80 0.25 0.53 0.36
90 0.30 0.62 0.40
100 0.35 0.69 0.45
112 0.36 0.78 0.50
132 0.46 0.91 0.60
160 0.57 1.04 0.73
180 .X 0.62 1.04 0.73
180 0.67 1.26 0.82
200 .X 0.67 1.26 0.82
225 0.85 0.58 0.41
250 0.85 0.58 0.41
Pos : 30 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------- Seitenum bruc h ---------- @ 1\m od_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

B 1091 en-2722 15
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Pos : 31 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Elektrischer Anschl uss @ 72\mod_1619773263117_388.docx @ 2773520 @ 3 @ 1

1.3.7 Electrical connection

The connection cables must be inserted into the terminal box using cable glands. The terminal box must
be sealed against dust and water. Mains voltage and mains frequency must match the data on the rating
plate. ±5 % voltage or ±2 % frequency deviations are permissible without power reduction. The
connection and configuration of the jumpers must be made according to the circuit diagram in the
terminal box.
Please refer to the following table for the designations of the auxiliary terminals.

Auxiliary terminal designation

Additional equipment Labelling of auxiliary terminals Comment

EN 60034-8
Thermistor TP1 – TP2 Switch-off
1TP1 – 1TP2 Warning Winding 1
2TP1 – 2TP2 Switch-off Winding 1
3TP1 – 3TP2 Warning Winding 2
4TP1 – 4TP2 Switch-off Winding 2
Option: TF 5TP1 – 5TP2 Brake
1TB1 – 1TB2 Warning Winding 1
Bi-metal temperature sensor
2TB1 – 2TB2 Switch-off Winding 1
Normally closed
3TB1 – 3TB2 Warning Winding 2
Option: TW
4TB1 – 4TB2 Switch-off Winding 2
Bi-metal temperature 1TM1 – 1TM2 Warning Winding 1
sensor, normally open 2TM1 – 2TM2 Switch-off Winding 1
3TM1 – 3TM2 Warning Winding 2
4TM1 – 4TM2 Switch-off Winding 2
PT100 / PT1000 1R1 – 1R2 Winding 1 (Phase U)
2R1 – 2R2 Winding 1 (Phase V)
3R1 – 3R2 Winding 1 (Phase W)
KTY (+) 4R1 – 4R2 (-) Winding 1
Silicon temperature sensor (+) 5R1 – 5R2 (-) Winding 2
Anti-condensation heater 1HE1 – 1HE2 Motor heater
Option: SH 2HE1 – 2HE2 Brake heater
Capacitor 1CA1 – 1CA2 for operating capacitor 1
Motor option: 2CA1 – 2CA2 for operating capacitor 2
EAR/EHB/EST 3CA1 – 3CA2 for starting capacitor 1
4CA1 – 4CA2 for starting capacitor 2
Direct current brake BD1 – BD2
Option: BRE...
Option: DBR… Brake1: BD1-BD2
Brake2: BD3-BD4
Pos : 32 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------- Seitenum bruc h ---------- @ 1\m od_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

16 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 33 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Betrieb am Freq uenz umrichter @ 78\mod_1629901858673_388.docx @ 2817407 @ 3 @ 1

1.3.8 Operation with frequency inverters

Three-phase asynchronous motors of type SK 63 /. – SK 250 /. have been qualified for operation with
link circuit inverters according to DIN EN 60034-18-41 (2014).
Please also observe the operating instructions for the frequency inverter in use.

The insulation system used by NORD consists of suitable varnished copper wire, phase insulation,
homogeneous impregnation and groove lining as insulation against earth and is designed for the
increased requirements of the link circuit inverter in the standard version.
The maximum permissible FI input voltage is 500 V +10 %. Link circuit voltages in excess of 750 V DC
are not permissible. Peak voltages due to the system of inverter, cable and motor must not exceed the
following values when the motor is warm due to operation.

Permissible impulse voltages depending on the voltage rise time

Impulse voltage [V]

Voltage rise time [µs]

If the values are outside of the permissible range, du/dt or sine wave filters may be used (note additional
voltage drop).
The cable lengths shown in the diagram are for guidance only and may deviate corresponding to the
specific conditions.
In principle, attention must be paid to an EMC-compliant installation.
Additional information on operation on the frequency inverter, in particular information on the max.
permissible speed, the thermal design and the possible torques, can be found in the current NORD
motor catalogue M7000.

B 1091 en-2722 17
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Pos : 34 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Betrieb am Freq uenz umrichter_02_Leistungsv erlus te gemäß EU 2019/1781 ( Öko-D esign- Ver ordnung) @ 89\m od_1655807898840_388.doc x @ 2918640 @ 5 @ 1

Power losses according to (EU) 2019/1781

Please find the “power losses expressed in percentage (%) of the rated output power (speed vs. torque)
according to (EU) 2019/1781” in the below overview.
Pos : 35 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Betrieb am Freq uenz umrichter_03_Leistungsv erlus te Tabelle - Kopf @ 89\m od_1655809872285_388.docx @ 2918679 @ @ 1

Motor type Relative losses

(Speed/torque)

Frequency 25/25 25/100 50/25 50/50 50/100 90/50 90/100

[Hz] [%] [%] [%] [%] [%] [%] [%]

Pos : 36 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/Hinw eis für spr achneutral e T abellen_Komma= Punkt_nur englisch! @ 87\m od_1649408206263_388.doc x @ 2901120 @ @ 1

Notice: A comma counts as a full stop and signifies a decimal place.

Pos : 37 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Betrieb am Freq uenz umrichter_04_Leistungsv erlus te Tabelle - W erte 1 @ 89\m od_1655810910077_0.docx @ 2918717 @ @ 1

63SP/4 50 20,1 41,3 21,8 26,1 42,9 30,0 47,0

63SP/4 60 16,6 32,6 17,8 23,3 34,7 27,7 40,6
63LP/4 50 18,3 38,1 19,6 23,5 38,5 26,9 41,2
63LP/4 60 18,6 31,4 20,0 23,0 33,0 27,0 36,8
71SP/4 50 9,6 24,7 12,1 15,1 27,3 20,4 33,2
71SP/4 60 9,2 19,6 12,1 14,5 23,2 21,4 30,4
71LP/4 50 9,4 27,8 12,0 15,5 29,3 20,6 34,2
71LP/4 60 9,0 20,9 11,9 14,5 24,5 21,0 31,5
80SP/4 50 5,4 19,4 6,6 9,1 20,0 11,3 21,8
80SP/4 60 5,0 14,3 6,2 8,1 15,4 11,0 18,6
80LP/4 50 4,0 17,2 4,9 7,2 17,3 9,2 19,0
80LP/4 60 3,7 12,3 4,7 6,4 13,2 8,9 15,9
90SP/4 50 2,5 9,9 4,5 6,2 14,0 8,1 16,0
90SP/4 60 3,2 10,1 4,3 5,7 11,1 8,3 13,8
90LP/4 50 3,2 16,7 4,0 6,1 15,8 7,6 16,9
90LP/4 60 2,9 11,4 3,8 5,3 11,8 7,3 13,9
100LP/4 APAB 50 2,6 10,4 3,5 4,7 10,8 6,9 13,3
100LP/4 APAB 60 2,4 7,9 3,7 4,4 9,3 7,1 11,7
100AP/4 APAB 50 2,0 11,4 2,9 4,4 11,7 6,0 13,5
100AP/4 APAB 60 1,8 7,9 2,6 3,5 8,6 5,8 10,9
Pos : 38 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------- Seitenum bruc h ---------- @ 1\m od_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

18 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 39 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Betrieb am Freq uenz umrichter_03_Leistungsv erlus te Tabelle - Kopf @ 89\m od_1655809872285_388.docx @ 2918679 @ @ 1

Motor type Relative losses

(Speed/torque)

Frequency 25/25 25/100 50/25 50/50 50/100 90/50 90/100

[Hz] [%] [%] [%] [%] [%] [%] [%]

Pos : 40 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/Hinw eis für spr achneutral e T abellen_Komma= Punkt_nur englisch! @ 87\m od_1649408206263_388.doc x @ 2901120 @ @ 1

Notice: A comma counts as a full stop and signifies a decimal place.

Pos : 41 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Betrieb am Freq uenz umrichter_05_Leistungsv erlus te Tabelle - W erte 2 @ 89\m od_1655811315088_0.docx @ 2918755 @ @ 1

112MP/4 50 2,1 11,2 2,8 4,1 11,3 5,7 12,4

112MP/4 60 1,9 7,8 2,9 3,8 8,7 5,6 10,7
132SP/4 50 1,7 7,3 2,7 3,5 8,1 5,3 10,1
132SP/4 60 1,8 5,5 2,7 3,4 6,6 6,1 9,2
132MP/4 50 1,8 8,3 2,4 3,5 8,8 5,0 10,6
132MP/4 60 1,7 6,0 2,5 3,2 6,8 5,7 8,9
160SP/4 50 1,2 6,1 1,6 2,5 6,5 3,9 8,3
160SP/4 60 1,1 4,5 1,9 2,5 5,2 4,4 7,8
160MP/4 50 1,1 6,4 1,6 2,6 6,7 3,7 8,0
160MP/4 60 0,9 4,6 1,5 2,4 5,0 3,8 6,3
160LP/4 50 1,1 5,9 1,6 2,4 6,6 3,4 8,5
160LP/4 60 1,0 4,1 1,7 2,2 4,9 3,5 6,5
180MP/4 50 1,1 4,3 1,4 2,0 4,8 2,9 6,2
180MP/4 60 0,9 3,3 1,4 1,9 4,4 2,8 5,7
180LP/4 50 0,8 4,8 1,1 1,7 4,9 2,5 5,4
180LP/4 60 0,7 3,5 1,1 1,6 4,1 2,1 4,7
225RP/4 50 0,7 3,7 1,2 1,6 4,1 2,8 5,3
225RP/4 60 0,7 2,8 1,2 1,7 3,8 3,6 5,2
225SP/4 50 0,7 3,8 1,0 1,6 4,2 2,4 4,8
225SP/4 60 0,6 2,9 0,9 1,4 3,4 1,8 5,0
225MP/4 50 0,6 3,7 0,8 1,3 3,9 2,0 4,6
225MP/4 60 0,6 2,8 0,8 1,3 3,0 2,3 3,6
250WP/4 50 0,5 4,2 0,7 1,3 4,5 1,5 5,3
250WP/4 60 0,5 3,0 0,7 1,2 3,4 1,9 4,3
Pos : 42 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------- Seitenum bruc h ---------- @ 1\m od_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

B 1091 en-2722 19
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Pos : 43 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Ü berprüfung des Is olationswiderstandes @ 7\m od_1431353806825_388.doc x @ 217716 @ 3555 @ 1

1.3.9 Checking the insulation resistance

Prior to initial commissioning of the motor after a long period of storage or standstill (approx. 6 months)
the insulation resistance of the windings must be checked. During and immediately after the
measurements, the terminals have voltages which can be dangerous, and must not be touched.
Insulation resistance
The insulation resistance of new, cleaned, repaired windings against the housing and against each other
is > 200 MΩ.
Measurement
The insulation of the windings against the housing for operation voltages up to 400 V must be measured
with 500 V DC. For operating voltages up to 725 V the measurement must be made with 1000 V DC.
The temperature of the windings should be 25°C ± 15°C.
Testing
If the minimum insulation resistance of the winding against earth is less than 50 MΩ, this may be due to
moisture. The windings must then be dried.
The insulation resistance may reduce after long periods of operation. As long as the measured value
does not fall below the calculated value for the critical insulation resistance of < 50 MΩ, operation of the
motor may continue. If the value is less than this, the cause must be established and if necessary the
windings or parts of the windings must be repaired, cleaned or dried.
Pos : 44 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Inbetriebnahme @ 7\m od_1431354073795_388.docx @ 217747 @ 3 @ 1

1.3.10 Commissioning

Information Electromagnetic compatibility

NORD motors comply with the EU-Directive 2014/30/EU. Assembly or installation work must not cause
impermissible interference. Immunity from interference must still exist.

Production of interference: In cases of large differences of torque (e.g. when driving a piston
compressor) a non-sine wave motor current is induced, whose harmonics can cause an impermissible
effect on the mains and therefore impermissible production of interference.
With supply by frequency inverters, various strengths of interference are produced according to the
design of the frequency inverter (type, interference suppression, manufacturer). The EMC information
of the inverter manufacturer must be observed. If a shielded motor supply cable is recommended, the
shielding is most effective if a large area is electrically connected to the metal terminal box of the motor
(with metal EMC cable gland). With motors with integrated sensors (e.g. thermistors) interference
voltages due to the inverter may be produced in the sensor cables.

Interference immunity: For motors with integrated sensors (e.g. thermistors) the operator must ensure
adequate immunity to interference by the selection of a suitable sensor cable (possibly with screening,
with connection as for the motor supply cable) and evaluation device. The information and instructions
in the operating instructions for the inverter and all other instructions must be observed before
commissioning. After installation of the motor, it must be checked for correct functioning. In the case of
brake motors, the correct function of the brake must also be checked.

20 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 45 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Ents orgung @ 7\m od_1431354230589_388.doc x @ 217778 @ 3 @ 1

1.3.11 Disposal

NOTICE Environmental damage

Incorrect disposal of the product may cause damage to the environment.
• Ensure correct disposal
• Comply with current local regulations

Content: aluminium, iron, electronic components, copper

Please observe the additional documentation for the attachments
Pos : 47 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/2. Instandhaltung, Wartung/!1! Ins tandhaltung und Wartung @ 7\m od_1431354436983_388.doc x @ 217809 @ 1 @ 1

B 1091 en-2722 21
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions

2 Maintenance and servicing

Pos : 48 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefahr - Elek trischer Schl ag - Motor en [B1091] @ 11\m od_1459952302755_388.docx @ 316085 @ @ 1

DANGER! Electric shock

The motor is operated with a dangerous voltage. Touching certain conducting components (connection terminals
and supply cables) will cause electric shock with possibly fatal consequences.
Even when the motor is at a standstill (e.g. due to the electronic block of a connected frequency inverter or a
jammed drive unit) the connection terminals and supply cables may carry a dangerous voltage. A motor standstill
is not identical to electrical isolation from the mains.
Even if the drive unit has been disconnected from the mains, a connected motor may rotate and possibly generate
a dangerous voltage.
Installation and work must only be carried out when the motor is at a standstill and is disconnected (all phases
disconnected from the mains).
Follow the 5 Safety Rules (1. Switch off the power, 2. Secure against switching on, 3. Check for no voltage, 4.
Earthing and short circuiting, 5. Cover or fence off neighbouring live components).
Pos : 49 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/W arnung - Beweg ung - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\mod_1459953068537_388.docx @ 316120 @ @ 1

WARNING Injury due to movement

Under certain conditions (e.g. switching on the power supply, releasing a holding brake) the motor may start to
move. The machinery which it drives (press / chain hoist / roller / fan etc.) may then make an unexpected
movement. This may cause various injuries, including to third parties.
Before switching on, secure the danger area by warning and removing all persons from the danger area.
Pos : 50 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/2. Instandhaltung, Wartung/Sic herheitsm aßnahmen @ 7\mod_1431354500198_388.docx @ 217840 @ 2 @ 1

2.1 Safety measures

Before starting any work on the motor or the device, but especially before opening the covers of active
components, the motor must be isolated according to regulations. In addition to the main power circuits,
any additional or auxiliary circuits must be taken into account.
The usual "5 Safety Rules" e.g. according to DIN VDE 0105 are:
• Disconnect
• Secure to prevent reactivation
• Check for no voltage on all poles
• Earth and short circuit
• Cover or cordon off adjacent live components
These measures may only be removed when the maintenance work is complete.

Motors must be properly inspected at regular intervals; current national standards and regulations must
be complied with. In particular, special attention must be paid to any mechanical damage, free path of
the cooling air, abnormal noises and correct electrical connection.
Only original parts may be used as spare parts with the exception of standardised, commercially
available and equivalent parts.
Swapping parts between motors of the same type is not permissible.

Information Condensation outlets

If the motors are designed with closed condensation outlets, these must be opened occasionally in order to allow
any accumulated condensation to drain off. Condensation outlets must always be located at the lowest point of
the motor. During installation of the motor care must be taken that the condensation outlets point downwards
and are closed. Open condensation outlets cause a reduction of the protection class.

22 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 51 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/2. Instandhaltung, Wartung/Lagerw echselfris ten @ 78\mod_1629902030594_388.docx @ 2817445 @ 2 @ 1

2.2 Bearing replacement periods

Under normal operating conditions, with horizontal motor installation, the bearing replacement period in
operating hours [h] for IEC motors is the following depending on the listed coolant temperature and
motor speeds:
25°C 40°C 60°C
to 1.800 rpm approx. 40,000 h approx. 20,000 h approx. 8,000 h
to 3,600 rpm approx. 20,000 h approx. 10,000 h approx. 4,000 h

In case of direct mounting of the gear units or special operating conditions, for example vertical motor
installation, high vibration and impact loads, frequent reversing operation, etc., the above-mentioned
operating hours can be significantly reduced. The ball bearings are lifelong lubricated.
Pos : 52 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------- Seitenum bruc h ---------- @ 1\m od_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

B 1091 en-2722 23
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Pos : 53 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/2. Instandhaltung, Wartung/Wartungsintervall e @ 78\m od_1629902151779_388.docx @ 2817483 @ 2 @ 1

2.3 Maintenance intervals

The motor must be checked for unusual running noises and/or vibrations once a week or every
100 hours of operation.
Please check the roller bearings at a minimum interval of 10,000 h and replace them if necessary. The
interval may be shorter depending on the operating conditions.

NOTICE
Bearing damage during inverter operation
During inverter operation, bearing currents can occur under unfavourable conditions, which lead to
damage of the bearings. Damaging bearing currents can be prevented by appropriate technical
measures.
• The effective value of the shaft voltage should not exceed 250 mV.
If necessary, please contact NORD service.

Also check the electrical connections, cables, strands and fans for strength and damages. Check the
function of the insulation system.
Replace the radial shaft seals every 10,000 h.
There must be no dust deposits on the motor’s surface that may impair cooling.
The motor must be completely overhauled at intervals of five years.
Pos : 54 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/2. Instandhaltung, Wartung/Gener alüber hol ung @ 67\mod_1613485340299_388.docx @ 2738745 @ 2 @ 1

2.4 General overhaul

The motor must be completely disassembled. The following work must be carried out:
• Clean all motor components
• Examine all motor components for damages
• Replace all damaged components
• Replace all roller bearings
• Replace all seals and radial shaft seals
• Perform a winding insulation resistance measurement
The general overhaul must be carried out by qualified personnel in a specialist workshop with
appropriate equipment. We urgently recommend that the general overhaul is carried out by the NORD
Service department.
If the drive unit is used in special ambient conditions, the above-mentioned intervals may be significantly
shorter.
Pos : 56 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/!1! ATEX - Ex plosi onsgefährdete Umgebung @ 7\mod_1431355541868_388.docx @ 217964 @ 1 @ 1

24 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
3 ATEX Explosion hazard areas
Pos : 57 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/!2! M otoren der Zündschutzart Er höhte Sicherheit Ex eb_01 [EXE] @ 7\m od_1431409396334_388.doc x @ 217998 @ 2 @ 1

3.1 Motors with increased ignition protection, type Ex eb

Pos : 58 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/GEF AHR _AT EX - Expl osionsgefahr Elek tischer Sc hlag - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\m od_1460010132024_388.docx @ 316266 @ @ 1

DANGER! Explosion hazard

All work must only be carried out with the machine at a standstill and the power to the system
switched off.
Higher temperatures than the maximum permitted surface temperature of the housing may
be present inside the motor. The motor must therefore never be opened in an explosive
atmosphere!
Failure to comply with this may result in the ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 59 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/W ARNUNG_ATEX_Ex plosi onsgefahr-T hermisc h - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\mod_1460010112266_388.docx @ 316231 @ @ 1

WARNING Explosion hazard

Excessively heavy dust deposits must be avoided, as these impair the cooling of the device!
Impairment or obstruction of the flow of cooling air, for example due to partial or large area
coverage of the fan cover or the entry of foreign bodies fall into the fan must be avoided in
order to ensure adequate cooling.
Only cable glands and reducers which are approved for use in explosion hazard areas may
be used.
All cable glands which are not used must be closed with blind screw plugs which are approved
for potentially explosive areas.
Only the original seals may be used.
Failure to comply increases the risk of ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 60 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/!2! M otoren der Zündschutzart Er höhte Sicherheit Ex eb_02 [EXE] @ 72\mod_1619623136952_388.docx @ 2772200 @ @ 1

For these motors, the following information specifically or complimentarily apply.

The motors are suitable for use in zone 1 and correspond to device group II, category 2G and may be
used at an ambient temperature from -20 °C to +40 °C.

Type suffix: 2G e.g.: 80 L/4 2G TF

Labelling: II 2G Ex eb IIC T3 Gb
0102

NOTICE
Motor attachments
Explosion-protected electric motors are often delivered with attached components and devices, such
as a gear unit or a brake.
• In addition to the labelling of the motor, observe any labelling on the attached components and
devices. Consider any resulting restrictions for the entire drive.

Explosive gas mixtures or dust concentrations may cause severe or fatal injuries in combination with
hot, electrically live and moving components of electrical machines.

B 1091 en-2722 25
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions

The increased danger in explosion hazard areas requires especially strict observance of the general
safety and commissioning information. It is necessary that the persons responsible are qualified
according to national and local regulations.
Explosion protected electrical machines with ignition protection class Ex eb correspond to the standard
series EN 60034 (VDE 0530), as well as EN IEC 60079-0:2018 and EN IEC 60079-7:2015/A1:2018.
The degree of explosion hazards determines zone division. DIN EN 60079, Part 10 provides information
about this. The operator is responsible for the zone division. The use of motors which are not certified
for explosion hazard areas is prohibited in explosion hazard areas.
Pos : 61 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Leitungs einführung [Ex e, Ex n] @ 66\mod_1613047148339_388.docx @ 2734889 @ 3 @ 1

3.1.1 Cable glands

The cable glands must be approved for explosion hazard areas. Unused openings must be sealed with
approved blind plugs. When connecting the installation cables, the connections at the motor terminals
and the ground cable with U-shaped cables must be placed below the respective terminals so that the
clamping bracket and the clamping bolt are evenly loaded and are not deformed. As an alternative, the
connections may be designed with a cable lug. If the cables are subject to increased thermal
requirements, this information can be found listed on a label on the motor.
For sizes 63 to 132, an isolated cable lug must be provided, if it is used to connect the earthing cable
within the terminal box.
The nuts of the terminal board bolts must be tightened according to the following table.
Tightening torques for terminal board connections
Thread diameter M4 M5 M6 M8
Tightening torque (Nm) 1.2 2.0 3.0 6.0

The use of aluminium connection cables is not permitted.

Pos : 62 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Kabelv ersc hraubung en_1 [EXE] @ 7\m od_1431424689140_388.docx @ 218735 @ 3 @ 1

3.1.2 Cable connections

All motors with ignition protection class Ex eb are delivered with a certified cable gland.
Pos : 63 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Kabelv ersc hraubung en_2 [EXE, EXN] @ 51\mod_1601389456113_388.docx @ 2675215 @ @ 1

If the provided cable gland is used, cables with circular cable cross-section must be used. The cable
gland's lock nuts must be tightened with a torque according to the following table.
Tightening torques for lock nut
Cable gland M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M32x1.5 M40x1.5
Tightening torque (Nm) 3.0 6.0 12.0 14.0
Pos : 64 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Kabelv ersc hraubung en_3 [EXE] @ 64\m od_1612261712307_388.doc x @ 2727088 @ @ 1

Use of reduction adapters according to Directive 2014/34/EU and/or cable glands with ignition protection
class Ex eb is permissible. For this, a minimum certified temperature of 80°C is necessary.
Pos : 65 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Kabelv ersc hraubung en_4 [EXE, EXN] @ 18\mod_1496915057687_388.docx @ 2353844 @ @ 1

When connecting, care must be taken that the permissible air gaps of at least 10 mm and the permissible
leakage tracks of at least12 mm between the electrically live components and components with the
same potential as the housing, or between live components are maintained.
Check that the terminal nuts and the screw for the earth lead are tight before closing the terminal box.
The terminal box seals and the seals of the cable glands must be correctly seated and must not be
damaged.

26 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents

Pos : 66 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Kl emmenk astendeck eldic htung [EXE, EXN, Zone21+22, Clas s I und II Div.2] @ 7\m od_1431427943472_388.doc x @ 218892 @ 3 @ 1

3.1.3 Terminal box cover seals

The terminal box cover gasket is captively mounted on the terminal box cover. Please only use an
original seal when replacing the seal.
If the terminal box is opened during installation, maintenance, repair, troubleshooting or overhaul, the
terminal box cover must be re-fitted after the work is complete. There must be no dirt on the surface of
the seal or the sealing surface of the terminal box frame.
The screws for the terminal box cover must be tightened with a torque according to the list below.
Tightening torques for terminal box cover screws
Thread diameter M4 M5 M6 M8
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.8 - 1.2 1.2 - 1.8 1.5 - 2.5 3.0 – 5.0
Pos : 67 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Motorlag e – Bes onderheiten [EXE, EXN , Z one21+ 22, Cl ass I Div.2] @ 78\mod_1629902592793_388.docx @ 2817521 @ 3 @ 1

3.1.4 Motor position – special features IM V3, IM V6

If the end of the shaft faces upwards, e.g. version IM V3, IM V6, a cover must be provided by the
operator / installer, which prevents foreign bodies from falling into the fan cover of the motor (see
EN IEC 60079-0:2018). This must not obstruct the fan from cooling the motor. If the end of the shaft
faces downwards (AS, inclination 20° to 90°), e.g. versions IM V1, IM V5, the motors are to be used with
a protective cover on the fan cover. For an inclination of less than 20°, an appropriate protective device,
which meets the above mentioned conditions, must be provided by the operator / installer.
A hand wheel on the second shaft end is not permitted.

B 1091 en-2722 27
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions

Pos : 68 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Weitere Betriebs bedi ngunge [EXE, EXN] @ 7\m od_1431428217184_388.docx @ 218956 @ 3 @ 1

3.1.5 Further operating conditions

The motors are designed for continuous operation and normal, non recurring starting, in which no
significant starting heat occurs.
Range A in EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530 Part 1) - Voltage ± 5%, Frequency ± 2%, curve form, mains
symmetry - must be complied with so that the development of heat remains within the permissible limits.
Any major deviations from the rated values can cause an impermissible increase in the development of
heat in the motor.
The motor temperature class stated on the type plate must at least conform to the temperature class of
any combustible gas that may occur.
Pos : 69 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Weitere Betriebs bedi ngunge [EXE, EXN]_02 @ 78\mod_1629902781905_388.docx @ 2817559 @ @ 1

When operated on a frequency inverter, damaging bearing currents must be ruled out. This could be
caused by excessively high shaft voltages.
If the effective value of the shaft voltage (RMS) exceeds 250 mV, permissible technical measures must
be taken. If necessary, please contact the NORD service. Please also pay attention to the relevant PTB
data sheets. In addition to further information, details on the permissible frequency characteristic curves
can be found here.
Pos : 70 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Sc hutz einric htung en_1 [EXE] @ 66\mod_1613047373844_388.docx @ 2734927 @ 3 @ 1

3.1.6 Protective devices

Each machine must be protected against impermissible heating during all phases by a current-
dependent and delayed circuit breaker with phase failure protection according to VDE 0660, functionally
tested by a notified body, or by an equivalent effective device. The protective device must be set to the
rated current. For windings with a delta circuit, the triggers are connected in series with the phase
windings and set to 0.58-x the rated current. If this circuit is not possible, additional protection measures
are required (e.g. thermal protection of the machine).
In case of a blocked rotor, the protective device must switch off within the E time specified for the
respective temperature class.
Electrical machines for heavy starting (acceleration time > 1,7 x tE time) must be protected by a start
monitoring device as specified in the EU type-examination certificate.
Thermal protection of the machine by means of direct temperature monitoring of the windings with a
PTC resistor temperature sensor is permitted, if this is certified and stated on the rating plate.
Do not apply voltages higher than 30 V to the PTC resistor temperature sensors!
For sole protection by PTC resistor temperature sensors, a functionally tested and certified PTC
triggering device of a notified body must be used. The PTC triggering device must have the following
protection class labelling:

II (2) G

28 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 71 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Sc hutz einric htung en_3 - Hinw eis e z um M otorschutz [EXE] @ 7\m od_1431412228873_388.doc x @ 218132 @ 5 @ 1

Information for motor protection

Type plate example: Type plate example:
No sole means of protection via temperature sensor Sole protection via temperature sensor

Notice! Danger! If the time tA is not stated on the A thermistor is permissible as the sole
type plate, the thermistor is not permissible as the sole
means of protection
It is essential that the motor is protected with a
motor protection relay which has been approved
by a testing facility. The motor protection relay must
be approved for the ignition protection class which is
stated on the motor.
Pos : 72 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Betrieb am Fr equenz umrichter [EXE] @ 7\mod_1431425436223_388.docx @ 218798 @ 3 @ 1

3.1.7 Operation with frequency inverter

Operation with a frequency inverter must be explicitly certified. The separate manufacturer's information
must be observed. The EMC Directive must be complied with.
Pos : 73 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------- Seitenum bruc h ---------- @ 1\m od_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

B 1091 en-2722 29
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Pos : 74 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Reparaturen [EXE, EXN] @ 7\m od_1431422270100_388.docx @ 218512 @ 3 @ 1

3.1.8 Repairs
Repairs must be carried out by Getriebebau NORD or by an officially recognised expert. The work must
be indicated with an additional repair plate. With the exception of standard, commercially available and
equivalent components, only original spare parts (see spare parts list) may be used. The particularly
applies for seals and connecting components.
For motors with closed condensation outlets, the threads of the closing screws must be coated with
Loctite 242 or Loxeal 82-21 after the condensation has been drained. The closing screws must be re-
inserted immediately. The electrical connections must be checked at regular intervals.
Check that the connection terminals, and the electrical bonding terminal are firmly fastened. Check that
the cable gland and the terminal box gasket are in good condition
All work on electrical machinery must be performed when the machine is at a standstill and with all poles
disconnected from the mains.
The motor must be removed for any measurement of the insulation resistance. The measurement must
not be performed in the explosion hazard area. As soon as measurement has been completed,
discharge the connecting terminals again immediately by shorting them in order to prevent any spark
discharges occurring in the explosive area.
Pos : 75 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/GEF AHR _AT EX - Is olationsm ess ung - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\mod_1460013200941_388.docx @ 316406 @ @ 1

DANGER! Explosion hazard

Insulation measurements may cause sparks and therefore ignition of an explosive
atmosphere.
• Only perform insulation measurements outside of an explosive atmosphere.
• Discharge the connection terminals by short circuiting them after the measurement and
before returning to an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 76 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Lacki erung [EXE, EXN, Z one21+ 22] @ 67\mod_1613486826666_388.docx @ 2738934 @ 3 @ 1

3.1.9 Painting
The motors are equipped with a suitable, electrostatically tested painting ex-works. Subsequent painting
may only be carried out in consultation with Getriebebau NORD or a repair workshop approved for the
repair of explosion-protected electric motors. The valid standards and regulations must be observed.
Pos : 77 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------- Seitenum bruc h ---------- @ 1\m od_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

30 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 78 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Ty pensc hild N ORD Ex eb- M otoren nach EN 60079 [EXE] @ 72\m od_1619623980393_388.doc x @ 2772275 @ 3 @ 1

3.1.10 Name plate of NORD Ex eb motors according to EN IEC 60079-0:2018

1 Data matrix code
2 Code number of notified body
3 Number of phases
4 Type designation
5 Order number/motor number
6 Year of manufacture
7 Thermal class of insulation system
8 IP protection class
9 Operating mode
10 Standard specifications
11 Nominal frequency
12 Nominal voltage
13 Permissible voltage range
14 EU type-examination certificate number
15 Power factor
16 Speed
17 Explosion protection marking
18 Locked-rotor current/nominal current
19 tE times
20 Note: TMS when indicating the tA time with
only PTC triggering device according to:
II (2)G PTC DIN 44082

21 Notice! Pay attention to operating instructions

B1091.
22 Nominal power (mechanical shaft power)
23 Nominal current
24 Individual serial number
25 Efficiency

Pos : 79 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Ty pensc hild N ORD Ex _- Motor en_Ergänz ung [EXE, EXN , EX - FU-Betrieb EX tb, tc] @ 11\mod_1460031690739_388.docx @ 316441 @ @ 1

Before commissioning, the type plate must be compared with the requirements of the aforementioned
declaration, which result from the local regulations and operating conditions.
Pos : 80 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Ty pensc hild N ORD Ex _- Motor en - Erkl ärung der N ormenangabe [EXE, EXN] @ 7\m od_1431426076094_388.doc x @ 218829 @ 5 @ 1

Explanation of standard specification in rating plate

EN 60034 (H), (A)/ EN 60079

Used range of standards for explosion protection
(Please pay attention to conformity declaration.)
Voltage range A in accordance with EN 60034-1
Half key balancing in accordance with EN 60034-14
Product standard

Pos : 81 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Angew andte N ormenstände [EXE, EXN] @ 72\m od_1619624161278_388.doc x @ 2772313 @ 3 @ 1

3.1.11 Applied standard versions

EN standard Edition IEC standard Edition
EN 60034-7 2001-12 IEC 60034-7 1992+ A1:2000
EN 60034-6 1996-08 IEC 60034-6 1991-09
EN 60079-0 2018 IEC 60079-0 2017
EN 60079-7/A1 2015 /A1: 2018 IEC 60079-7/A1 2015/ 2017
EN 60529 2014-09 IEC 60529 1989/AMD2:2013/COR1:2019
Pos : 82 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------- Seitenum bruc h ---------- @ 1\m od_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

B 1091 en-2722 31
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Pos : 83 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/!2! M otoren der Zündschutzart Non Sparking Ex ec _01 [EXN] @ 7\m od_1431419417638_388.doc x @ 218225 @ 2 @ 1

3.2 Motors with ignition protection class Non Sparking Ex ec

Pos : 84 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/GEF AHR _AT EX - Expl osionsgefahr Elek tischer Sc hlag - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\m od_1460010132024_388.docx @ 316266 @ @ 1

DANGER! Explosion hazard

All work must only be carried out with the machine at a standstill and the power to the system
switched off.
Higher temperatures than the maximum permitted surface temperature of the housing may
be present inside the motor. The motor must therefore never be opened in an explosive
atmosphere!
Failure to comply with this may result in the ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 85 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/W ARNUNG_ATEX_Ex plosi onsgefahr-T hermisc h - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\mod_1460010112266_388.docx @ 316231 @ @ 1

WARNING Explosion hazard

Excessively heavy dust deposits must be avoided, as these impair the cooling of the device!
Impairment or obstruction of the flow of cooling air, for example due to partial or large area
coverage of the fan cover or the entry of foreign bodies fall into the fan must be avoided in
order to ensure adequate cooling.
Only cable glands and reducers which are approved for use in explosion hazard areas may
be used.
All cable glands which are not used must be closed with blind screw plugs which are approved
for potentially explosive areas.
Only the original seals may be used.
Failure to comply increases the risk of ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 86 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/!2! M otoren der Zündschutzart Non Sparking Ex ec _02 [EXN] @ 72\mod_1619624749268_388.docx @ 2772351 @ @ 1

For these motors, the following information specifically or complimentarily apply.

The motors are suitable for use in zone 2 and correspond to device group II, category 3G and may be
used at an ambient temperature from -20 °C to +40 °C.

Type suffix: 3G e.g.: 80 L/4 3G TF

Labelling: II 3G Ex ec IIC T3 Gc With indication of the temperature
class

NOTICE
Motor attachments
Explosion-protected electric motors are often delivered with attached components and devices, such
as a gear unit or a brake.
• In addition to the labelling of the motor, observe any labelling on the attached components and
devices. Consider any resulting restrictions for the entire drive.

Explosive gas mixtures or dust concentrations may cause severe or fatal injuries in combination with
hot, electrically live and moving components of electrical machines.
The increased danger in explosion hazard areas requires especially strict observance of the general
safety and commissioning information. It is essential that the persons responsible are qualified according
national and local regulations.
Explosion protected electrical machines with ignition protection class Ex n correspond to the standard
series EN 60034 (VDE 0530), as well as IEC 60079-0:2018 and EN IEC 60079-7:2015/A1:2018. The
degree of explosion hazards determines zone division. DIN EN 60079, Part 10 provides information
about this. The operator is responsible for the zone division. The use of motors which are not certified
for explosion hazard areas is prohibited in explosion hazard areas.

32 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents

Pos : 87 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Leitungs einführung [Ex e, Ex n] @ 66\mod_1613047148339_388.docx @ 2734889 @ 3 @ 1

3.2.1 Cable glands

The cable glands must be approved for explosion hazard areas. Unused openings must be sealed with
approved blind plugs. When connecting the installation cables, the connections at the motor terminals
and the ground cable with U-shaped cables must be placed below the respective terminals so that the
clamping bracket and the clamping bolt are evenly loaded and are not deformed. As an alternative, the
connections may be designed with a cable lug. If the cables are subject to increased thermal
requirements, this information can be found listed on a label on the motor.
For sizes 63 to 132, an isolated cable lug must be provided, if it is used to connect the earthing cable
within the terminal box.
The nuts of the terminal board bolts must be tightened according to the following table.
Tightening torques for terminal board connections
Thread diameter M4 M5 M6 M8
Tightening torque (Nm) 1.2 2.0 3.0 6.0

The use of aluminium connection cables is not permitted.

Pos : 88 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Kabelv ersc hraubung en_1 [EXN , Cl ass I und II Div.2] @ 7\m od_1431424754843_388.docx @ 218766 @ 3 @ 1

3.2.2 Cable connections

Pos : 89 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Kabelv ersc hraubung en_2 [EXE, EXN] @ 51\mod_1601389456113_388.docx @ 2675215 @ @ 1

If the provided cable gland is used, cables with circular cable cross-section must be used. The cable
gland's lock nuts must be tightened with a torque according to the following table.
Tightening torques for lock nut
Cable gland M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M32x1.5 M40x1.5
Tightening torque (Nm) 3.0 6.0 12.0 14.0
Pos : 90 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Kabelv ersc hraubung en_3 [EXN ] @ 64\m od_1611927350626_388.docx @ 2726170 @ @ 1

Use of reduction adapters according to Directive 2014/34/EU and/or cable glands with ignition protection
class Ex ec is permissible. For this, a minimum certified temperature of 80°C is necessary.
Pos : 91 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Kabelv ersc hraubung en_4 [EXE, EXN] @ 18\mod_1496915057687_388.docx @ 2353844 @ @ 1

When connecting, care must be taken that the permissible air gaps of at least 10 mm and the permissible
leakage tracks of at least12 mm between the electrically live components and components with the
same potential as the housing, or between live components are maintained.
Check that the terminal nuts and the screw for the earth lead are tight before closing the terminal box.
The terminal box seals and the seals of the cable glands must be correctly seated and must not be
damaged.

B 1091 en-2722 33
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions

Pos : 92 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Kl emmenk astendeck eldic htung [EXE, EXN, Zone21+22, Clas s I und II Div.2] @ 7\m od_1431427943472_388.doc x @ 218892 @ 3 @ 1

3.2.3 Terminal box cover seals

The terminal box cover gasket is captively mounted on the terminal box cover. Please only use an
original seal when replacing the seal.
If the terminal box is opened during installation, maintenance, repair, troubleshooting or overhaul, the
terminal box cover must be re-fitted after the work is complete. There must be no dirt on the surface of
the seal or the sealing surface of the terminal box frame.
The screws for the terminal box cover must be tightened with a torque according to the list below.
Tightening torques for terminal box cover screws
Thread diameter M4 M5 M6 M8
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.8 - 1.2 1.2 - 1.8 1.5 - 2.5 3.0 – 5.0
Pos : 93 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Motorlag e – Bes onderheiten [EXE, EXN , Z one21+ 22, Cl ass I Div.2] @ 78\mod_1629902592793_388.docx @ 2817521 @ 3 @ 1

3.2.4 Motor position – special features IM V3, IM V6

If the end of the shaft faces upwards, e.g. version IM V3, IM V6, a cover must be provided by the
operator / installer, which prevents foreign bodies from falling into the fan cover of the motor (see
EN IEC 60079-0:2018). This must not obstruct the fan from cooling the motor. If the end of the shaft
faces downwards (AS, inclination 20° to 90°), e.g. versions IM V1, IM V5, the motors are to be used with
a protective cover on the fan cover. For an inclination of less than 20°, an appropriate protective device,
which meets the above mentioned conditions, must be provided by the operator / installer.
A hand wheel on the second shaft end is not permitted.

34 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents

Pos : 94 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Weitere Betriebs bedi ngunge [EXE, EXN] @ 7\m od_1431428217184_388.docx @ 218956 @ 3 @ 1

3.2.5 Further operating conditions

The motors are designed for continuous operation and normal, non recurring starting, in which no
significant starting heat occurs.
Range A in EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530 Part 1) - Voltage ± 5%, Frequency ± 2%, curve form, mains
symmetry - must be complied with so that the development of heat remains within the permissible limits.
Any major deviations from the rated values can cause an impermissible increase in the development of
heat in the motor.
The motor temperature class stated on the type plate must at least conform to the temperature class of
any combustible gas that may occur.
Pos : 95 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Weitere Betriebs bedi ngunge [EXE, EXN]_02 @ 78\mod_1629902781905_388.docx @ 2817559 @ @ 1

When operated on a frequency inverter, damaging bearing currents must be ruled out. This could be
caused by excessively high shaft voltages.
If the effective value of the shaft voltage (RMS) exceeds 250 mV, permissible technical measures must
be taken. If necessary, please contact the NORD service. Please also pay attention to the relevant PTB
data sheets. In addition to further information, details on the permissible frequency characteristic curves
can be found here.
Pos : 96 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Sc hutz einric htung en_1 [EXN ] @ 7\mod_1431421520250_388.docx @ 218417 @ 3 @ 1

3.2.6 Protective devices

Protective devices must be adjusted to the rated current. For windings with a delta circuit, the triggers
are connected in series with the windings and adjusted to 0.58x the rated current.
Alternatively, the motors can be protected with thermistor temperature sensors. Protection with
thermistor temperature sensors is mandatory for inverter operation.
Do not apply voltages greater than 30 V to the thermistor temperature sensor.
We recommend the use of a functionally tested, certified PTC trigger device for protection with a
thermistor temperature sensor.
Pos : 97 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Sc hutz einric htung en_2 [EXE, EXN] @ 7\mod_1431421395276_388.docx @ 218385 @ @ 1

The following standards must be observed for the installation of electrical systems in explosion
hazard areas in Germany: DIN EN 60079-14 (VDE 0165-1), the Technical Rules for Operating
Safety (TRBS), the Operating Safety Regulations (BetrSichV), the Hazardous Substances
Regulation (GefStoffV) as well as the Explosion Protection Regulations (Ex-RL). Other
regulations must be observed if applicable. The applicable national regulation must be observed
outside of Germany.
Pos : 98 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Reparaturen [EXE, EXN] @ 7\m od_1431422270100_388.docx @ 218512 @ 3 @ 1

3.2.7 Repairs
Repairs must be carried out by Getriebebau NORD or by an officially recognised expert. The work must
be indicated with an additional repair plate. With the exception of standard, commercially available and
equivalent components, only original spare parts (see spare parts list) may be used. The particularly
applies for seals and connecting components.
For motors with closed condensation outlets, the threads of the closing screws must be coated with
Loctite 242 or Loxeal 82-21 after the condensation has been drained. The closing screws must be re-
inserted immediately. The electrical connections must be checked at regular intervals.
Check that the connection terminals, and the electrical bonding terminal are firmly fastened. Check that
the cable gland and the terminal box gasket are in good condition
All work on electrical machinery must be performed when the machine is at a standstill and with all poles
disconnected from the mains.
The motor must be removed for any measurement of the insulation resistance. The measurement must
not be performed in the explosion hazard area. As soon as measurement has been completed,

B 1091 en-2722 35
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
discharge the connecting terminals again immediately by shorting them in order to prevent any spark
discharges occurring in the explosive area.
Pos : 99 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/GEF AHR _AT EX - Is olationsm ess ung - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\mod_1460013200941_388.docx @ 316406 @ @ 1

DANGER! Explosion hazard

Insulation measurements may cause sparks and therefore ignition of an explosive
atmosphere.
• Only perform insulation measurements outside of an explosive atmosphere.
• Discharge the connection terminals by short circuiting them after the measurement and
before returning to an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 100 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Lackier ung [EXE, EXN, Z one21+ 22] @ 67\m od_1613486826666_388.docx @ 2738934 @ 3 @ 1

3.2.8 Painting
The motors are equipped with a suitable, electrostatically tested painting ex-works. Subsequent painting
may only be carried out in consultation with Getriebebau NORD or a repair workshop approved for the
repair of explosion-protected electric motors. The valid standards and regulations must be observed.
Pos : 101 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 1\mod_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

36 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 102 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/T ypenschil d N ORD Ex ec- Motor en nac h EN 60079 [EXN] @ 72\m od_1619625291614_388.doc x @ 2772388 @ 3 @ 1

3.2.9 Type plate for NORD Ex ec motors according to EN IEC 60079-0:2018

1 Data matrix code

3 Number of phases
4 Type designation
5 Order number/motor number
6 Year of manufacture
7 Thermal class of insulation system
8 IP protection class
9 Operating mode
10 Standard specifications
11 Nominal frequency
12 Nominal voltage
13 Permissible voltage range
15 Power factor
16 Speed
17 Explosion protection marking
18 Locked-rotor current/nominal current

21 Notice! Pay attention to operating instructions

B1091.
22 Nominal power (mechanical shaft power)
23 Nominal current
24 Individual serial number
25 Efficiency

Pos : 103 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/T ypenschil d N ORD Ex_- M otoren_Ergänz ung [EXE, EXN, EX - FU- Betrieb EX tb, tc ] @ 11\m od_1460031690739_388.docx @ 316441 @ @ 1

Before commissioning, the type plate must be compared with the requirements of the aforementioned
declaration, which result from the local regulations and operating conditions.
Pos : 104 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/T ypenschil d N ORD Ex_- M otoren - Erklär ung der Norm enangabe [EXE, EXN ] @ 7\mod_1431426076094_388.docx @ 218829 @ 5 @ 1

Explanation of standard specification in rating plate

EN 60034 (H), (A)/ EN 60079

Used range of standards for explosion protection
(Please pay attention to conformity declaration.)
Voltage range A in accordance with EN 60034-1
Half key balancing in accordance with EN 60034-14
Product standard

Pos : 105 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Ang ewandte N ormenstände [EXE, EXN] @ 72\mod_1619624161278_388.docx @ 2772313 @ 3 @ 1

3.2.10 Applied standard versions

EN standard Edition IEC standard Edition
EN 60034-7 2001-12 IEC 60034-7 1992+ A1:2000
EN 60034-6 1996-08 IEC 60034-6 1991-09
EN 60079-0 2018 IEC 60079-0 2017
EN 60079-7/A1 2015 /A1: 2018 IEC 60079-7/A1 2015/ 2017
EN 60529 2014-09 IEC 60529 1989/AMD2:2013/COR1:2019
Pos : 106 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 1\mod_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

B 1091 en-2722 37
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Pos : 107 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Motor en für den Eins atz in der Z one 21 und Z one 22 nac h EN 60079- 0 s owie IEC 60079_01 [Zon21+ 22] @ 67\m od_1613485501018_388.docx @ 2738783 @ 2 @ 1

3.3 Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22 according to EN 60079 and
IEC 60079
Pos : 108 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/Sicherheits hinw eis e/GEF AHR_ATEX - Ex plosi onsgefahr El ektisc her Schl ag - Motor en [B1091] @ 11\m od_1460010132024_388.doc x @ 316266 @ @ 1

DANGER! Explosion hazard

All work must only be carried out with the machine at a standstill and the power to the system
switched off.
Higher temperatures than the maximum permitted surface temperature of the housing may
be present inside the motor. The motor must therefore never be opened in an explosive
atmosphere!
Failure to comply with this may result in the ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 109 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/Sicherheits hinw eis e/WARNUN G_AT EX_Expl osionsg efahr-Thermisc h - M otor en [B1091] @ 11\m od_1460010112266_388.docx @ 316231 @ @ 1

WARNING Explosion hazard

Excessively heavy dust deposits must be avoided, as these impair the cooling of the device!
Impairment or obstruction of the flow of cooling air, for example due to partial or large area
coverage of the fan cover or the entry of foreign bodies fall into the fan must be avoided in
order to ensure adequate cooling.
Only cable glands and reducers which are approved for use in explosion hazard areas may
be used.
All cable glands which are not used must be closed with blind screw plugs which are approved
for potentially explosive areas.
Only the original seals may be used.
Failure to comply increases the risk of ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 110 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Motor en für den Eins atz in der Z one 21 und Z one 22 nac h EN 60079- 0 s owie IEC 60079_02 [Zon21+ 22] @ 83\m od_1638957466222_388.docx @ 2849978 @ @ 1

For these motors, the following information specifically or complimentarily apply.

Motors which comply with EN 60079 and IEC 60079 are suitable according to their labelling for use in
zone 21 or zone 22 - non-conductive dust.

Type suffix:
According to Zone 21 2D e.g.: 80 L/4 2D TF
EN 60079
Zone 22 3D e.g.: 80 L/4 3D TF
According to Zone 21 EPL Db e.g.: 80 L/4 IDB TF
IEC 60079
Zone 22 EPL Dc e.g.: 80 L/4 IDC TF

Labelling:
According to II 2D Ex tb IIIC T125°C Db For category 2 (zone 21)1)
IEC 60079 and
2014/34 EU 0102
II 3D Ex tc IIIB T125°C Dc For category 3 (zone 22 –
non-conducting dust)1)

According to EX tb IIIC T125°C Db For category 2 1)

IEC 60079
Ex tc IIIB T125°C Dc For category 3 (zone 22 –
non-conducting dust)1)
1) The indicated surface temperature may deviate from 125 °C and can be found on the name plate.

38 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents

NOTICE
Motor attachments
Explosion-protected electric motors are often delivered with attached components and devices, such
as a gear unit or a brake.
• In addition to the labelling of the motor, observe any labelling on the attached components and
devices. Consider any resulting restrictions for the entire drive.

DANGER Explosion hazard

The increased danger in areas with flammable dust requires the strict consideration of the
general safety and commissioning information. Explosive concentrations of dust may cause
explosions if ignited by hot or sparking objects. Such explosions may cause serious or fatal
injuries to persons or severe material damage.
It is essential that the persons responsible are qualified according to the national and local
regulations.
Pos : 111 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Inbetriebnahmehinw eis e / Anwendungsbereic h [Zone 21+ 22] @ 66\m od_1613047574635_388.docx @ 2735003 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.1 Commissioning information / Application area

If the motors are to be suitable for inverter operation, this must be indicated when placing the order. The
additional operating instructions B1091-1 must be observed. The motors must be protected against
overheating with suitable monitoring devices! The dust deposit must not be thicker than 5 mm. The
motors are designed for voltage and frequency range B of EN 60034, part 1.
Exception: The motors of sizes 132MA/4 2D, 132MA/4 3D, 132LH/4 2D and 132LH/4 3D correspond to
voltage and frequency range A.
Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22 with TF labelling may be thermally monitored – as sole protection
– via the installed PTC in combination with a suitable triggering device.
Electrical equipment for use in areas with flammable dust comply with the DIN EN 60079-0, IEC 60079-
0, EN 60079-31, IEC 60079-31, DIN EN 60034 and IEC 60034 standards.
The standard’s valid version can be found in the EU Declaration of Conformity or in the IECEx CoC. The
degree of explosion hazards determines zone division. The operator/employer is responsible for zone
division (in Europe: RL 1999/92/EC).
If an X has been added to the certificate, special requirements must be observed in the EU type-
examination certificate, the IECEX CoC and/or the documentation to be considered. It is prohibited to
use standard motors that are not certified for explosion hazard areas in explosion hazard areas.

B 1091 en-2722 39
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions

Pos : 112 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Klemm enkas tendec kel dichtung [EXE, EXN, Z one21+22, Cl ass I und II Div .2] @ 7\mod_1431427943472_388.docx @ 218892 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.2 Terminal box cover seals

The terminal box cover gasket is captively mounted on the terminal box cover. Please only use an
original seal when replacing the seal.
If the terminal box is opened during installation, maintenance, repair, troubleshooting or overhaul, the
terminal box cover must be re-fitted after the work is complete. There must be no dirt on the surface of
the seal or the sealing surface of the terminal box frame.
The screws for the terminal box cover must be tightened with a torque according to the list below.
Tightening torques for terminal box cover screws
Thread diameter M4 M5 M6 M8
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.8 - 1.2 1.2 - 1.8 1.5 - 2.5 3.0 – 5.0
Pos : 113 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Elektrischer Anschl uss [Zone21+ 22 + Clas s I und II Div.2] @ 7\m od_1431433133025_388.doc x @ 219085 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.3 Electrical Connection

The electrical connections of the terminal board are protected against twisting. The voltage supply to
the terminal board must be made by means of suitable ring terminals. The ring terminals are installed
between the two brass washers below the lock washer. The nuts must be tightened with a torque
according to the table below. The contact pressure is permanently maintained by means of the specified
torque and the lock washer. In addition, twisting of the ring terminals of the voltage supply is prevented.
The connection elements are corrosion-proof.
Tightening torques for terminal board connections
Thread diameter M4 M5 M6 M8
Tightening torque (Nm) 0,8 - 1,2 1,8 - 2,5 2,7 - 4,0 5,5 - 8,0

Exploded diagram of electrical connection

Cable lug provided by Brass nut

customer Lock washer
Brass washer

Brass nut

Ring terminal

Brass thread with collar

Mechanical protection against twisting

40 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 114 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Kabel- und Leitungsei nführ ungen [Zone21+22] @ 67\m od_1613486509122_388.docx @ 2738858 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.4 Cable glands

Cable glands must be approved for explosion hazard areas of Zone 21 (protection class: at least IP66)
and be secured against self-loosening. Unused openings must be sealed with approved plugs
(protection class: at least IP66).
For Zone 22, cable glands according to EN 60079-0 and IEC 60079-0 must comply with at least one
protection class that is indicated on the name plate. Unused openings must be sealed with blind plugs
that comply with at least the motor protection class as well as with the requirements according to
EN 60079-0 and IEC 60079-0. The cable and blind plugs must be suitable for temperatures of at least
80°C.
In order to connect cables or carry out other works, the motor must not be opened in explosive
atmospheres. The voltage must always be switched off and secured against switch-on before opening.
The motors are equipped with threads for cable glands according to the following overview.
Assignment of cable gland to motor size
Standard motor cable glands Braking motor cable glands
Type Quantity Threads Quantity Threads Quantity Threads Quantity Threads Quantity Threads Quantity Threads
63 2 M20x1.5 4 M20x1.5 2 M12x1.5
71 2 M20x1.5 4 M20x1.5 2 M12x1.5
80 2 M25x1.5 4 M25x1.5 2 M12x1.5
90 2 M25x1.5 4 M25x1.5 2 M12x1.5
100 2 M32x1.5 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5
112 2 M32x1.5 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5
132 2 M32x1.5 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
160/ 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
180/..X
180/ 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
200/..X
225 2 M50x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 2 M50x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
250 WP 2 M63x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 2 M63x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5

If the motor is supplied with a certified cable

gland, the cable gland's lock nuts must be
tightened with a torque according to the
following table.
Cable entry

Tightening torques for lock nut

Cable gland M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M32x1.5 M40x1.5 M50x1.5 M63x1.5
Tightening torque (Nm) 3.0 6.0 12.0 14.0 20.0 25.0

Pos : 115 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Z ul ässiger Umgebungstem per aturbereic h [Z one21+22] @ 67\mod_1613486622150_388.docx @ 2738896 @ 3 @ 1

B 1091 en-2722 41
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
3.3.5 Permissible ambient temperature range
For all motors, the permissible ambient temperature range is -20°C...+40°C. For IE1/IE2 motors for
operation in Zones 21 and 22, an extended ambient temperature range from -20°C...+60°C is
permissible. In this case, the rated power must be reduced to 72% of the value stated in the catalogue.
If the maximum ambient temperature is between +40°C and +60°C, the power output should be inversely
linearly interpolated between 100% and 72%. Thermal motor protection by PTC resistor temperature
sensors is mandatory. The motor connection cables and the cable glands must be suitable for
temperatures of at least 80°C.
The extended ambient temperature range does not apply for optional attachments such as a brake, an
encoder and/or an external fan. Contact the manufacturer in case of doubt with regard to permissibility!
Pos : 116 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Lackier ung [EXE, EXN, Z one21+ 22] @ 67\m od_1613486826666_388.docx @ 2738934 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.6 Painting
The motors are equipped with a suitable, electrostatically tested painting ex-works. Subsequent painting
may only be carried out in consultation with Getriebebau NORD or a repair workshop approved for the
repair of explosion-protected electric motors. The valid standards and regulations must be observed.
Pos : 117 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/IEC- B14-Motor en [Z one21+ 22, Clas s II Div.2] @ 7\m od_1431436005842_388.docx @ 219211 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.7 IEC-B14 motors

Please comply with the information in Section 1.3.2. Otherwise, explosion protection is not ensured.
Pos : 118 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/M otorlage – Bes onderheiten [EXE, EXN, Zone21+22, Clas s I Div.2] @ 78\mod_1629902592793_388.docx @ 2817521 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.8 Motor position – special features IM V3, IM V6

If the end of the shaft faces upwards, e.g. version IM V3, IM V6, a cover must be provided by the
operator / installer, which prevents foreign bodies from falling into the fan cover of the motor (see
EN IEC 60079-0:2018). This must not obstruct the fan from cooling the motor. If the end of the shaft
faces downwards (AS, inclination 20° to 90°), e.g. versions IM V1, IM V5, the motors are to be used with
a protective cover on the fan cover. For an inclination of less than 20°, an appropriate protective device,
which meets the above mentioned conditions, must be provided by the operator / installer.
A hand wheel on the second shaft end is not permitted.

42 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents

Pos : 119 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/W eitere Betriebs beding unge [Z one21 +22] @ 67\mod_1613486927413_388.docx @ 2738972 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.9 Further operating conditions

If nothing is stated to the contrary regarding operating mode and tolerances, electrical machines are
designed for continuous operation and normal infrequent starts, where there is no significant start-up
warming. The motors must only be used for the operating mode indicated on the rating plate.
The installation regulations must be observed!
Pos : 120 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Aufbau und Arbeitsw eise [Z one21+ 22] @ 67\mod_1613487005012_388.docx @ 2739010 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.10 Design and operating principle

The motors are self-cooled. Radial shaft seals are used on the drive side (AS) as well as on the
ventilation side (BS). Motors for Zones 21 and 22 have a metal fan. Motors with brakes intended for
Zone 22 (Category 3D, non-conducting dust) have a special plastic fan. The motors have been designed
with protection class IP55, optionally with protection class IP66 (Zone 22 - non-conducting dust, EPL
Dc) or IP66 (Zone 21, EPL Db). The surface temperature does not exceed the surface temperature
indicated on the name plate. The prerequisite is the consideration of the operating instructions.
Pos : 121 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Mi ndestq uersc hnitte v on Schutzl eitern [Zone21+ 22, Clas s II] @ 7\m od_1431436347149_388.docx @ 219273 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.11 Minimum cross section of bonding conductors

Cross section of the phase conductor Minimum cross section of the associated
of the installation S [mm2] protective conductor SP [mm2]
S ≤ 16 S
16 < S ≤ 35 16
S > 35 0.5 S

B 1091 en-2722 43
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions

Pos : 122 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Ins tandhaltung [Zone21+22, Class II] @ 67\m od_1613487261161_388.docx @ 2739048 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.12 Maintenance
The voltage must always be switched off and secured against switch-on before opening.
Notice! Temperatures may occur within the motor that are higher than the maximum permissible
surface temperature of the housing. The motor must therefore not be opened in an explosive
dust atmosphere. The motors must be checked and tested for functional safety on a regular
basis. The valid national standards and regulations must be observed.
Impermissibly high dust deposits > 5 mm are to be avoided. The motor must not be further operated if
functional safety is not guaranteed. Upon replacement of the ball bearings, the radial shaft seals must
also be replaced. Please use the radial shaft seals prescribed by Getriebebau NORD. It is essential to
pay attention to professional installation. The radial shaft seal’s outer ring and sealing lip must be
lubricated. If an explosion-protected gear unit is flanged to the motor in a dust-proof manner, a NBR
radial shaft seal may be used on the motor’s A side if the gear oil temperature does not exceed 85°C.
Only original parts may be used as spare parts, except for standardised, customary and equivalent
parts. This is particularly valid for seals and connection parts. In case of terminal box parts or spare
parts for outer earthing, the parts must be ordered according to the spare parts list of the operating
instructions.
Seals, radial shaft seals and cable glands must be checked for functionality on a regular basis.
The maintenance of the motor’s dust protection is of outstanding importance for explosion
protection. Maintenance must be carried out by qualified personnel in a specialist workshop with
appropriate equipment. We urgently recommend that the general overhaul is carried out by the NORD
Service department.

44 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 123 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Opti onen für M otoren für den Eins atz in Zone 22 [Z one22] @ 7\m od_1431437187222_388.docx @ 219335 @ 2 @ 1

3.4 Options for motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22

Pos : 124 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/Sicherheits hinw eis e/GEF AHR_ATEX - Ex plosi onsgefahr El ektisc her Schl ag - Motor en [B1091] @ 11\m od_1460010132024_388.doc x @ 316266 @ @ 1

DANGER! Explosion hazard

All work must only be carried out with the machine at a standstill and the power to the system
switched off.
Higher temperatures than the maximum permitted surface temperature of the housing may
be present inside the motor. The motor must therefore never be opened in an explosive
atmosphere!
Failure to comply with this may result in the ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 125 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/Sicherheits hinw eis e/WARNUN G_AT EX_Expl osionsg efahr-Thermisc h - M otor en [B1091] @ 11\m od_1460010112266_388.docx @ 316231 @ @ 1

WARNING Explosion hazard

Excessively heavy dust deposits must be avoided, as these impair the cooling of the device!
Impairment or obstruction of the flow of cooling air, for example due to partial or large area
coverage of the fan cover or the entry of foreign bodies fall into the fan must be avoided in
order to ensure adequate cooling.
Only cable glands and reducers which are approved for use in explosion hazard areas may
be used.
All cable glands which are not used must be closed with blind screw plugs which are approved
for potentially explosive areas.
Only the original seals may be used.
Failure to comply increases the risk of ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 126 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Betrieb am Freq uenz umrichter [Zone22] @ 67\mod_1613487358920_388.docx @ 2739086 @ 3 @ 1

3.4.1 Operation with frequency inverters

ATEX NORD motors with ignition protection classes tb and tc are suitable by their insulation system
design for operation with the frequency inverter. The variable speed range requires temperature
monitoring using PTC resistors. For safe planning and application, the planning guideline for operating
and installation instructions B1091-1 must be observed. The planning guideline provides information on
the necessary prerequisites with inverter operation and on the approved speed ranges. Option Z (Heavy
fan, cast-iron fan) is not permitted for inverter operation.
If the frequency inverter is not approved for operation within the specified explosion hazard zone, the
frequency inverter is to be installed outside the explosion hazard area.

B 1091 en-2722 45
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Pos : 127 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Fr emdl üfter [Zone22] @ 67\mod_1613487555362_388.docx @ 2739124 @ 3 @ 1

3.4.2 External fan

Motors having the additional labelling F (e.g. 80LP/4 3D TF F) are equipped with an external fan and
have to be monitored via the installed temperature sensor.

WARNING Explosion hazard

The motor may only be commissioned together with the external fan. A failure of the external
fan may lead to overheating of the motor and thus to material damage and/or personal injury
or even the ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
Observe the operating instructions of the external fan!

The external fan is separately supplied with voltage via the external fan’s terminal box. The external
fan’s supply voltage must match the voltage information indicated on the name plate. Suitable monitoring
devices shall protect the external fan against overheating. The IP protection classes of the external fan
and the motor may deviate. The lower IP protection class applies to the drive unit. The cable glands
must at least match the protection class indicated on the name plate. Unused openings must be sealed
with blind plugs that comply with at least the motor protection class.
External fans and motors for use in explosion hazard areas have Ex labelling according to
RL 2014/34/EU. The label must be available on the external fan and on the motor. If the labels deviate
between external fan and motor, the lower labelled explosion protection applies to the entire drive. If the
surface temperature is indicated, the indicated maximum temperature of the individual component
applies to the entire drive unit. In this context, any existing gear unit must be observed. Please contact
Getriebebau NORD in case of uncertainties. If any one component of the entire drive has no Ex labelling,
the entire drive must not be commissioned in explosion hazard areas.
Pos : 128 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 1\mod_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

46 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 129 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Zw eiter T emperaturfühler @ 10\mod_1455525855678_388.docx @ 299648 @ 3 @ 1

3.4.3 Second temperature sensor 2TF

Category 3D motors (Zone 22, non-conducting dust) can be supplied with a second temperature sensor
(2TF). This option can be used to implement a warning signal (overheating in the winding). It should be
noted that the temperature sensor with the lower trigger temperature should be used for the warning;
the temperature sensor with the higher trigger temperature must be used to evaluate the switch-off
signal.
Pos : 130 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/R ückl aufs perre [Z one22] @ 67\m od_1613487660022_388.docx @ 2739162 @ 3 @ 1

3.4.4 Back stop

Motors having the additional labelling RLS (e.g. 80LP/4 3D RLS) are equipped with a back stop. For
motors with back stop, the direction of rotation is marked by an arrow on the fan cover. The arrow head
points to the drive shaft’s direction of rotation (AS). When connecting the motor and during motor control,
it must be ensured – for example by testing the field of rotation – that the motor can only operate in the
direction of rotation. Switching the motor into the blocked direction of rotation, i.e. the wrong direction of
rotation, may cause damage.
Back stops work from a speed of approx. 800 min-1 without wear. To avoid impermissible heating and
faster wear of the back stop, back stops must not be operated with a speed below 800 min-1. This must
be observed for motors having a frequency of 50 Hz and a pole number of ≥ 8 as well as for motors
used with a frequency inverter.
Pos : 131 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Brems e [Zone22] @ 67\mod_1613487746071_388.docx @ 2739200 @ 3 @ 1

3.4.5 Brake
Motors having the additional labelling BRE (e.g. 80LP/4 3D BRE 10) are equipped with a brake and
have to be monitored via the installed temperature sensors. The triggering of the temperature sensor of
one of the components (motor or brake) must lead to safe shut-down of the entire drive. The PTC
resistors of motor and brake must be connected in series.
If the motor is operated via a frequency inverter, an external fan must be used in the case of stator
supply frequencies below 25 Hz. Operation without an external fan in case of stator supply frequencies
below 25 Hz is not permitted.
The brake may be used as a holding brake with up to 4 switching cycles per hour.
An optional manual brake release (with lockable manual release lever, where required) must only be
used if there is no explosive dust atmosphere.
NOTICE! Also observe the operating instructions of the brake!
The DC voltage supply of the brake is realised via a rectifier in the motor terminal box or via direct supply
with DC voltage. The brake voltage indicated on the name plate must be complied with.
The power supply lines and the temperature sensor line must not be installed together in one cable.
Check the brake’s functionality before commissioning. There must be no grinding noises as
impermissible heating may occur.

B 1091 en-2722 47
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions

Pos : 132 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Inkr ementalgeber @ 83\mod_1638950032642_388.docx @ 2849940 @ 3 @ 1

3.4.6 Incremental encoder

Motors with the additional labelling IG or IGK (e.g. 80LP/4 3D IG F) are equipped with an incremental
encoder, which is suitable for ignition protection Ex tc. This option is always delivered with an external
fan, which is also suitable for ignition protection Ex tc. Operation of the motor is only permissible if the
external fan is connected.

NOTICE
Malfunction of the drive during operation with connected incremental encoder
If the motor is operated with a connected incremental encoder, there is a risk of a motor malfunction
due to faulty connection and impermissible operating conditions of the incremental encoder.
Therefore, it is mandatory to note before commissioning
• the operating instructions of the incremental encoder with the corresponding installation and
maintenance regulations,
• the maximum permissible speed of the incremental encoder,
• the information label attached to the incremental encoder,
• the superordinate motor name plate and possibly the restricting information.

If the operating instructions are not available, contact the Getriebebau NORD service department.
Pos : 133 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Ü bersicht Br ems anbau N ORD ATEX- M otoren nac h 94/9 EG @ 67\mod_1613488057199_388.docx @ 2739238 @ 3 @ 1

3.4.7 Overview of brake attachment for NORD ATEX motors

Permissible brake sizes for Category 3D motors

Size LKZ Braking torques [Nm]

63 S, L, SP, LP 5
71 S, L, SP, LP 5
80 S, SH, SP 5 10
80 L, LH, LP 5 10
90 S, SH, SP 10 20
90 L, LH, SP 10 20
100 L, LH, LP 20 40
100 LA, AH, AP 20 40
112 M, SH, MH, 20 40
MP
132 S, SH, SP 60
132 M, MH, MP 60
132 MA 60
160 MH, MP 100 150 250
160 LH, LP 100 150 250
180 MH, MP 250
180 LH, LP 250
200 XH 250
225 SP, MP 400
250 WP 400

Pos : 134 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 1\mod_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

48 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 135 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/T ypenschil d N ORD Ex- Motor Ex tb- Ex tc @ 66\m od_1613047975062_388.docx @ 2735041 @ 3 @ 1

3.4.8 Name plate of motors (Ex tb, Ex tc) according to EN 60079 for FI operation
1 Data matrix code
2 Code number of notified body (only for Ex tb)
3 Number of phases
4 Type designation
5 Order number/motor number
6 Year of manufacture
7 Thermal class of insulation system
8 IP protection class
9 Operating mode
10 Standard specifications
11 Stator frequency
12 Stator voltage
14 EU type-examination certificate number
15 Power factor
16 Speed
17 Explosion protection marking
Notice! Pay attention to operating instructions
21
B1091.
Name plate example Ex tb
22 Nominal power (mechanical shaft power)
23 Nominal current in operating point
24 Individual serial number
25 Efficiency
26 Weight

27 Information on brake (option with Ex tc only)

28 Note: Supply by frequency inverter

29 Maximum permitted stator frequency

30 Minimum pulse frequency of frequency inverter

31 Modulation procedure of frequency inverter

32 Data field for operation with frequency inverters

33 Data field for mains operation

34 Nominal torque on the motor shaft

Pos : 136 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/T ypenschil d N ORD Ex_- M otoren_Ergänz ung [EXE, EXN, EX - FU- Betrieb EX tb, tc ] @ 11\m od_1460031690739_388.docx @ 316441 @ @ 1

Before commissioning, the type plate must be compared with the requirements of the aforementioned
declaration, which result from the local regulations and operating conditions.
Pos : 137 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 1\mod_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

B 1091 en-2722 49
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Pos : 138 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Expl osionsgeschützte Motor en gem äß T P TC 012/2011 für die Eurasis che Wirtsc hafts union_01 @ 67\m od_1613654279423_388.docx @ 2739989 @ 2 @ 1

3.5 Motors according to TP TC012/2011 for the Eurasian Economic Union

Pos : 139 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Expl osionsgeschützte Motor en gem äß T P TC 012/2011 für die Eurasis che Wirtsc hafts union_02 @ 23\m od_1532954671989_388.docx @ 2434724 @ @ 1

In addition to the information which is stated in the operating and maintenance instruction B1091, the
following information must be noted for EAC EX motors. If the motor is supplied with further components
or devices, the associated operating and maintenance instructions must also be observed.
Pos : 140 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/T ypenschil der/ Kennz eic hnung EAC Ex @ 23\m od_1532955209849_388.docx @ 2434761 @ 3 @ 1

3.5.1 Type plates / Labelling

Motors with the labelling listed below have EAC Ex approval according to TP TC 012/2011 for the
Eurasian Economic Union.
These motors have two type plates. One type plate complies with ATEX Directive 2014/34 EU and the
relevant standards from the standard series EN 60079; the second type plate contains the additional
specifications according to Directive TP TC 012/2011.

The motors may only be operated in areas in which the ignition protection type stated on the motor type
plate is permissible. In addition, compliance with the temperature class and the maximum surface
temperature as stated on the type plate is mandatory.
Pos : 141 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 1\mod_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

50 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 142 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/N ormen ( EAC EX) @ 23\m od_1532955681176_388.doc x @ 2434798 @ 3 @ 1

3.5.2 Standards
ГОСТ Standard IEC Standard
ГОСТ 31610.0-2014 IEC 60079-0:2011
ГОСТ Р МЭК 60079-31-2013 IEC 60079-31:2013
ГОСТ Р МЭК 60079-7-2012 IEC 60079-7:2006
ГОСТ 31610.15-2014 IEC 60079-15:2010

Pos : 143 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Lebensdauer @ 23\mod_1532956394784_388.docx @ 2434835 @ 3 @ 1

3.5.3 Service life

In addition to the service intervals which are stated in the operating and maintenance instructions, it
should be noted that the use of motors which are more than 30 years old is not permitted.
The year of manufacture of the motor is stated on the type plate.

WARNING Danger to persons

The motors must be disconnected from the mains before opening the terminal box.

WARNING Explosion hazard

Opening the terminal box in an explosive atmosphere is prohibited.

Pos : 144 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Besonder e Betri ebsbedi ngungen (X- Kennzeic hnung) @ 67\m od_1613488202245_388.doc x @ 2739276 @ 35 @ 1

3.5.4 Special operating conditions (X-labelling)

Permissible ambient temperature range
For all motors with ignition protection type tb or tc, the permissible ambient temperature range is
-20°C...+40°C. For IE1/IE2 motors for operation in Zones 21 and 22, an extended ambient temperature
range from -20°C...+60°C is permissible. In this case, the rated power must be reduced to 72 % of the
value stated in the catalogue.
If the maximum ambient temperature is between +40°C and +60°C, the power output should be inversely
linearly interpolated between 100 % and 72 %. Thermal motor protection by PTC resistor temperature
sensors is mandatory. The motor connection cables and the cable glands must be suitable for
temperatures of at least 80°C.
The extended ambient temperature range does not apply for optional attachments such as a brake, an
encoder and/or an external fan. Contact the manufacturer in case of doubt with regard to permissibility!
Pos : 145 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 1\mod_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

B 1091 en-2722 51
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Pos : 146 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Expl osionsgeschützte El ektr omotor en gemäß GB12476.1 2013 s owi e GB12476.5 2013 für die VRC hina_01 @ 67\mod_1613654637015_388.docx @ 2740027 @ 2 @ 1

3.6 Motors according to GB 12476.1-2013 / GB 12476.5-2013 for the People's

Republic of China
Pos : 147 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Expl osionsgeschützte El ektr omotor en gemäß GB12476.1 2013 s owi e GB12476.5 2013 für die VRC hina_02 @ 51\mod_1601386630821_388.docx @ 2675028 @ @ 1

In addition to the information which is stated in the operating and maintenance instructions B1091 and
B1091-1, the following information must be noted for the C2D and C3D versions of explosion-protected
NORD electric motors.
If the motor is supplied with further components or devices, the associated operating and maintenance
instructions must also be observed.
Pos : 148 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/T ypenschil der/ Kennz eic hnung CCC EX (C hina) @ 51\m od_1601387433200_388.docx @ 2675065 @ 3 @ 1

3.6.1 Type plates / Labelling

Motors with CC Ex approval are certified according to the Chinese standards GB12476.1-2013 and
GB12476.5-2013 The motors have two name plates and are labelled according to the Chinese and
European standards.

Motor type Labelling according to GB standard Labelling according to ATEX

C2D Ex tD A21 IP6X T***°C Ex II 2D Ex tb IIIC T ***°C Db
C3D Ex tD A22 IP5X T***°C Ex II 3D Ex tc IIIB T ***°C Dc

Name plate examples for the labelling of NORD CCCEx motors according to the Chinese standard.

Name plate example C2D Name plate example C3D

Pos : 149 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 1\mod_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

52 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 150 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/N ormen (CCC EX - C hina) @ 51\m od_1601388865096_388.docx @ 2675177 @ 3 @ 1

3.6.2 Standards to be observed during operation and maintenance

WARNING Danger to persons

The motors must be disconnected from the mains before opening the terminal box.

WARNING Explosion hazard

Opening the terminal box in an explosive atmosphere is prohibited.

Installation, use, parametrisation and maintenance of explosion-protected NORD CCCEx motors must
be performed by the operator in accordance with the operating and maintenance instructions B1091 and
B1091-1 and in accordance with the following Chinese standards.
• GB 3836.13-2013 Explosive atmosphere - Part 13: Repair, overhaul, maintenance and changes of
equipment
(GB 3836.13-2013 爆炸性环境第 13 部分：设备的修理、检修、修复和改造)

• GB/T 3836.15-2017 Explosive atmosphere - Part 15: Design, selection and installation of electrical
devices

(GB/T 3836.15-2017 爆炸性环境第 15 部分：电气装置的设计、选型和安装)

• GB/T 3836.16-2017 Explosive atmosphere - Part 16: Inspection and maintenance of electrical
devices
(GB/T 3836.16-2017 爆炸性环境第 16 部分：电气装置的检查与维护)

• GB 50257-2014 Design specifications and acceptance of electrical installations for explosion hazard
and flammable environments.

(GB 50257-2014 电气装置安装工程爆炸和火灾危险环境电气装置施工及验收规范)

• GB 15577-2018 Safety regulations for dust explosion protection

(GB 15577-2018 粉尘防爆安全规程)

Pos : 151 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 1\mod_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

B 1091 en-2722 53
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Pos : 152 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Expl osionsgeschützte El ektr omotor en gemäß Class I Div.2_01 @ 72\m od_1619777126761_388.docx @ 2773722 @ 2 @ 1

3.7 Explosion-protected electric motors according to Class I Div.2

Pos : 153 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/Sicherheits hinw eis e/GEF AHR_ATEX - Ex plosi onsgefahr El ektisc her Schl ag - Motor en [B1091] @ 11\m od_1460010132024_388.doc x @ 316266 @ @ 1

DANGER! Explosion hazard

All work must only be carried out with the machine at a standstill and the power to the system
switched off.
Higher temperatures than the maximum permitted surface temperature of the housing may
be present inside the motor. The motor must therefore never be opened in an explosive
atmosphere!
Failure to comply with this may result in the ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 154 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/Sicherheits hinw eis e/WARNUN G_AT EX_Expl osionsg efahr-Thermisc h - M otor en [B1091] @ 11\m od_1460010112266_388.docx @ 316231 @ @ 1

WARNING Explosion hazard

Excessively heavy dust deposits must be avoided, as these impair the cooling of the device!
Impairment or obstruction of the flow of cooling air, for example due to partial or large area
coverage of the fan cover or the entry of foreign bodies fall into the fan must be avoided in
order to ensure adequate cooling.
Only cable glands and reducers which are approved for use in explosion hazard areas may
be used.
All cable glands which are not used must be closed with blind screw plugs which are approved
for potentially explosive areas.
Only the original seals may be used.
Failure to comply increases the risk of ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 155 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/W eitere Sic her heitsinformationen_01 [Class I und Class II] @ 73\m od_1620287106819_388.docx @ 2776560 @ 5 @ 1

Further safety information

Pos : 156 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/W eitere Sic her heitsinformationen_02 [Class I und Class II] @ 73\m od_1620287796525_0.doc x @ 2776678 @ @ 1

“THIS EQUIPMENT IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I DIVISION 2 GROUPS A,B,C,D/CLASS II

DIVISION 2 GROUPS F & G”

WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
DO NOT DISCONNEC T EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED
OFF OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS

AVERTISSEMENT
RISQUE D'EXPLOSION
AVANT DE DECONNECTER L'EQUIPEMENT, COUPER LE COURANT OU
S'ASSURER QUE L'EMPLACEMENT EST DESIGNE 'NON DANGEREUX

WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I
DIV.2/CLASS II DIV.2

54 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents

AVERTISSEMENT
RISQUE D'EXPLOSION
LA SUBSTITUTION DE COMPOSANTS PEUT RENDRE CE MATERIEL
INACCEPTABLE POUR LES EMPLACEMENTS DE CLASSE I DIVISION 2/ CLASSE
II DIVISION 2
Pos : 157 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Expl osionsgeschützte El ektr omotor en gemäß Class I Div.2_02 @ 72\m od_1619776292502_388.docx @ 2773645 @ @ 1

For these motors, the following information specifically or complimentarily apply.

The motors are suitable for use in Class I Div.2 and may be used at an ambient temperature from -20 °C
to +40 °C.

Type suffix: ID2 e.g.: 80 LP/4 ID2 CUS TF

Labelling: Class I Div.2 Group A,
B, C, D with details of
the temperature class

Explosive gas mixtures may cause severe or fatal injuries in combination with hot, electrically live and
moving components of electrical machines.

The increased danger in explosion hazard areas requires especially strict observance of the general
safety and commissioning information. It is necessary that the persons responsible are qualified
according to national and local regulations.
These explosion-protected electrical machines comply with the standards CSA C.22.2 No. 100-14, CSA
C22.2 No. 213-M1987 (R2013), UL Subject 1836, UL 1004-1.
The degree of explosion hazards determines the zone classification. The operator is responsible for the
classification of the zones. The use of motors which are not certified for explosion hazard areas is
prohibited in explosion hazard areas.
Pos : 158 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Kabelvers chr aubungen_1 [EXN, Clas s I und II Div.2] @ 7\m od_1431424754843_388.doc x @ 218766 @ 3 @ 1

3.7.1 Cable connections

Pos : 159 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Kabelvers chr aubungen_2 [Class I Div2] @ 72\m od_1620045496645_388.docx @ 2774030 @ @ 1

Cable glands must be certified and suitable for Class I Div 2. explosion hazard areas. Unused openings
must be sealed with approved blind plugs.
For sizes 63 to 132, an isolated cable lug must be provided, if it is used to connect the earthing cable
within the terminal box.
Pos : 160 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Klemm enkas tendec kel dichtung [EXE, EXN, Z one21+22, Cl ass I und II Div .2] @ 7\mod_1431427943472_388.docx @ 218892 @ 3 @ 1

3.7.2 Terminal box cover seals

The terminal box cover gasket is captively mounted on the terminal box cover. Please only use an
original seal when replacing the seal.
If the terminal box is opened during installation, maintenance, repair, troubleshooting or overhaul, the
terminal box cover must be re-fitted after the work is complete. There must be no dirt on the surface of
the seal or the sealing surface of the terminal box frame.
The screws for the terminal box cover must be tightened with a torque according to the list below.
Tightening torques for terminal box cover screws
Thread diameter M4 M5 M6 M8
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.8 - 1.2 1.2 - 1.8 1.5 - 2.5 3.0 – 5.0
Pos : 161 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Elektrischer Anschl uss [Zone21+ 22 + Clas s I und II Div.2] @ 7\m od_1431433133025_388.doc x @ 219085 @ 3 @ 1

B 1091 en-2722 55
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
3.7.3 Electrical Connection
The electrical connections of the terminal board are protected against twisting. The voltage supply to
the terminal board must be made by means of suitable ring terminals. The ring terminals are installed
between the two brass washers below the lock washer. The nuts must be tightened with a torque
according to the table below. The contact pressure is permanently maintained by means of the specified
torque and the lock washer. In addition, twisting of the ring terminals of the voltage supply is prevented.
The connection elements are corrosion-proof.
Tightening torques for terminal board connections
Thread diameter M4 M5 M6 M8
Tightening torque (Nm) 0,8 - 1,2 1,8 - 2,5 2,7 - 4,0 5,5 - 8,0

Exploded diagram of electrical connection

Cable lug provided by Brass nut

customer Lock washer
Brass washer

Brass nut

Ring terminal

Brass thread with collar

Mechanical protection against twisting

Pos : 162 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Elektrischer Anschl uss _02 [Clas s I und II Div.2] @ 73\mod_1620046300205_388.docx @ 2774127 @ @ 1

The motor must be grounded at one of the marked earthing terminals.

The use of aluminium connecting cables is not permissible.
Cables with a circular cross-section must be used with the supplied cable glands. The clamping nuts of
the cable gland must be tightened to the torque specified in the following table.
Tightening torques for lock nut
Cable gland M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M32x1.5 M40x1.5 M50x1.5 M63x1.5
Tightening torque (Nm) 3.0 6.0 12.0 14.0 20.0 25.0

When connecting, care must be taken that the permissible air gaps of at least 10 mm and the permissible
leakage tracks of at least 12 mm between the electrically live components and components with the
same potential as the housing, or between live components are maintained.
Check that the terminal nuts and the screw for the earth lead are tight before closing the terminal box.
The terminal box seals and the cable gland seals must be correctly seated and must not be damaged.
Pos : 163 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/M otorlage – Bes onderheiten [EXE, EXN, Zone21+22, Clas s I Div.2] @ 78\mod_1629902592793_388.docx @ 2817521 @ 3 @ 1

3.7.4 Motor position – special features IM V3, IM V6

If the end of the shaft faces upwards, e.g. version IM V3, IM V6, a cover must be provided by the
operator / installer, which prevents foreign bodies from falling into the fan cover of the motor (see
EN IEC 60079-0:2018). This must not obstruct the fan from cooling the motor. If the end of the shaft
faces downwards (AS, inclination 20° to 90°), e.g. versions IM V1, IM V5, the motors are to be used with
a protective cover on the fan cover. For an inclination of less than 20°, an appropriate protective device,
which meets the above mentioned conditions, must be provided by the operator / installer.
A hand wheel on the second shaft end is not permitted.

56 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents

Pos : 164 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/W eitere Betriebs beding unge [Cl ass I, Div . 2] @ 73\m od_1620053458572_388.docx @ 2774205 @ 3 @ 1

3.7.5 Further operating conditions

The motors are designed for continuous operation and normal one-time starting in which no significant
starting heat is generated.
Voltage supply deviations are only permitted to a limited extent: Voltage ± 5%, frequency ± 2%. Mains
symmetry must be maintained to keep heat generation within permissible limits. Significant deviations
from the nominal values can lead to an impermissible increase in heat generation in the motor.

Each machine must be protected against impermissible heating by a current-dependent and delayed
circuit breaker that has been tested for operation by an approved facility. If such a configuration is not
possible, additional protection measures are required (e.g. thermal protection of the machine).
Repairs must be carried out by Getriebebau NORD or by an officially recognised expert. The work must
be indicated with an additional repair plate. With the exception of standard, commercially available and
equivalent components, only original spare parts (see spare parts list) may be used. This particularly
applies for seals and connection parts.
Check that the connection terminals, protective conductor terminal and the equipotential bonding
terminal are firmly fastened. Check that the cable glands and the terminal box seals are in good
condition.
All work on electrical machinery must be performed when the machine is at a standstill and with all poles
disconnected from the mains.
The motor must be removed for measurement of the insulation resistance. The measurement must not
be performed in the explosion hazard area. As soon as measurement has been completed, discharge
the connection terminals again immediately by short-circuiting in order to prevent any spark discharges
occurring in the explosion hazard area.

B 1091 en-2722 57
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Pos : 165 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Expl osionsgeschützte El ektr omotor en gemäß Class II Div.2_01 @ 73\mod_1620136298757_388.docx @ 2774580 @ 2 @ 1

3.8 Explosion-protected electric motors according to Class II Div.2

Pos : 166 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/Sicherheits hinw eis e/GEF AHR_ATEX - Ex plosi onsgefahr El ektisc her Schl ag - Motor en [B1091] @ 11\m od_1460010132024_388.doc x @ 316266 @ @ 1

DANGER! Explosion hazard

All work must only be carried out with the machine at a standstill and the power to the system
switched off.
Higher temperatures than the maximum permitted surface temperature of the housing may
be present inside the motor. The motor must therefore never be opened in an explosive
atmosphere!
Failure to comply with this may result in the ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 167 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/Sicherheits hinw eis e/WARNUN G_AT EX_Expl osionsg efahr-Thermisc h - M otor en [B1091] @ 11\m od_1460010112266_388.docx @ 316231 @ @ 1

WARNING Explosion hazard

Excessively heavy dust deposits must be avoided, as these impair the cooling of the device!
Impairment or obstruction of the flow of cooling air, for example due to partial or large area
coverage of the fan cover or the entry of foreign bodies fall into the fan must be avoided in
order to ensure adequate cooling.
Only cable glands and reducers which are approved for use in explosion hazard areas may
be used.
All cable glands which are not used must be closed with blind screw plugs which are approved
for potentially explosive areas.
Only the original seals may be used.
Failure to comply increases the risk of ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 168 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/W eitere Sic her heitsinformationen_01 [Class I und Class II] @ 73\m od_1620287106819_388.docx @ 2776560 @ 5 @ 1

Further safety information

Pos : 169 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/W eitere Sic her heitsinformationen_02 [Class I und Class II] @ 73\m od_1620287796525_0.doc x @ 2776678 @ @ 1

“THIS EQUIPMENT IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I DIVISION 2 GROUPS A,B,C,D/CLASS II

DIVISION 2 GROUPS F & G”

WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
DO NOT DISCONNEC T EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED
OFF OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS

AVERTISSEMENT
RISQUE D'EXPLOSION
AVANT DE DECONNECTER L'EQUIPEMENT, COUPER LE COURANT OU
S'ASSURER QUE L'EMPLACEMENT EST DESIGNE 'NON DANGEREUX

WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I
DIV.2/CLASS II DIV.2

58 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents

AVERTISSEMENT
RISQUE D'EXPLOSION
LA SUBSTITUTION DE COMPOSANTS PEUT RENDRE CE MATERIEL
INACCEPTABLE POUR LES EMPLACEMENTS DE CLASSE I DIVISION 2/ CLASSE
II DIVISION 2
Pos : 170 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Expl osionsgeschützte El ektr omotor en gemäß Class II Div.2_02 @ 73\mod_1620136454224_388.docx @ 2774618 @ @ 1

For these motors, the following information specifically or complimentarily apply.

The motors are suitable for use in Class II Div.2 and may be used at an ambient temperature from -
20 °C to +40 °C.

Type suffix: IID2 e.g.: 80 LP/4 IID2 CUS TF

Labelling: Class II Div.2 Group F,
G T3B 165°C

Explosive dust may cause severe or fatal injuries in combination with hot, electrically live and moving
components of electrical machines.

The increased danger in explosion hazard areas requires especially strict observance of the general
safety and commissioning information. It is necessary that the persons responsible are qualified
according to national and local regulations.
It is necessary that the persons responsible for the use of these motors and frequency inverters in
explosion hazard areas are trained in their correct use.
These explosion-protected electrical machines comply with the standards CSA C.22.2 N°25-1966, CSA
C.22.2 N°100-14, UL Subject 1836, UL 1004-1 and are suitable for the Class II Div.2 area.
The degree of explosion hazards determines the zone classification. The operator is responsible for the
classification of the zones. The use of motors which are not certified for explosion hazard areas is
prohibited in explosion hazard areas.
Pos : 171 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Klemm enkas tendec kel dichtung [EXE, EXN, Z one21+22, Cl ass I und II Div .2] @ 7\mod_1431427943472_388.docx @ 218892 @ 3 @ 1

3.8.1 Terminal box cover seals

The terminal box cover gasket is captively mounted on the terminal box cover. Please only use an
original seal when replacing the seal.
If the terminal box is opened during installation, maintenance, repair, troubleshooting or overhaul, the
terminal box cover must be re-fitted after the work is complete. There must be no dirt on the surface of
the seal or the sealing surface of the terminal box frame.
The screws for the terminal box cover must be tightened with a torque according to the list below.
Tightening torques for terminal box cover screws
Thread diameter M4 M5 M6 M8
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.8 - 1.2 1.2 - 1.8 1.5 - 2.5 3.0 – 5.0

B 1091 en-2722 59
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Pos : 172 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Elektrischer Anschl uss [Zone21+ 22 + Clas s I und II Div.2] @ 7\m od_1431433133025_388.doc x @ 219085 @ 3 @ 1

3.8.2 Electrical Connection

The electrical connections of the terminal board are protected against twisting. The voltage supply to
the terminal board must be made by means of suitable ring terminals. The ring terminals are installed
between the two brass washers below the lock washer. The nuts must be tightened with a torque
according to the table below. The contact pressure is permanently maintained by means of the specified
torque and the lock washer. In addition, twisting of the ring terminals of the voltage supply is prevented.
The connection elements are corrosion-proof.
Tightening torques for terminal board connections
Thread diameter M4 M5 M6 M8
Tightening torque (Nm) 0,8 - 1,2 1,8 - 2,5 2,7 - 4,0 5,5 - 8,0

Exploded diagram of electrical connection

Cable lug provided by Brass nut

customer Lock washer
Brass washer
Brass nut

Ring terminal

Brass thread with collar

Mechanical protection against twisting

Pos : 173 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Elektrischer Anschl uss _02 [Clas s I und II Div.2] @ 73\mod_1620046300205_388.docx @ 2774127 @ @ 1

The motor must be grounded at one of the marked earthing terminals.

The use of aluminium connecting cables is not permissible.
Cables with a circular cross-section must be used with the supplied cable glands. The clamping nuts of
the cable gland must be tightened to the torque specified in the following table.
Tightening torques for lock nut
Cable gland M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M32x1.5 M40x1.5 M50x1.5 M63x1.5
Tightening torque (Nm) 3.0 6.0 12.0 14.0 20.0 25.0
When connecting, care must be taken that the permissible air gaps of at least 10 mm and the permissible
leakage tracks of at least 12 mm between the electrically live components and components with the
same potential as the housing, or between live components are maintained.
Check that the terminal nuts and the screw for the earth lead are tight before closing the terminal box.
The terminal box seals and the cable gland seals must be correctly seated and must not be damaged.
Pos : 174 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/M otorlage – Bes onderheiten [EXE, EXN, Zone21+22, Clas s I Div.2] @ 78\mod_1629902592793_388.docx @ 2817521 @ 3 @ 1

3.8.3 Motor position – special features IM V3, IM V6

If the end of the shaft faces upwards, e.g. version IM V3, IM V6, a cover must be provided by the
operator / installer, which prevents foreign bodies from falling into the fan cover of the motor (see
EN IEC 60079-0:2018). This must not obstruct the fan from cooling the motor. If the end of the shaft
faces downwards (AS, inclination 20° to 90°), e.g. versions IM V1, IM V5, the motors are to be used with
a protective cover on the fan cover. For an inclination of less than 20°, an appropriate protective device,
which meets the above mentioned conditions, must be provided by the operator / installer.
A hand wheel on the second shaft end is not permitted.

60 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents

Pos : 175 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Kabel- und Kabelv ersc hraubungen [Cl ass II Div .2] @ 73\m od_1620140130351_388.docx @ 2774655 @ 3 @ 1

3.8.4 Cables and cable glands

For Class II Div. 2, the cable glands must as a minimum correspond to the protection type specified on
the name plate. Unused openings must be sealed with blind plugs that comply with at least the protection
class of the motor and zone.
The cable and blind plugs must be suitable for temperatures of at least 80 °C.
In order to connect cables or carry out other works, the motor must not be opened in explosive
atmospheres. The voltage must always be switched off and secured against switch-on before opening.
The motors are equipped with threads for cable glands according to the following overview.
Assignment of cable gland to motor size
Standard motor cable glands Braking motor cable glands
Type Quantit Threads Quantity Threads Quantity Threads Quantity Threads Quantity Threads Quantity Threads
y
63 2 M20x1.5 4 M20x1.5 2 M12x1.5
71 2 M20x1.5 4 M20x1.5 2 M12x1.5
80 2 M25x1.5 4 M25x1.5 2 M12x1.5
90 2 M25x1.5 4 M25x1.5 2 M12x1.5
100 2 M32x1.5 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5
112 2 M32x1.5 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5
132 2 M32x1.5 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
160/ 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
180/..X

Pos : 176 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Lackier ung [EXE, EXN, Z one21+ 22] @ 67\m od_1613486826666_388.docx @ 2738934 @ 3 @ 1

3.8.5 Painting
The motors are equipped with a suitable, electrostatically tested painting ex-works. Subsequent painting
may only be carried out in consultation with Getriebebau NORD or a repair workshop approved for the
repair of explosion-protected electric motors. The valid standards and regulations must be observed.
Pos : 177 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/IEC- B14-Motor en [Z one21+ 22, Clas s II Div.2] @ 7\m od_1431436005842_388.docx @ 219211 @ 3 @ 1

3.8.6 IEC-B14 motors

Please comply with the information in Section 1.3.2. Otherwise, explosion protection is not ensured.
Pos : 178 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/W eitere Betriebs beding unge [Cl ass II, Div. 2] @ 73\mod_1620283437283_388.docx @ 2776050 @ 3 @ 1

3.8.7 Further operating conditions

Unless otherwise specified on the rating plate for operating modes and tolerances, electric machines
are designed for continuous operation and normal infrequent starting where insignificant start-up heating
occurs. The motors may only be used for the type of operation stated on the name plate.
The installation instructions must be observed.

B 1091 en-2722 61
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions

The motors are self-cooled. Radial shaft seals are mounted both on the drive and ventilation side. The
motors are manufactured with protection class IP55, optionally IP66. Under normal operation conditions,
the surface temperature does not exceed the surface temperature indicated on the name plate.
Pos : 179 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Mi ndestq uersc hnitte v on Schutzl eitern [Zone21+ 22, Clas s II] @ 7\m od_1431436347149_388.docx @ 219273 @ 3 @ 1

3.8.8 Minimum cross section of bonding conductors

Cross section of the phase conductor Minimum cross section of the associated
of the installation S [mm2] protective conductor SP [mm2]
S ≤ 16 S
16 < S ≤ 35 16
S > 35 0.5 S

Pos : 180 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Mi ndestq uersc hnitte v on Schutzl eitern_02 [Clas s II] @ 73\m od_1620284355074_388.docx @ 2776165 @ @ 1

The minimum cross-section for connection of a cable to the outer earthing terminal is 4 mm².

62 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
Pos : 181 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Betrieb am Freq uenz umrichter @ 76\mod_1625221471421_388.docx @ 2802380 @ 3 @ 1

3.8.9 Operation with frequency inverters

NORD motors that comply with Class II Div.2 are suitable for operation on a frequency inverter. The
variable speed range requires temperature monitoring using temperature sensors. The approved speed
ranges can be found in the following table:
Type VR 5:1 Type VN 10:1 Type VW 20:1

Motor type M nmax nmin M nmax nmin M nmax nmin

[Nm] [r/min] [r/min] [Nm] [r/min] [r/min] [Nm] [r/min] [r/min]

SK 80 LP/4 4.32 1680 350 3.16 1800 175 2.98 2400 110
SK 90 SP/4 6.10 1750 355 3.96 1800 185 4.45 2400 80
SK 90 LP/4 8.63 1695 360 6.28 1800 115 6.32 2400 110
SK 100 LP/4 12.50 1700 315 8.19 1800 100 9.25 2400 65
SK 112 MP/4 20.30 1750 360 11.87 1800 180 14.84 2400 115
SK 132 SP/4 30.50 1750 350 19.78 1800 185 22.25 2400 120
SK 132 MP/4 41.00 1745 350 29.67 1800 175 29.67 2400 125
SK 160 MP/4 60.30 1760 345 39.56 1800 175 44.51 2400 120
SK 160 LP/4 80.70 1760 350 59.34 1800 180 59.34 2400 115
SK 180 MP/4 100.60 1760 355 79.12 1800 180 74.18 2400 125
SK 180 LP/4 121.00 1765 350 98.90 1800 175 89.01 2400 120

If the frequency inverter is not approved for operation within the specified explosion hazard zone, the
frequency inverter is to be installed outside the explosion hazard area.
Pos : 182 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 1\mod_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

B 1091 en-2722 63
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Pos : 183 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Ins tandhaltung [Zone21+22, Class II] @ 67\m od_1613487261161_388.docx @ 2739048 @ 3 @ 1

3.8.10 Maintenance
The voltage must always be switched off and secured against switch-on before opening.
Notice! Temperatures may occur within the motor that are higher than the maximum permissible
surface temperature of the housing. The motor must therefore not be opened in an explosive
dust atmosphere. The motors must be checked and tested for functional safety on a regular
basis. The valid national standards and regulations must be observed.
Impermissibly high dust deposits > 5 mm are to be avoided. The motor must not be further operated if
functional safety is not guaranteed. Upon replacement of the ball bearings, the radial shaft seals must
also be replaced. Please use the radial shaft seals prescribed by Getriebebau NORD. It is essential to
pay attention to professional installation. The radial shaft seal’s outer ring and sealing lip must be
lubricated. If an explosion-protected gear unit is flanged to the motor in a dust-proof manner, a NBR
radial shaft seal may be used on the motor’s A side if the gear oil temperature does not exceed 85°C.
Only original parts may be used as spare parts, except for standardised, customary and equivalent
parts. This is particularly valid for seals and connection parts. In case of terminal box parts or spare
parts for outer earthing, the parts must be ordered according to the spare parts list of the operating
instructions.
Seals, radial shaft seals and cable glands must be checked for functionality on a regular basis.
The maintenance of the motor’s dust protection is of outstanding importance for explosion
protection. Maintenance must be carried out by qualified personnel in a specialist workshop with
appropriate equipment. We urgently recommend that the general overhaul is carried out by the NORD
Service department.

64 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents
4 Replacement parts

Please note our spare parts catalogue PL 1090 under www.nord.com.

We will be pleased to send you the spare parts catalogue on request.
Pos : 187 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/6. Konformitäts erklärungen/!1! Konformitätserkl ärungen (2022- 06- 14 09:32:19) @ 82\mod_1637149063402_388.docx @ 2845265 @ 1 @ 1

B 1091 en-2722 65
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions

5 Declarations of Conformity

66 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents

B 1091 en-2722 67
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions

68 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents

Pos : 188 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 1\mod_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1

B 1091 en-2722 69
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Pos : 189 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/6. Konformitäts erklärungen/Konformitäts erklär ung U KCA @ 89\m od_1656515298653_0.docx @ 2920280 @ @ 1

70 B 1091 en-2722
 Table of Contents

=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Inhalt ===

B 1091 en-2722 71
6051302 / 2722
Intelligent Drivesystems, Worldwide Services

DE EN FR
PL1021
Ersatzteilkatalog Flachgetriebe
Spare parts catalogue Parallel Shaft Gearboxes
Catalogue de pièces de rechange des réducteurs à arbres parallèles
 Inhaltsübersicht
Table Of Contents
Sommaire

Allgemeine Ersatzteile
General parts list
Vues éclatées et nomenclature

Flachgetriebe
Parallel Shaft Gear Units
Réducteurs à arbres paralléles
SK 0182 NB ............................................................................................................... 4-5
SK 1282 - SK 5282 ............................................................................................................... 4-5
SK 0282 NB ............................................................................................................... 6-9
SK 6282 - SK 11282 ............................................................................................................... 6-9
SK 1382 NB ............................................................................................................... 10 - 13
SK 6382 - SK 12382 ............................................................................................................... 10 - 13
SK 0182.1 + SK 1282.1 ............................................................................................................... 14 - 17
SK 0282.1 + SK 1382.1 ............................................................................................................... 14 - 17
SK 10382.1 ............................................................................................................... 18 - 21
SK 11382.1 ............................................................................................................... 18 - 21
SK 1282 - SK 5282 Abtriebswelle VL / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie .................................. 22 - 23
SK 1382 - SK 5382 Abtriebswelle VL / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie .................................. 22 - 23
SK 1282.1 + SK 1382.1 Abtriebswelle VL / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie .................................. 24 - 25
SK 6282 - SK 11282 Abtriebswelle VL / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie .................................. 26 - 27
SK 6382 - SK 12382 Abtriebswelle VL / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie .................................. 26 - 27
SK 1282 - SK 9282 Abtriebswelle VL 2 + VL 3 / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie .................... 28 - 29
SK 1382 - SK 9382 Abtriebswelle VL 2 + VL 3 / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie .................... 28 - 29
SK 1282.1 + SK 1382.1 Abtriebswelle VL 2 + VL 3 / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie .................... 30 - 31
SK 10282 + SK 11282 Abtriebswelle VL 2 / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie................................ 32 - 33
SK 12382 Abtriebswelle VL 2 / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie................................ 32 - 33
SK 10282.1 Abtriebswelle VL 2 / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie................................ 34 - 35
SK 11382.1 Abtriebswelle VL 2 / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie................................ 34 - 35
SK 10282 + SK 11282 Abtriebswelle VL 3 / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie................................ 36 - 37
SK 12382 Abtriebswelle VL 3 / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie................................ 36 - 37
SK 10382.1 Abtriebswelle VL 3 / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie................................ 38 - 39
SK 11382.1 Abtriebswelle VL 3 / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie................................ 38 - 39
SK 1282 - SK 9282 Abtriebswelle VL 4 / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie................................ 40 - 41
SK 1382 - SK 9382 Abtriebswelle VL 4 / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie................................ 40 - 41
SK 10282 + SK 10382 Abtriebswelle VL 4 / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie................................ 42 - 43
SK 11282 + SK 11382 Abtriebswelle VL 4 / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie................................ 42 - 43
SK 12382 Abtriebswelle VL 4 / Output shaft / Arbre de sortie................................ 42 - 43
SK 2382 - SK 5382 Anbaugehäuse / Add-on housing / Boîtier troisième train...................... 44 - 45
SK 1282/02 - SK 5282/12, SK 1282.1/02
SK 1282/03 - SK 5282/13, SK 6382/22 - SK 11382/52, SK 6382/23 - SK 11382/53
SK 10382.1/52 + SK 11382.1/53
Doppelgetriebe / Double gear unit / Réducteur double.................................................................. 46 - 47
Bestellangaben / Order details / Informations de commande........................................................ 48 - 49

Motorteile siehe Ersatzteilkatalog PL1090

Motor parts see pare parts cataloge PL1090
Pièces du moteur, voir le catalogue de pièces de rechange PL1090
www.nord.com PL1021 3
 SK 0182 NB
SK 1282 - SK 5282
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Flachgetriebe
Parallel Shaft Gear Unit
Flachgetriebe SK 0182 NB
Reducteurs à arbres paralléles
/ Parallel Shaft Gear Unit SK 0182 NB
und SK 1282 - SK 5282 and SK 1282 - SK 5282

326 325

105
900
1465 1470
911
EB 8429001E #1

760
744 711
745 1500
737 655 1470
110 734 710 656 1465
111 735 761 687
732 701 615
510 648
740
100 700 620 600 1400
733 1570
730 120 121 604 610
605 1560
602 1571
400 632 1572
410 631
510

657

420
630
210

230
200 243
242

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet
4 PL1021
1 602,604/605,687, 24.06.16 ESie
nach
Drawn
05.02.2009 SieversE 842 9001 - Ewww.nord.com
1
657 geä.,910 entf.
Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
 SK 0182 NB
SK 1282 - SK 5282

DE EN FR
100 Gehäuse 100 Housing 100 Boîtier
105 Dichtung 105 Seal 105 Bague d’étanchéité
110 Schraube 110 Screw 110 Vis
111 Dichtung 111 Seal 111 Bague d’étanchéité
120 Schraube 120 Screw 120 Vis
121 Dichtung 121 Seal 121 Bague d’étanchéité
200 Gehäusedeckel 200 Housing cover 200 Couvercle du carter
210 Dichtung 210 Seal 210 Bague d’étanchéité
230 Schraube 230 Screw 230 Vis
242 Schraube 242 Screw 242 Vis
243 Dichtung 243 Seal 243 Bague d’étanchéité
325 Schraube 325 Screw 325 Vis
326 Federring 326 Lock washer 326 Rondelle élastique
400 Flansch 400 Flange 400 Bride
410 Schraube 410 Screw 410 Vis
420 Stift 420 Pin 420 Goupille
510 Schwingmetallbuchse 510 Rubber bonded metal bush 510 Joint anti-vibratile
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
602 Sicherungsring 602 Circlip 602 Circlip
604 Passscheibe 604 Shim 604 Rondelle d’ajustage
605 Passscheibe 605 Shim 605 Rondelle d’ajustage
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Roulement
615 Wälzlager 615 Roller bearing 615 Roulement
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
630 Passfeder 630 Key 630 Clavette
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
632 Wellendichtring 632 Radial shaft seal 632 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
648 Passfeder 648 Key 648 Clavette
655 Wellendichtring 655 Radial shaft seal 655 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
656 Wellendichtring 656 Radial shaft seal 656 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
657 Verschlusskappe 657 Sealing cap 657 Bouchon
687 Sicherungsring 687 Circlip 687 Circlip
700 Ritzelwelle 700 Pinion shaft 700 Arbre de pignon
701 Antriebsrad 701 Drive gear 701 Roue d’entrée
710 Wälzlager 710 Roller bearing 710 Roulement
711 Wälzlager 711 Roller bearing 711 Roulement
730 Verschlusskappe 730 Sealing cap 730 Bouchon
732 Sicherungsring 732 Circlip 732 Circlip
733 Stützscheibe 733 Support disc 733 Rondelle d‘appui
734 Passscheibe 734 Shim 734 Rondelle d’ajustage
735 Passscheibe 735 Shim 735 Rondelle d’ajustage
737 Passfeder 737 Key 737 Clavette
740 Sicherungsring 740 Circlip 740 Circlip
744 Passscheibe 744 Shim 744 Rondelle d’ajustage
745 Passscheibe 745 Shim 745 Rondelle d’ajustage
760 Sicherungsring 760 Circlip 760 Circlip
761 Stützscheibe 761 Support disc 761 Rondelle d‘appui
900 Antriebsritzel 900 Driving pinion 900 Pignon d‘entrée
911 Sicherungsring 911 Circlip 911 Circlip
1400 Baugruppe Schrumpfscheibe 1400 Module Shrink disc 1400 Module de frette de serrage
1465 Haube 1465 Cover 1465 Capot
1470 Schraube 1470 Screw 1470 Vis
1500 Baugruppe Befestigungselement 1500 Module fastening element 1500 Module élément de fixation
1560 Buchse 1560 Socket 1560 Douille
1570 Verschlusskappe 1570 Sealing cap 1570 Bouchon
1571 O-Ring 1571 O-ring 1571 Joint torique
1572 Wellendichtring 1572 Radial shaft seal 1572 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre

www.nord.com PL1021 5
 SK 0282 NB
SK 6282 - SK 11282
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Flachgetriebe
Parallel Shaft Gear Unit
ReducteursFlachgetriebe SK 0282
à arbres paralléles NB / Parallel Shaft Gear SK 0282 NB
und SK 6282 - SK 11282 and SK 6282 - SK 11282
325
326
329
310 328
320
332 327
334
300 1470
105
900 1465
911 1500
761
711 665
764 655
EB 8949001E3 #1

701 651
737
570 733 700 615
571 550 100 736
140 111 710 648 667
141 110
761 666
510 711 656
764
753 645
734 654 1400
510 735 600
178
121 177 732 620 667
179 176 642 665
120 610 666
829 644
723 632
725 141 631
140 660
659 1470
210
661 630 1465
730 200
230 655
687

240 242 604

400 241 243 1500
420 632 605
410 656

602
1400
631
1570

1560
630 1571
657
658

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Teile hinzu./geän., Datum / Date Name / Name
910 entf. 3 26.10.16 ESie
Schutzvermerk
2
6 Aktualisierung 21.10.14 ESie Gezeichnet
PL1021 www.nord.com
1 Schr. u. Dicht. hinzu. 23.06.14 ESie
nach
Drawn
05.02.2009 SieversE 894 9001 - E 3
Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
 SK 0282 NB
SK 6282 - SK 11282

DE EN FR
100 Gehäuse 100 Housing 100 Boîtier
105 Dichtung 105 Seal 105 Bague d’étanchéité
110 Schraube 110 Screw 110 Vis
111 Dichtung 111 Seal 111 Bague d’étanchéité
120 Schraube 120 Screw 120 Vis
121 Dichtung 121 Seal 121 Bague d’étanchéité
140 Schraube 140 Screw 140 Vis
141 Dichtung 141 Seal 141 Bague d’étanchéité
176 Schraube 176 Screw 176 Vis
177 Dichtung 177 Seal 177 Bague d’étanchéité
178 Schraube 178 Screw 178 Vis
179 Dichtung 179 Seal 179 Bague d’étanchéité
200 Gehäusedeckel 200 Housing cover 200 Couvercle du carter
210 Dichtung 210 Seal 210 Bague d’étanchéité
230 Schraube 230 Screw 230 Vis
240 Schraube 240 Screw 240 Vis
241 Dichtung 241 Seal 241 Bague d’étanchéité
242 Schraube 242 Screw 242 Vis
243 Dichtung 243 Seal 243 Bague d’étanchéité
300 Getriebedeckel 300 Gear unit cover 300 Couvercle du réducteur
310 Dichtung 310 Seal 310 Bague d’étanchéité
320 Schraube 320 Screw 320 Vis
325 Schraube 325 Screw 325 Vis
326 Federring 326 Lock washer 326 Rondelle élastique
327 Stiftschraube 327 Threaded Stud 327 Goujon fileté
328 Federring 328 Lock washer 328 Rondelle élastique
329 Sechskantmutter 329 Hex nut 329 Ecrou à six pans
332 Schraube 332 Screw 332 Vis
334 Dichtung 334 Seal 334 Bague d’étanchéité
400 Flansch 400 Flange 400 Bride
410 Schraube 410 Screw 410 Vis
420 Stift 420 Pin 420 Goupille
510 Schwingmetallbuchse 510 Rubber bonded metal bush 510 Joint anti-vibratile
550 Fußplatte 550 Base plate 550 Plaque de fixation
570 Schraube 570 Screw 570 Vis
571 Stift 571 Pin 571 Goupille
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
602 Sicherungsring 602 Circlip 602 Circlip
604 Passscheibe 604 Shim 604 Rondelle d’ajustage
605 Passscheibe 605 Shim 605 Rondelle d’ajustage
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Roulement
615 Wälzlager 615 Roller bearing 615 Roulement
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
630 Passfeder 630 Key 630 Clavette
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
632 Wellendichtring 632 Radial shaft seal 632 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
642 Nilosring 642 Nilos ring 642 Bague Nilos
644 Distanzbuchse 644 Spacer 644 Douille entretoise
645 Distanzbuchse 645 Spacer 645 Douille entretoise
648 Passfeder 648 Key 648 Clavette
651 Stützscheibe 651 Support disc 651 Rondelle d‘appui
654 Nilosring 654 Nilos ring 654 Baque Nilos
↓ ↓ ↓
www.nord.com PL1021 7
 SK 0282 NB
SK 6282 - SK 11282
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Flachgetriebe
Parallel Shaft Gear Unit
ReducteursFlachgetriebe SK 0282
à arbres paralléles
NB / Parallel Shaft Gear SK 0282 NB
und SK 6282 - SK 11282 and SK 6282 - SK 11282
325
326
329
310 328
320
332 327
334
300 1470
105
900 1465
911 1500
761
711 665
764 655
EB 8949001E3 #1

701 651
737
570 733 700 615
571 550 100 736
140 111 710 648 667
141 110
761 666
510 711 656
764
753 645
734 654 1400
510 735 600
178
121 177 732 620 667
179 176 642 665
120 610 666
829 644
723 632
725 141 631
140 660
659 1470
210
661 630 1465
730 200
230 655
687

240 242 604

400 241 243 1500
420 632 605
410 656

602
1400
631
1570

1560
630 1571
657
658

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Teile hinzu./geän., Datum / Date Name / Name
910 entf. 3 26.10.16 ESie
Schutzvermerk
8
2 Aktualisierung 21.10.14 ESie Gezeichnet PL1021 www.nord.com
1 Schr. u. Dicht. hinzu. 23.06.14 ESie
nach
Drawn
05.02.2009 SieversE 894 9001 - E 3
Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
 SK 0282 NB
SK 6282 - SK 11282

↑ ↑ ↑
DE EN FR
655 Wellendichtring 655 Radial shaft seal 655 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
656 Wellendichtring 656 Radial shaft seal 656 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
657 Verschlusskappe 657 Sealing cap 657 Bouchon
658 Verschlusskappe 658 Sealing cap 658 Bouchon
659 Lagerdeckel 659 Bearing cover 659 Couvercle du palier
660 Dichtung 660 Seal 660 Bague d’étanchéité
661 Schraube 661 Screw 661 Vis
665 Lagerdeckel 665 Bearing cover 665 Couvercle du palier
666 Dichtung 666 Seal 666 Bague d’étanchéité
667 Schraube 667 Screw 667 Vis
687 Sicherungsring 687 Circlip 687 Circlip
700 Ritzelwelle 700 Pinion shaft 700 Arbre de pignon
701 Antriebsrad 701 Drive gear 701 Roue d’entrée
710 Wälzlager 710 Roller bearing 710 Roulement
711 Wälzlager 711 Roller bearing 711 Roulement
723 Lagerdeckel 723 Bearing cover 723 Couvercle du palier
725 Schraube 725 Screw 725 Vis
730 Verschlusskappe 730 Sealing cap 730 Bouchon
732 Sicherungsring 732 Circlip 732 Circlip
733 Stützscheibe 733 Support disc 733 Rondelle d‘appui
734 Passscheibe 734 Shim 734 Rondelle d’ajustage
735 Passscheibe 735 Shim 735 Rondelle d’ajustage
736 Nilosring 736 Nilos ring 736 Bague Nilos
737 Passfeder 737 Key 737 Clavette
753 Buchse 753 Socket 753 Douille
761 Stützscheibe 761 Support disc 761 Rondelle d‘appui
764 Nilosring 764 Nilos ring 764 Bague Nilos
829 Verschlusskappe 829 Sealing cap 829 Bouchon
900 Antriebsritzel 900 Driving pinion 900 Pignon d’entrée
911 Sicherungsring 911 Circlip 911 Circlip
1400 Baugruppe Schrumpfscheibe 1400 Assembly shrink disc 1400 Module de frette de serrage
1465 Haube 1465 Cover 1465 Capot
1470 Schraube 1470 Screw 1470 Vis
1500 Baugruppe Befestigungselement 1500 Module fastening element 1500 Module élément de fixation
1560 Buchse 1560 Socket 1560 Douille
1570 Verschlusskappe 1570 Sealing cap 1570 Bouchon
1571 O-Ring 1571 O-ring 1571 Joint torique

www.nord.com PL1021 9
 SK 1382 NB
Ersatzteilzeichnung
SK 6382 - SK 12382
Spare Parts Drawing
Flachgetriebe
Flachgetriebe
Parallel Shaft Gear Unit SK 1382 NB / Parallel Shaft Gear SK 1382 NB
Reducteurs à arbres paralléles
und SK 6382 - SK 12382 and SK 6382 - SK 12382
325
326
329
835 328
811 836 310 327
825 320
824 332
801 334 1470
821 300 1465
800 105
900 1500
810 911
820 761 665
711
839 764 655
845 701 651
EB 8949000E3 #1

840 733 737

700 615
570 736
571 550 820 826 810 100 710 648 667
140 827 110111
141 756 666
510 711 656
764
753 645
734 654 1400
178 510 732 735 600
121 177 620 667
179 176 642 665
120 610 666
829 644
723 632
725 141 631
140 660
210 659 1470
661 630 1465
730 200
230 655
687

240 242 604

400 241 243 1500
420 632 605
410 656

602
1400
631
1570

1560
630 1571
657
658

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
10
3
Teile hinzu./geän.,
26.10.16 ESie PL1021
Datum / Date Name / Name www.nord.com
910 entf. Schutzvermerk
2 Aktualisierung 21.10.14 ESie Gezeichnet
nach 05.02.2009 SieversE
 SK 1382 NB
SK 6382 - SK 12382

DE EN FR
100 Gehäuse 100 Housing 100 Boîtier
105 Dichtung 105 Seal 105 Bague d’étanchéité
110 Schraube 110 Screw 110 Vis
111 Dichtung 111 Seal 111 Bague d’étanchéité
120 Schraube 120 Screw 120 Vis
121 Dichtung 121 Seal 121 Bague d’étanchéité
140 Schraube 140 Screw 140 Vis
141 Dichtung 141 Seal 141 Bague d’étanchéité
176 Schraube 176 Screw 176 Vis
177 Dichtung 177 Seal 177 Bague d’étanchéité
178 Schraube 178 Screw 178 Vis
179 Dichtung 179 Seal 179 Bague d’étanchéité
200 Gehäusedeckel 200 Housing cover 200 Couvercle du carter
210 Dichtung 210 Seal 210 Bague d’étanchéité
230 Schraube 230 Screw 230 Vis
240 Schraube 240 Screw 240 Vis
241 Dichtung 241 Seal 241 Bague d’étanchéité
242 Schraube 242 Screw 242 Vis
243 Dichtung 243 Seal 243 Bague d’étanchéité
300 Getriebedeckel 300 Gear unit cover 300 Couvercle du réducteur
310 Dichtung 310 Seal 310 Bague d’étanchéité
320 Schraube 320 Screw 320 Vis
325 Schraube 325 Screw 325 Vis
326 Federring 326 Lock washer 326 Rondelle élastique
327 Stiftschraube 327 Threaded Stud 327 Goujon fileté
328 Federring 328 Lock washer 328 Rondelle élastique
329 Sechskantmutter 329 Hex nut 329 Ecrou à six pans
332 Schraube 332 Screw 332 Vis
334 Dichtung 334 Seal 334 Bague d’étanchéité
400 Flansch 400 Flange 400 Bride
410 Schraube 410 Screw 410 Vis
420 Stift 420 Pin 420 Goupille
510 Schwingmetallbuchse 510 Rubber bonded metal bush 510 Joint anti-vibratile
550 Fußplatte 550 Base plate 550 Plaque de fixation
570 Schraube 570 Screw 570 Vis
571 Stift 571 Pin 571 Goupille
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
602 Sicherungsring 602 Circlip 602 Circlip
604 Passscheibe 604 Shim 604 Rondelle d’ajustage
605 Passscheibe 605 Shim 605 Rondelle d’ajustage
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Roulement
615 Wälzlager 615 Roller bearing 615 Roulement
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
630 Passfeder 630 Key 630 Clavette
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
632 Wellendichtring 632 Radial shaft seal 632 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
642 Nilosring 642 Nilos ring 642 Bague Nilos
644 Distanzbuchse 644 Spacer 644 Douille entretoise
645 Distanzbuchse 645 Spacer 645 Douille entretoise
648 Passfeder 648 Key 648 Clavette
↓ ↓ ↓

www.nord.com PL1021 11
 SK 1382 NB
Ersatzteilzeichnung
SK 6382 - SK 12382
Spare Parts Drawing

Flachgetriebe
Flachgetriebe
Parallel Shaft Gear Unit SK 1382 NB / Parallel Shaft Gear SK 1382 NB
Reducteurs und SK 6382
à arbres - SK 12382
paralléles and SK 6382 - SK 12382
325
326
329
835 328
811 836 310 327
825 320
824 332
801 334 1470
821 300 1465
800 105
900 1500
810 911
820 761 665
711
839 764 655
845 701 651
737
EB 8949000E3 #1

840 733 700 615

570 736
571 550 820 826 810 100 710 648 667
140 827 110111
141 756 666
510 711 656
764
753 645
734 654 1400
178 510 732 735 600
121 177 620 667
179 176 642 665
120 610 666
829 644
723 632
725 141 631
140 660
210 659 1470
661 630 1465
730 200
230 655
687

240 242 604

400 241 243 1500
420 632 605
410 656

602
1400
631
1570

1560
630 1571
657
658

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
12 Teile hinzu./geän., PL1021
Datum / Date Name / Name www.nord.com
3 910 entf. 26.10.16 ESie
Schutzvermerk
2 Aktualisierung 21.10.14 ESie Gezeichnet
nach 05.02.2009 SieversE 894 9000 - E 3
 SK 1382 NB
SK 6382 - SK 12382

↑ ↑ ↑
DE EN CN
651 Stützscheibe 651 Support disc 651 Rondelle d‘appui
654 Nilosring 654 Nilos ring 654 Baque Nilos
655 Wellendichtring 655 Radial shaft seal 655 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
656 Wellendichtring 656 Radial shaft seal 656 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
657 Verschlusskappe 657 Sealing cap 657 Bouchon
658 Verschlusskappe 658 Sealing cap 658 Bouchon
659 Lagerdeckel 659 Bearing cover 659 Couvercle du palier
660 Dichtung 660 Seal 660 Bague d’étanchéité
661 Schraube 661 Screw 661 Vis
665 Lagerdeckel 665 Bearing cover 665 Couvercle du palier
666 Dichtung 666 Seal 666 Bague d’étanchéité
667 Schraube 667 Screw 667 Vis
687 Sicherungsring 687 Circlip 687 Circlip
700 Ritzelwelle 700 Pinion shaft 700 Arbre de pignon
701 Antriebsrad 701 Drive gear 701 Roue d’entrée
710 Wälzlager 710 Roller bearing 710 Roulement
711 Wälzlager 711 Roller bearing 711 Roulement
723 Lagerdeckel 723 Bearing cover 723 Couvercle du palier
725 Schraube 725 Screw 725 Vis
730 Verschlusskappe 730 Sealing cap 730 Bouchon
732 Sicherungsring 732 Circlip 732 Circlip
733 Stützscheibe 733 Support disc 733 Rondelle d‘appui
734 Passscheibe 734 Shim 734 Rondelle d’ajustage
735 Passscheibe 735 Shim 735 Rondelle d’ajustage
736 Nilosring 736 Nilos ring 736 Baque Nilos
737 Passfeder 737 Key 737 Clavette
753 Buchse 753 Socket 753 Douille
756 Buchse 756 Socket 756 Douille
761 Stützscheibe 761 Support disc 761 Rondelle d‘appui
764 Nilosring 764 Nilos ring 764 Bague Nilos
800 Ritzelwelle 800 Pinion shaft 800 Arbre de pignon
801 Antriebsrad 801 Drive gear 801 Roue d’entrée
810 Wälzlager 810 Roller bearing 810 Roulement
811 Wälzlager 811 Roller bearing 811 Roulement
820 Sicherungsring 820 Circlip 820 Circlip
821 Passfeder 821 Key 821 Clavette
824 Buchse 824 Socket 824 Douille
825 Nilosring 825 Nilos ring 825 Bague Nilos
826 Passscheibe 826 Shim 826 Rondelle d’ajustage
827 Passscheibe 827 Shim 827 Rondelle d’ajustage
829 Verschlusskappe 829 Sealing cap 829 Bouchon
835 Passscheibe 835 Shim 835 Rondelle d’ajustage
836 Passscheibe 836 Shim 836 Rondelle d’ajustage
839 Welle 839 Shaft 839 Arbre
840 Distanzbuchse 840 Spacer 840 Douille entretoise
845 Ritzel 845 Pinion 845 Douille
900 Antriebsritzel 900 Driving pinion 900 Pignon d’entrée
911 Sicherungsring 911 Circlip 911 Circlip
1400 Baugruppe Schrumpfscheibe 1400 Module shrink disc 1400 Module de frette de serrage
1465 Haube 1465 Cover 1465 Capot
1470 Schraube 1470 Screw 1470 Vis
1500 Baugruppe Befestigungselement 1500 Module fastening element 1500 Module élément de fixation
1560 Buchse 1560 Socket 1560 Douille
1570 Verschlusskappe 1570 Sealing cap 1570 Bouchon
1571 O-Ring 1571 O-ring 1571 Joint torique

www.nord.com PL1021 13
 SK 0182.1+ SKErsatzteilzeichnung
0282.1
SK 1282.1+ SK 1382.1
Spare Parts Drawing
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS

Flachgetriebe
Parallel Shaft Gear Unit Flachgetriebe / Parallel Shaft Gear
Reducteurs à arbres paralléles
SK 0182.1, SK 0282.1 und SK 1382.1

325
326

811
824
801
821 105
800 900
911 1470
810 1465
EB 8059000 #1

826 760
827 711 655
820 753
737
710 761 688 687
732 762 689
110 645
100 755 648 1500
701
656
510 700
734 626
735 615
120
600
829 1400
620
730 510 644
610
210 602 1570
200 632 1560
631
1571
230 630
400 657

240
420
244
410

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

14 PL1021
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
 SK 0182.1 + SK 0282.1
SK 1282.1 + SK 1382.1

DE EN FR
100 Gehäuse 100 Housing 100 Boîtier
105 Dichtung 105 Seal 105 Bague d’étanchéité
110 Schraube 110 Screw 110 Vis
120 Schraube 120 Screw 120 Vis
200 Gehäusedeckel 200 Housing cover 200 Couvercle du carter
210 Dichtung 210 Seal 210 Bague d’étanchéité
230 Schraube 230 Screw 230 Vis
240 Schraube 240 Screw 240 Vis
244 Schraube 244 Screw 244 Vis
325 Schraube 325 Screw 325 Vis
326 Federring 326 Lock washer 326 Rondelle élastique
400 Flansch 400 Flange 400 Bride
410 Schraube 410 Screw 410 Vis
420 Stift 420 Pin 420 Goupille
510 Schwingmetallbuchse 510 Rubber bonded metal bush 510 Joint anti-vibratile
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
602 Sicherungsring 602 Circlip 602 Circlip
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Roulement
615 Wälzlager 615 Roller bearing 615 Roulement
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
626 Stützscheibe 626 Support disc 626 Rondelle d‘appui
630 Passfeder 630 Key 630 Clavette
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
632 Wellendichtring 632 Radial shaft seal 632 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
644 Distanzbuchse 644 Spacer 644 Douille entretoise
645 Distanzbuchse 645 Spacer 645 Douille entretoise
648 Passfeder 648 Key 648 Clavette
655 Wellendichtring 655 Radial shaft seal 655 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
656 Wellendichtring 656 Radial shaft seal 656 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
657 Verschlusskappe 657 Sealing cap 657 Bouchon
687 Sicherungsring 687 Circlip 687 Circlip
688 Passscheibe 688 Shim 688 Rondelle d’ajustage
689 Passscheibe 689 Shim 689 Rondelle d’ajustage
700 Ritzelwelle 700 Pinion shaft 700 Arbre de pignon
701 Antriebsrad 701 Drive gear 701 Roue d’entrée
710 Wälzlager 710 Roller bearing 710 Roulement
711 Wälzlager 711 Roller bearing 711 Roulement
730 Verschlusskappe 730 Sealing cap 730 Bouchon
732 Sicherungsring 732 Circlip 732 Circlip
734 Passscheibe 734 Shim 734 Rondelle d’ajustage
735 Passscheibe 735 Shim 735 Rondelle d’ajustage
737 Passfeder 737 Key 737 Clavette
753 Buchse 753 Socket 753 Douille
755 Distanzuchse 755 Spacer 755 Douille entretoise
756 Buchse 756 Socket 756 Douille
760 Sicherungsring 760 Circlip 760 Circlip
761 Stützscheibe 761 Support disc 761 Rondelle d‘appui
762 Passscheibe 762 Shim 762 Rondelle d’ajustage
↓ ↓ ↓

www.nord.com PL1021 15
 SK 0182.1+ SK 0282.1
Ersatzteilzeichnung
SK 1282.1+ SK 1382.1
Spare Parts Drawing
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS

Flachgetriebe
Parallel Shaft Gear Unit Flachgetriebe / Parallel Shaft Gear
Reducteurs à arbres paralléles
SK 0182.1, SK 0282.1 und SK 1382.1

325
326

811
824
801
821 105
800 900
911 1470
810 1465
EB 8059000 #1

826 760
827 711 655
820 753
737
710 761 688 687
732 762 689
110 645
100 755 648 1500
701
656
510 700
734 626
735 615
120
600
829 1400
620
730 510 644
610
210 602 1570
200 632 1560
631
1571
230 630
400 657

240
420
244
410

16
Getriebebau NORD PL1021
GmbH & Co. KG
www.nord.com
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
 SK 0182.1 + SK 0282.1
SK 1282.1 + SK 1382.1

↑ ↑ ↑
DE EN FR
800 Ritzelwelle 800 Pinion shaft 800 Arbre de pignonI
801 Antriebsrad 801 Drive gear 801 Roue d’entrée
810 Wälzlager 810 Roller bearing 810 Roulement
811 Wälzlager 811 Roller bearing 811 Roulement
820 Sicherungsring 820 Circlip 820 Circlip
821 Passfeder 821 Key 821 Clavette
824 Buchse 824 Socket 824 Douille
826 Passscheibe 826 Shim 826 Rondelle d’ajustage
827 Passscheibe 827 Shim 827 Rondelle d’ajustage
829 Verschlusskappe 829 Sealing cap 829 Bouchon
900 Antriebsritzel 900 Driving pinion 900 Pignon d’entrée
911 Sicherungsring 911 Circlip 911 Circlip
1400 Baugruppe Schrumpfscheibe 1400 Module shrink disc 1400 Module de frette de serrage
1465 Haube 1465 Cover 1465 Capot
1470 Schraube 1470 Screw 1470 Vis
1500 Baugruppe Befestigungselement 1500 Module fastening element 1500 Module élément de fixation
1560 Buchse 1560 Socket 1560 Douille
1570 Verschlusskappe 1570 Sealing cap 1570 Bouchon
1571 O-Ring 1571 O-ring 1571 Joint torique

www.nord.com PL1021 17
 Ersatzteilzeichnung
SK 10382.1 Spare Parts Drawing
SKDRIVESYSTEMS
11382.1 DRIVESYSTEMS

Flachgetriebe
Flachgetriebe / Parallel Shaft Gear
SKUnit
Parallel Shaft Gear 10382.1, SK 11382.1 SK 10382.1, SK 11382.1
Reducteurs à arbres paralléles

325

811 326
801
821
800 329
810 310 328
828 327
320
811 1470
826 300
821 105 1465
EB 8109000E1 #1

827 820
900
911 655
711 688
840 701 615
845 801 737
839 700 620
710 648
570 560 510 734 1500
571 111 642
735 656
110 603 645
100 754
736 602 649
733 600 1400
732
120 610
604
829 632 605
730 140 631
660 657
510 630 658
659
210
661
200

400 230
420 244
410

18 Getriebebau NORDPL1021 GmbH & Co. KG www.nord.com

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
 SK 10382.1
SK 11382.1

DE EN FR
100 Gehäuse 100 Housing 100 Boîtier
105 Dichtung 105 Seal 105 Bague d’étanchéité
110 Schraube 110 Screw 110 Vis
111 Dichtung 111 Seal 111 Bague d’étanchéité
120 Schraube 120 Screw 120 Vis
140 Schraube 140 Screw 140 Vis
200 Gehäusedeckel 200 Housing cover 200 Couvercle du carter
210 Dichtung 210 Seal 210 Bague d’étanchéité
230 Schraube 230 Screw 230 Vis
244 Schraube 244 Screw 244 Vis
300 Getriebedeckel 300 Gear unit cover 300 Couvercle du réducteur
310 Dichtung 310 Seal 310 Bague d’étanchéité
320 Schraube 320 Screw 320 Vis
325 Schraube 325 Screw 325 Vis
326 Federring 326 Lock washer 326 Rondelle élastique
327 Stiftschraube 327 Threaded stud 327 Goujon fileté
328 Federring 328 Lock washer 328 Rondelle élastique
329 Sechskantmutter 329 Hex nut 329 Ecrou á six pans
400 Flansch 400 Flange 400 Bride
410 Schraube 410 Screw 410 Vis
420 Stift 420 Pin 420 Goupille
510 Schwingmetallbuchse 510 Rubber bonded metal bush 510 Joint anti-vibratile
560 Fußplatte 560 Base plate 560 Plaque de fixation
570 Schraube 570 Screw 570 Vis
571 Stift 571 Pin 571 Goupille
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
602 Sicherungsring 602 Circlip 602 Circlip
603 Stützscheibe 603 Support disc 603 Rondelle d’appui
604 Passscheibe 604 Shim 604 Rondelle d’ajustage
605 Passscheibe 605 Shim 605 Rondelle d’ajustage
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Roulement
615 Wälzlager 615 Roller bearing 615 Roulement
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
626 Stützscheibe 626 Support disc 626 Rondelle d‘appui
630 Passfeder 630 Key 630 Clavette
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
632 Wellendichtring 632 Radial shaft seal 632 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
642 Nilosring 642 Nilos ring 642 Bague Nilos
645 Distanzbuchse 645 Spacer 645 Douille entretoise
648 Passfeder 648 Key 648 Clavette
649 Distanzbuchse 649 Spacer 649 Douille entretoise
655 Wellendichtring 655 Radial shaft seal 655 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
656 Wellendichtring 656 Radial shaft seal 656 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
657 Verschlusskappe 657 Sealing cap 657 Bouchon
658 Verschlusskappe 658 Sealing cap 658 Bouchon
659 Lagerdeckel 659 Bearing cover 659 Couvercle du palier
660 Dichtung 660 Seal 660 Bague d’étanchéité
661 Schraube 661 Screw 661 Vis
688 Passscheibe 688 Shim 688 Rondelle d’ajustage
↓ ↓ ↓

www.nord.com PL1021 19
 Ersatzteilzeichnung
SK 10382.1 Spare Parts Drawing
SK DRIVESYSTEMS
11382.1 DRIVESYSTEMS

Flachgetriebe
Flachgetriebe / Parallel Shaft Gear
SKUnit
Parallel Shaft Gear 10382.1, SK 11382.1 SK 10382.1, SK 11382.1
Reducteurs à arbres paralléles

325

811 326
801
821
800 329
810 310 328
828 327
320
811 1470
826 300
821 105 1465
EB 8109000E1 #1

827 820
900
911 655
711 688
840 701 615
845 801 737
839 700 620
710 648
570 560 510 734 1500
571 111 642
735 656
110 603 645
100 754
736 602 649
733 600 1400
732
120 610
604
829 632 605
730 140 631
660 657
510 630 658
659
210
661
200

400 230
420 244
410

20 Getriebebau NORD
PL1021 GmbH & Co. KG www.nord.com
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
 SK 10382.1
SK 11382.1

↑ ↑ ↑
DE EN FR
700 Ritzelwelle 700 Pinion shaft 700 Arbre de pignon
701 Antriebsrad 701 Drive gear 701 Roue d’entrée
710 Wälzlager 710 Roller bearing 710 Roulement
711 Wälzlager 711 Roller bearing 711 Roulement
730 Verschlusskappe 730 Sealing cap 730 Bouchon
732 Sicherungsring 732 Circlip 732 Circlip
733 Stützscheibe 733 Support disc 733 Rondelle d‘appui
734 Passscheibe 734 Shim 734 Rondelle d’ajustage
735 Passscheibe 735 Shim 735 Rondelle d’ajustage
736 Nilosring 736 Nilos ring 736 Bague Nilos
737 Passfeder 737 Key 737 Clavette
754 Stützscheibe 754 Support disc 754 Rondelle d‘appui
800 Ritzelwelle 800 Pinion shaft 800 Arbre de pignonI
801 Antriebsrad 801 Drive gear 801 Roue d’entrée
810 Wälzlager 810 Roller bearing 810 Roulement
811 Wälzlager 811 Roller bearing 811 Roulement
820 Sicherungsring 820 Circlip 820 Circlip
821 Passfeder 821 Key 821 Clavette
826 Passscheibe 826 Shim 826 Rondelle d’ajustage
827 Passscheibe 827 Shim 827 Rondelle d’ajustage
828 Stützscheibe 828 Support disc 828 Rondelle d‘appui
829 Verschlusskappe 829 Sealing cap 829 Bouchon
839 Welle 839 Shaft 839 Arbre
840 Distanzbuchse 840 Spacer 840 Douille entretoise
845 Ritzel 845 Pinion 845 Douille
900 Antriebsritzel 900 Driving pinion 900 Pignon d’entrée
911 Sicherungsring 911 Circlip 911 Circlip
1400 Baugruppe Schrumpfscheibe 1400 Assembly shrink disc 1400 Module de frette de serrage
1465 Haube 1465 Cover 1465 Capot
1470 Schraube 1470 Screw 1470 Vis
1500 Baugruppe Befestigungselement 1500 Module fastening element 1500 Module élément de fixation

www.nord.com PL1021 21
 SK 1282 - 5282
Ersatzteilzeichnung
SK 1382 - 5382
Spare Parts Drawing
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS

Abtriebswelle VL - Flachgetriebe
Output shaft VL- ParallelAbtriebswelle / Output Shaft
Shaft Gear Unit
Arbre de sortie - Reducteurs à arbres paralléles
Flachgetriebe VL Parallel Shaft Gearb. VL
SK 1282 - SK 5282
SK 1382 - SK 5382

1500

656

615

648
EB 8429010E #1

642 655

687 1400
604
605
632 654
600

620

610

602

631 657

630

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
22 Schutzvermerk PL1021 www.nord.com
Gezeichnet
nach
Drawn
20.10.2016 SieversE 842 9010 - E
 SK 1282 - 5282
SK 1382 - 5382

DE EN FR
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
602 Sicherungsring 602 Circlip 602 Circlip
604 Passscheibe 604 Shim 604 Rondelle d’ajustage
605 Passscheibe 605 Shim 605 Rondelle d’ajustage
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Roulement
615 Wälzlager 615 Roller bearing 615 Roulement
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
630 Passfeder 630 Key 630 Clavette
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
632 Wellendichtring 632 Radial shaft seal 632 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
642 Nilosring 642 Nilos ring 642 Bague Nilos
648 Passfeder 648 Key 648 Clavette
654 Nilosring 654 Nilos ring 654 Bague Nilos
655 Wellendichtring 655 Radial shaft seal 655 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
656 Wellendichtring 656 Radial shaft seal 656 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
657 Verschlusskappe 657 Sealing cap 657 Bouchon
687 Sicherungsring 687 Circlip 687 Circlip
1400 Baugruppe Schrumpfscheibe 1400 Module shrink disc assembly 1400 Module de frette de serrage
1500 Baugruppe Befestigungselement 1500 Module fastening element 1500 Module élément de fixation

www.nord.com PL1021 23
 SK 1282.1+ SK 1382.1

Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Abtriebswelle VL - Flachgetriebe
Output shaft VL- Parallel Shaft Gear Unit
Arbre de sortie - Reducteurs à arbres paralléles
Flachgetriebe / Parallel Shaft Gear
Abtriebswelle / Output Shaft
SK1282.1 VL, SK 1382.1 VL

655

687

688
EB 8059000E #4

689
654
1500
648
656

642 626

602 615

631 600 1400

620

610

632

657
630

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
24 PL1021
Datum / Date Name / Name www.nord.com
Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet
nach 01.09.2017 SieversE
 SK 1282.1+ SK 1382.1

DE EN FR
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
602 Sicherungsring 602 Circlip 602 Circlip
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Roulement
615 Wälzlager 615 Roller bearing 615 Roulement
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
626 Stützscheibe 626 Support disc 626 Rondelle d‘appui
630 Passfeder 630 Key 630 Clavette
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
632 Wellendichtring 632 Radial shaft seal 632 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
642 Nilosring 642 Nilos ring 642 Bague Nilos
648 Passfeder 648 Key 648 Clavette
654 Nilosring 654 Nilos ring 654 Bague Nilos
655 Wellendichtring 655 Radial shaft seal 655 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
656 Wellendichtring 656 Radial shaft seal 656 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
657 Verschlusskappe 657 Sealing cap 657 Bouchon
687 Sicherungsring 687 Circlip 687 Circlip
688 Passscheibe 688 Shim 688 Rondelle d’ajustage
689 Passscheibe 689 Shim 689 Rondelle d’ajustage
1400 Baugruppe Schrumpfscheibe 1400 Module shrink disc assembly 1400 Module de frette de serrage
1500 Baugruppe Befestigungselement 1500 Module fastening element 1500 Module élément de fixation

www.nord.com PL1021 25
 SK 6282 - 11282
Ersatzteilzeichnung
SK 6382 - 12382
Spare Parts Drawing
Abtriebswelle VL - Flachgetriebe
Output shaft VL - Parallel Shaft Gear Unit / Output
Abtriebswelle Shaft
Arbre de sortie - Reducteurs à arbres paralléles
Flachgetriebe VL Parallel Shaft Gearb. VL
SK 6282 - SK 11282
SK 6382 - SK 12382

1500
665
655
626
654
648
667
666
EB 8949004E #1

642
656
632
615 1400
660
661 600
620
667
610 665
666
631
659

630

655
687

604
1500
632 605
656

602
1400
631

630
657
658

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Rudolf-Diesel-Straße 1 D-22934 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
26 PL1021 www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet
 SK 6282 - 11282
SK 6382 - 12382

DE EN FR
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
602 Sicherungsring 602 Circlip 602 Circlip
604 Passscheibe 604 Shim 604 Rondelle d’ajustage
605 Passscheibe 605 Shim 605 Rondelle d’ajustage
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Roulement
615 Wälzlager 615 Roller bearing 615 Roulement
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
626 Stützscheibe 626 Support disc 626 Rondelle d‘appui
630 Passfeder 630 Key 630 Clavette
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
632 Wellendichtring 632 Radial shaft seal 632 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
642 Nilosring 642 Nilos ring 642 Bague Nilos
648 Passfeder 648 Key 648 Clavette
654 Nilosring 654 Nilos ring 654 Bague Nilos
655 Wellendichtring 655 Radial shaft seal 655 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
656 Wellendichtirng 656 Radial shaft seal 656 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
657 Verschlusskappe 657 Sealing cap 657 Bouchon
658 Verschlusskappe 658 Sealing cap 658 Bouchon
659 Lagerdeckel 659 Bearing cover 659 Couvercle du palier
660 Dichtung 660 Seal 660 Bague d’étanchéité
661 Schraube 661 Screw 661 Vis
665 Lagerdeckel 665 Bearing cover 665 Couvercle du palier
666 Dichtung 666 Seal 666 Bague d’étanchéité
667 Schraube 667 Screw 667 Vis
687 Sicherungsring 687 Circlip 687 Circlip
1400 Baugruppe Sechrumpfscheibe 1400 Module Shrink disc 1400 Module frette de serrage
1500 Baugruppe Befestigungselement 1500 Module fastening element 1500 Module élément de fixation

www.nord.com PL1021 27
 SK 1282 - 9282
SK 1382 - 9382
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Abtriebswelle VL 2 + VL3 - Flachgetriebe
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS
Output shaft VL2 + VL3 - Parallel Shaft Gear Unit
Arbre de sortie - Reducteurs à arbres paralléles
Abtriebswelle / Output Shaft
Flachgetriebe VL2 / VL3 Parallel Shaft Gearb. VL2 / VL3
SK 1282 - SK 9282
SK 1382 - SK 9382
655
615
435
434 649
433
462
432 648
463
430 633 1500
400 646
420 650
410
EB 8429200E #1

654
620
600

632
635 647 1400
634 636 466
465
603
631
639 436
640
610
604 637
605
602
630 657

28 Getriebebau NORD PL1021 GmbH & Co. KG www.nord.com

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
 SK 1282 - 9282
SK 1382 - 9382

DE EN FR
400 Flansch 400 Flange 400 Bride
410 Schraube 410 Screw 410 Vis
420 Stifte 420 Pins 420 Goupilles
430 Dichtung 430 Seal 430 Bague d’étanchéité
432 Schmiernippel 432 Lubricating nipple 432 Graisseur
433 Ölstandsanzeige 433 Oil level indicator 433 Niveau d‘huile
434 Reduzierring 434 Reduction ring 434 Baque réduction
435 Dichtung 435 Seal 435 Bague d’étanchéité
436 Verschlussstopfen 436 Sealing plug 436 Vis de fermeture
463 Dichtung 463 Seal 463 Bague d’étanchéité
465 Schraube 465 Screw 465 Vis
466 Dichtung 466 Seal 466 Bague d’étanchéité
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
602 Sicherungsring 602 Circlip 602 Circlip
603 Stützscheibe 603 Support disc 603 Rondelle d’appui
604 Passscheibe 604 Shim 604 Rondelle d’ajustage
605 Passscheibe 605 Shim 605 Rondelle d’ajustage
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Roulement
615 Wälzlager 615 Roller bearing 615 Roulement
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
630 Passfeder 630 Key 630 Clavette
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
632 Wellendichtring 632 Radial shaft seal 632 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
633 Wellendichtring 633 Radial shaft seal 633 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
634 Sicherungsring 634 Circlip 634 Circlip
635 Passscheibe 635 Shim 635 Rondelle d’ajustage
636 Passscheibe 636 Shim 636 Rondelle d’ajustage
637 Stützscheibe 637 Support disc 637 Rondelle d’appui
639 Passscheibe 639 Shim 639 Rondelle d’ajustage
640 Passscheibe 640 Shim 640 Rondelle d’ajustage
646 O-Ring 646 O-ring 646 Joint torique
647 Dichtscheibe 647 Sealing washer 647 Rondelle d’étanchéité
648 Passfeder 648 Key 648 Clavette
649 Distanzbuchse 649 Spacer 649 Douille entretoise
650 Sicherungsring 650 Circlip 650 Circlip
654 Nilosring 654 Nilos ring 654 Bague Nilos
655 Wellendichtring 655 Radial shaft seal 655 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
657 Verschlusskappe 657 Sealing cap 657 Bouchon
1400 Baugruppe Schrumpfscheibe 1400 Module shrink disc 1400 Module frette de serrage
1500 Baugruppe Befestigungselement 1500 Module fastening element 1500 Module élément de fixation

www.nord.com PL1021 29
 Ersatzteilzeichnung
SK 1282.1+ SKSpare Parts Drawing
1382.1

Flachgetriebe / Parallel Shaft Gear

Abtriebswelle VL 2 + VL3 - Flachgetriebe
Output shaft VL2 + VL3 - Parallel Shaft Gear
Abtriebswelle UnitShaft
/ Output
Arbre de sortie - ReducteursSK1282.1
à arbresVL2
paralléles 1382.1 VL2 / VL3
/ VL3, SK

655
650
649

648
433
462 633
432 1500
430
656
615
639
EB 8059000E #3

620
635 640
600
634 636
632
603
646 1400
631
436
420
610 465 410

604 637
605
602

630
657

30 PL1021 www.nord.com

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

 SK 1282.1+ SK 1382.1

DE EN FR
410 Schraube 410 Screw 410 Vis
420 Stifte 420 Pins 420 Goupilles
430 Dichtung 430 Seal 430 Bague d’étanchéité
432 Schmiernippel 432 Lubricating nipple 432 Graisseur
433 Ölstandsanzeige 433 Oil level indicator 433 Niveau d‘huile
436 Verschlussstopfen 436 Sealing plug 436 Vis de fermeture
462 Schraube 462 Screw 462 Vis
465 Schraube 465 Screw 465 Vis
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
602 Sicherungsring 602 Circlip 602 Circlip
603 Stützscheibe 603 Support disc 603 Rondelle d’appui
604 Passscheibe 604 Shim 604 Rondelle d’ajustage
605 Passscheibe 605 Shim 605 Rondelle d’ajustage
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Roulement
615 Wälzlager 615 Roller bearing 615 Roulement
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
630 Passfeder 630 Key 630 Clavette
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
632 Wellendichtring 632 Radial shaft seal 632 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
633 Wellendichtring 633 Radial shaft seal 633 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
634 Sicherungsring 634 Circlip 634 Circlip
635 Passscheibe 635 Shim 635 Rondelle d’ajustage
636 Passscheibe 636 Shim 636 Rondelle d’ajustage
637 Stützscheibe 637 Support disc 637 Rondelle d’appui
639 Passscheibe 639 Shim 639 Rondelle d’ajustage
640 Passscheibe 640 Shim 640 Rondelle d’ajustage
646 O-Ring 646 O-ring 646 Joint torique
648 Passfeder 648 Key 648 Clavette
649 Distanzbuchse 649 Spacer 649 Douille entretoise
650 Sicherungsring 650 Circlip 650 Circlip
655 Wellendichtring 655 Radial shaft seal 655 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
656 Wellendichtring 656 Radial shaft seal 656 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
657 Verschlusskappe 657 Sealing cap 657 Bouchon
1400 Baugruppe Schrumpfscheibe 1400 Module shrink disc 1400 Module frette de serrage
1500 Baugruppe Befestigungselement 1500 Module fastening element 1500 Module élément de fixation

www.nord.com PL1021 31
 Spare Parts Drawing
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS

SK 10282, SK 11282
SK 12382 Abtriebswelle / Output shaft
Flachgetriebe VL2 Parallel Shaft Gearb. VL2
SK 10282, SK 11282
Abtriebswelle VL 2 - Flachgetriebe
SK 12282,
Output shaft VL2 - Parallel Shaft SK 12382
Gear Unit
Arbre de sortie - Reducteurs à arbres paralléles

1400
665
655
650
654
648

679
EB 8949050E #1

463
462 629 667
432 659 666
430 633
400 656
615
600
642
637 620
440 678
631 660 630
661
632
410
466 420
465
436
610
634
446

32
Getriebebau PL1021
NORD GmbH & Co. KG
www.nord.com
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
 SK 10282, SK 11282
SK 12382

DE EN FR
400 Flansch 400 Flange 400 Bride
410 Schraube 410 Screw 410 Vis
420 Stifte 420 Pins 420 Goupilles
430 Dichtung 430 Seal 430 Bague d’étanchéité
432 Schmiernippel 432 Lubricating nipple 432 Graisseur
436 Verschlussstopfen 436 Sealing plug 436 Vis de fermeture
440 Dichtringflansch 440 Sealing ring flange 440 Bride de joint d‘étanchéité
446 Schraube 446 Screw 446 Vis
462 Schraube 462 Screw 462 Vis
463 Dichtung 463 Seal 463 Bague d’étanchéité
465 Schraube 465 Screw 465 Vis
466 Dichtung 466 Seal 466 Bague d’étanchéité
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Roulement
615 Wälzlager 615 Roller bearing 615 Roulement
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
629 Schutzring 629 Protector ring 629 Anneau de protection
630 Passfeder 630 Key 630 Clavette
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
632 Wellendichtring 632 Radial shaft seal 632 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
633 Wellendichtring 633 Radial shaft seal 633 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
634 Sicherungsring 634 Circlip 634 Circlip
637 Stützscheibe 637 Support disc 637 Rondelle d’appui
642 Nilosring 642 Nilos ring 642 Bague Nilos
648 Passfeder 648 Key 648 Clavette
649 Distanzbuchse 649 Spacer 649 Douille entretoise
650 Sicherungsring 650 Circlip 650 Circlip
654 Nilosring 654 Nilos ring 654 Bague Nilos
655 Wellendichtring 655 Radial shaft seal 655 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
656 Wellendichtring 656 Radial shaft seal 656 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
659 Lagerdeckel 659 Bearing cover 659 Couvercle du palier
660 Dichtung 660 Seal 660 Bague d’étanchéité
661 Schraube 661 Screw 661 Vis
665 Lagerdeckel 665 Bearing cover 665 Couvercle du palier
666 Dichtung 666 Seal 666 Bague d’étanchéité
667 Schraube 667 Screw 667 Vis
678 Sicherungsring 678 Circlip 678 Circlip
679 Stützscheibe 679 Suport disc 679 Rondelle d’appui
1400 Baugruppe Schrumpfscheibe 1400 Module shrink disc 1400 Module frette de serrage

www.nord.com PL1021 33
 SK 10282.1
SK 11382.1 Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS
Abtriebswelle VL 2 - Flachgetriebe
Output shaft VL2 - Parallel Shaft Gear Unit
Abtriebswelle / Output shaft
Arbre de sortie VL2 - Reducteurs à arbres paralléles
Flachgetriebe VL2 Parallel Shaft Gearbox VL2
SK 10382.1, SK 11382.1

655
615
620
648

462 660 1400

432
430 661 656
EB 8109001E #1

400 633
649

600
642 629
604
659
635 605 632
440 636 630
657
631 410
465 658
436 420
610
637
634
446

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet
34 PL1021
nach
Drawn
18.10.2016 SieversE 810 9001 - www.nord.com
E
Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
 SK 10282.1
SK 11382.1

DE EN FR
400 Flansch 400 Flange 400 Bride
410 Schraube 410 Screw 410 Vis
420 Stifte 420 Pins 420 Goupilles
430 Dichtung 430 Seal 430 Bague d’étanchéité
432 Schmiernippel 432 Lubricating nipple 432 Graisseur
436 Verschlussstopfen 436 Sealing plug 436 Vis de fermeture
440 Dichtringflansch 440 Sealing ring flange 440 Bride de joint d‘étanchéité
446 Schraube 446 Screw 446 Vis
462 Schraube 462 Screw 462 Vis
465 Schraube 465 Screw 465 Vis
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
604 Passscheibe 604 Shim 604 Rondelle d’ajustage
605 Passscheibe 605 Shim 605 Rondelle d’ajustage
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Roulement
615 Wälzlager 615 Roller bearing 615 Roulement
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
629 Schutzring 629 Protector ring 629 Anneau de protection
630 Passfeder 630 Key 630 Clavette
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
632 Wellendichtring 632 Radial shaft seal 632 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
633 Wellendichtring 633 Radial shaft seal 633 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
634 Sicherungsring 634 Circlip 634 Circlip
635 Passscheibe 635 Shim 635 Rondelle d’ajustage
636 Passscheibe 636 Shim 636 Rondelle d’ajustage
637 Stützscheibe 637 Support disc 637 Rondelle d’appui
642 Nilosring 642 Nilos ring 642 Bague Nilos
648 Passfeder 648 Key 648 Clavette
649 Distanzbuchse 649 Spacer 649 Douille entretoise
655 Wellendichtring 655 Radial shaft seal 655 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
656 Wellendichtring 656 Radial shaft seal 656 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
657 Verschlusskappe 657 Sealing cap 657 Bouchon
658 Verschlusskappe 658 Sealing cap 658 Bouchon
659 Lagerdeckel 659 Bearing cover 659 Couvercle du palier
660 Dichtung 660 Seal 660 Bague d’étanchéité
661 Schraube 661 Screw 661 Vis
1400 Baugruppe Schrumpfscheibe 1400 Module shrink disc 1400 Module frette de serrage

www.nord.com PL1021 35
 Spare Parts Drawing
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS
SK 10282, SK 11282
SK 12382
Abtriebswelle / Output shaft
Flachgetriebe VL3 Parallel Shaft Gearb. VL3
SK 10282, SK 11282
Abtriebswelle VL 3 - Flachgetriebe
SK 12282,
Output shaft VL3 - Parallel Shaft SK 12382
Gear Unit
Arbre de sortie VL3 - Reducteurs à arbres paralléles

1400
665
655
650
654
648

679
435 667
EB 8949050E #2

433 629
434 666
659
432 656
430 632
400 646 615
600

620
675 678
610 660 630
634 661
446 633
647
410
466 420
465
436
639
637
440
631

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet
36
nach
Drawn
18.10.2016
PL1021 SieversE 894 9050 www.nord.com
-E
Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
 SK 10282, SK 11282
SK 12382

DE EN FR
400 Flansch 400 Flange 400 Bride
410 Schraube 410 Screw 410 Vis
420 Stifte 420 Pins 420 Goupilles
430 Dichtung 430 Seal 430 Bague d’étanchéité
432 Schmiernippel 432 Lubricating nipple 432 Graisseur
433 Ölstandsanzeige 433 Oil level indicator 433 Niveau d’huile
434 Reduzierung 434 Reducer 434 Réduction
435 Dichtung 435 Seal 435 Bague d’étanchéité
436 Verschlussstopfen 436 Sealing plug 436 Bague d’étanchéité
440 Dichtringflansch 440 Sealing ring flange 440 Bride de joint d’étanchéité
446 Schraube 446 Screw 446 Vis
465 Schraube 465 Screw 465 Vis
466 Dichtung 466 Seal 466 Bague d’étanchéité
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Roulement
615 Wälzlager 615 Roller bearing 615 Roulement
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
629 Schutzring 629 Protector ring 629 Anneau de protection
630 Passfeder 630 Key 630 Clavette
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
632 Wellendichtring 632 Radial shaft seal 632 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
633 Wellendichtring 633 Radial shaft seal 633 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
634 Sicherungsring 634 Circlip 634 Circlip
637 Stützscheibe 637 Support disc 637 Rondelle d’appui
639 Passscheibe 639 Shim 639 Rondelle d’ajustage
646 O-Ring 646 O-ring 646 Joint torique
647 Dichtscheibe 647 Sealing washer 647 Rondelle d’étanchéité
648 Passfeder 648 Key 648 Clavette
649 Distanzbuchse 649 Spacer 649 Douille entretoise
650 Sicherungsring 650 Circlip 650 Circlip
654 Nilosring 654 Nilos ring 654 Bague Nilos
655 Wellendichtring 655 Radial shaft seal 655 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
656 Wellendichtring 656 Radial shaft seal 656 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
659 Lagerdeckel 659 Bearing cover 659 Couvercle du palier
660 Dichtung 660 Seal 660 Bague d’étanchéité
661 Schraube 661 Screw 661 Vis
665 Lagerdeckel 665 Bearing cover 665 Couvercle du palier
666 Dichtung 666 Seal 666 Bague d’étanchéité
667 Schraube 667 Screw 667 Vis
675 Ölablaufbuchse 675 Oil drain bush 675 Douille d’évacuation d’huile
678 Sicherungsring 678 Circlip 678 Circlip
679 Stützscheibe 679 Support disc 679 Rondelle d’appui
1400 Baugruppe Schrumpfscheibe 1400 Module shrink disc 1400 Module frette de serrage

www.nord.com PL1021 37
 SK 10382.1
SK 11382.1 Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Abtriebswelle VL 3 - Flachgetriebe
Abtriebswelle
Output shaft VL3 - Parallel / Output shaft
Shaft Gear Unit
Arbre de sortie VL3 - Reducteurs à arbres paralléles
Flachgetriebe VL3 Parallel Shaft Gearbox VL3
SK 10382.1, SK 11382.1

655
615
620
648
435
433 660 1400
434
432 661 656
EB 8109001E #2

430 633
400 646 649

600
629

639 659
632
604
647 630
635 605 657
636 658
440 410
631 465
436 420
675
610
637
634
446

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet

38
nach
PL1021
Drawn
18.10.2016 SieversE 810 9001 -www.nord.com
E
Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
beachten 18.10.2016 Dr. Petersen Seite von Blatt
 SK 10382.1
SK 11382.1

DE EN FR
400 Flansch 400 Flange 400 Bride
410 Schraube 410 Screw 410 Vis
420 Stifte 420 Pins 420 Goupilles
430 Dichtung 430 Seal 430 Bague d’étanchéité
432 Schmiernippel 432 Lubricating nipple 432 Graisseur
433 Ölstandsanzeige 433 Oil level indicator 433 Niveau d’huile
434 Reduzierung 434 Reducer 434 Réduction
435 Dichtung 435 Seal 435 Bague d’étanchéité
436 Verschlussstopfen 436 Sealing plug 436 Bague d’étanchéité
440 Dichtringflansch 440 Sealing ring flange 440 Bride de joint d’étanchéité
446 Schraube 446 Screw 446 Vis
465 Schraube 465 Screw 465 Vis
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
604 Passscheibe 604 Shim 604 Rondelle d’ajustage
605 Passscheibe 605 Shim 605 Rondelle d’ajustage
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Roulement
615 Wälzlager 615 Roller bearing 615 Roulement
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
629 Schutzring 629 Protector ring 629 Anneau de protection
630 Passfeder 630 Key 630 Clavette
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
632 Wellendichtring 632 Radial shaft seal 632 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
633 Wellendichtring 633 Radial shaft seal 633 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
634 Sicherungsring 634 Circlip 634 Circlip
635 Passscheibe 635 Shim 635 Rondelle d’ajustage
636 Passscheibe 636 Shim 636 Rondelle d’ajustage
637 Stützscheibe 637 Support disc 637 Rondelle d’appui
639 Passscheibe 639 Shim 639 Rondelle d’ajustage
646 O-Ring 646 O-ring 646 Joint torique
647 Dichtscheibe 647 Sealing washer 647 Rondelle d’étanchéité
648 Passfeder 648 Key 648 Clavette
649 Distanzbuchse 649 Spacer 649 Douille entretoise
655 Wellendichtring 655 Radial shaft seal 655 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
656 Wellendichtring 656 Radial shaft seal 656 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
657 Verschlusskappe 657 Sealing cap 657 Bouchon
658 Verschlusskappe 658 Sealing cap 658 Bouchon
659 Lagerdeckel 659 Bearing cover 659 Couvercle du palier
660 Dichtung 660 Seal 660 Bague d’étanchéité
661 Schraube 661 Screw 661 Vis
675 Ölablaufbuchse 675 Oil drain bush 675 Douille d’évacuation d’huile
1400 Baugruppe Schrumpfscheibe 1400 Module shrink disc 1400 Module frette de serrage

www.nord.com PL1021 39
 SK 1282 - SK 9282
SK 1382 - SK 9382

Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Abtriebswelle VL 4 - Flachgetriebe
Output shaft VL4 - Parallel Shaft Gear Unit
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS
Arbre de sortie - Reducteurs à arbres paralléles
Abtriebswelle Flachgetriebe VL4 / Output shaft Parallel Shaft Gearb. VL4
1400
SK 1282 - SK 9282 656
SK 1382 - SK 9382 615
648
620
618
632 619
694
463
462 655
432 687
430
400 600
410
EB 8429220E #1

420 685 616

642
610 617
603 693
670
680

466
465
634
639 637
604 640
605 1400
602 656
610 688
631 637 654 689
604 648
602 605 620
617
618
630 646 619 655
430 462 694 687
635 639
400 432 463 615
636 640
634 420 685 600
603 410
635 616
634 636 693 632
690 680
603
681
631 670
631

610 463
646 462
604 637
602 605
630

690

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
40 Schutzvermerk PL1021 www.nord.com
Gezeichnet
nach
Drawn
18.10.2016 SieversE 842 9220 - E
 SK 1282 - SK 9282
SK 1382 - SK 9382

DE EN FR
400 Flansch 400 Flange 400 Bride
410 Schraube 410 Screw 410 Vis
420 Stifte 420 Pins 420 Goupilles
430 Dichtung 430 Seal 430 Bague d’étanchéité
432 Schmiernippel 432 Lubricating nipple 432 Graisseur
462 Schraube 462 Screw 462 Vis
463 Dichtung 463 Seal 463 Bague d’étanchéité
465 Schraube 465 Screw 465 Vis
466 Dichtung 466 Seal 466 Bague d’étanchéité
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
602 Sicherungsring 602 Circlip 602 Circlip
603 Stützscheibe 603 Support disc 603 Rondelle d’appui
604 Passscheibe 604 Shim 604 Rondelle d’ajustage
605 Passscheibe 605 Shim 605 Rondelle d’ajustage
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Roulement
615 Wälzlager 615 Roller bearing 615 Roulement
616 Lager 616 Bearing 616 Palier
617 Sicherungsring 617 Circlip 617 Circlip
618 Passscheibe 618 Shim 618 Rondelle d’ajustage
619 Passscheibe 619 Shim 619 Rondelle d’ajustage
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
630 Passfeder 630 Key 630 Clavette
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
632 Wellendichtring 632 Radial shaft seal 632 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
634 Distanzbuchse 634 Spacer 634 Douille entretoise
635 Passscheibe 635 Shim 635 Rondelle d’ajustage
636 Passscheibe 636 Shim 636 Rondelle d’ajustage
637 Stützscheibe 637 Support disc 637 Rondelle d’appui
639 Passscheibe 639 Shim 639 Rondelle d’ajustage
640 Passscheibe 640 Shim 640 1 Rondelle d’ajustage
642 Nilosring 642 Nilos ring 642 Bague Nilos
646 O-Ring 646 O-ring 646 Joint torique
648 Passfeder 648 Key 648 Clavette
654 Nilosring 654 Nilos ring 654 Bague Nilos
655 Wellendichtring 655 Radial shaft seal 655 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
656 Wellendichtring 656 Radial shaft seal 656 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
670 Lagerbuchse 670 Bearing bush 670 Douille de palier
680 Verschlusskappe 680 Sealing cap 680 Bouchon
681 Stützscheibe 681 Support disc 681 Rondelle d’appui
685 Nutmutter 685 Slotted nut 685 Écrou à encoches
687 Sicherungsring 687 Circlip 687 Circlip
688 Passscheibe 688 Shim 688 Rondelle d’ajustage
689 Passscheibe 689 Shim 689 Rondelle d’ajustage
690 Einsteckwelle 690 Plug-in shaft 690 Arbre de sortie plein
693 O-Ring 693 O-ring 693 Joint torique
694 Steigrohr 694 Standpipe 694 Tuyau montant
1400 Baugruppe Schrumpfscheibe 1400 Module shrink disc 1400 Module frette de serrage

www.nord.com PL1021 41
 Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
SK 10282, SK 10382
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS

SK 11282, SK 11382
SKAbtriebswelle
12382 Flachgetriebe VL4 / Ouput shaft Parallel Shaft Gear VL4
SK 10282, SK 10382
SK 11282, SK 11382
Abtriebswelle VL 4 - Flachgetriebe
SK 12382
Output shaft VL4 - Parallel Shaft Gear Unit
Arbre de sortie - Reducteurs à arbres paralléles

1400
665
688 655
689
615
648

616
659
632
680
694
680 667
463
462 656
EB 8939220E #1

432 626
430
600
400
620
646
670 627
661
641 681
635 603 693
636 685
446 676
664
465 410
466 420
436
610
637
634
440
631 630 690

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet
nach
Drawn
18.10.2016 SieversE 893 9220 - E
Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
42 beachten PL1021 18.10.2016 Dr. Petersen www.nord.com
Seite von Blatt
State Changes Date Name Checked Page 1 from 1 Page
 SK 10282, SK 10382
SK 11282, SK 11382
SK 12382

DE EN FR
400 Flansch 400 Flange 400 Bride
410 Schraube 410 Screw 410 Vis
420 Stifte 420 Pins 420 Goupilles
430 Dichtung 430 Seal 430 Bague d’étanchéité
432 Schmiernippel 432 Lubricating nippel 432 Graisseur
436 Verschlussstopfen 436 Sealing plug 436 Vis de fermeture
440 Dichtungsflansch 440 Sealing flange 440 Bride d‘étanchéité
446 Schraube 446 Screw 446 Vis
462 Schraube 462 Screw 462 Vis
463 Dichtung 463 Seal 463 Bague d’étanchéité
465 Schraube 465 Screw 465 Vis
466 Dichtung 466 Seal 466 Bague d’étanchéité
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Seal Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
603 Stützscheibe 603 Support disc 603 Rondelle d’appui
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Roulement
615 Wälzlager 615 Roller bearing 615 Roulement
616 Lager 616 Bearing 616 Palier
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
626 Stützscheibe 626 Support disc 626 Rondelle d’appui
627 Stützscheibe 627 Support disc 627 Rondelle d’appui
630 Passfeder 630 Key 630 Clavette
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
632 Wellendichtring 632 Radial shaft seal 632 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
634 Distanzbuchse 634 Spacer 634 Douille entretoise
635 Passscheibe 635 Shim 635 Rondelle d’ajustage
636 Passscheibe 636 Shim 636 Rondelle d’ajustage
637 Stützscheibe 637 Support disc 637 Rondelle d’appui
641 Stützscheibe 641 Support disc 641 Rondelle d’appui
646 O-Ring 646 O-Ring 646 Tuyau montant
648 Passfeder 648 Key 648 Clavette
655 Wellendichtring 655 Radial shaft seal 655 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
656 Wellendichtring 656 Radial shaft seal 656 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
659 Lagerdeckel 659 Bearing cover 659 Couvercle du palier
661 Schraube 661 Screw 661 Vis
664 Schraube 664 Screw 664 Vis
665 Lagerdeckel 665 Bearing cover 665 Couvercle du palier
667 Schraube 667 Screw 667 Vis
670 Lagerbuchse 670 Bearing bush 670 Douille de palier
676 Lagerdeckel 676 Bearing cover 676 Couvercle du palier
680 Verschlusskappe 680 Sealing cap 680 Bouchon
681 Stützscheibe 681 Support disc 681 Rondelle d’appui
685 Nutmutter 685 Slotted nut 685 Écrou à encoches
688 Passscheibe 688 Shim 688 Rondelle d’ajustage
689 Passscheibe 689 Shim 689 Rondelle d’ajustage
690 Einsteckwelle 690 Plug-in shaft 690 Arbre de sortie plein
693 O-Ring 693 O-ring 693 Joint torique
694 Steigrohr 694 Standpipe 694 Tuyau montant
1400 Baugruppe Schrumpfscheibe 1400 Module shrink disc 1400 Module frette de serrage

www.nord.com PL1021 43
 SK 2382 - SK 5382

Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Anbaugehäuse für Flachgetriebe
Add-on housing for Parallel Shaft Gear Unit
Boîtier troisième train pour réducteurs à arbres paralléles
Anbaugehäuse / Third reduction gearcase

1121
1136 1142
1161 1143
1144
1120
1140 1139
1141
1138
1163 1111 1143
1164 1144
1136
EB 5089006E3 #1

1160 1161
1133
1120
1137 1142
1121
1131 1111
1163
1130 1164
1134
1135
1132 325
1160 326
1100
1110

1011
1012

900 1010
911

1000 1014
1013

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com

344
Text entf., Aktu. 17.10.17 ESie PL1021
Datum / Date Name / Name www.nord.com
Schutzvermerk
Teile hinzug./geänd.
2 910 25.05.16 ESie Gezeichnet
entf. nach 17.11.2008 SieversE
 SK 2382 - SK 5382

DE EN FR
325 Schraube 325 Screw 325 Vis
326 Federring 326 Lock washer 326 Rondelle élastique
900 Antriebsritzel 900 Driving pinion 900 Pignon d’entrée
911 Sicherungsring 911 Circlip 911 Circlip
1000 Anbaugehäuse 1000 Add-on housing 1000 Carter
1010 Motordichtung 1010 Seal 1010 Joint moteur
1011 Schraube 1011 Screw 1011 Vis
1012 Federring 1012 Lock washer 1012 Rondelle élastique
1013 Schraube 1013 Screw 1013 Vis
1014 Dichtring 1014 Seal 1014 Bague d’étanchéité
1100 Zwischenwelle 1100 Intermediate shaft 1100 Vis
1110 Antriebsritzel 1110 Driving pinion 1110 Arbre de pignon
1111 Antriebsrad 1111 Drive gear 1111 Pignon d’entrée
1120 Wälzlager 1120 Roller bearing 1120 Roulement
1121 Wälzlager 1121 Roller bearing 1121 Roulement
1130 Sicherungsring 1130 Circlip 1130 Circlip
1131 Passfeder 1131 Key 1131 Clavette
1132 Sicherungsring 1132 Circlip 1132 Circlip
1133 Sicherungsring 1133 Circlip 1133 Circlip
1134 Passscheibe 1134 Shim 1134 Rondelle d’ajustage
1135 Passscheibe 1135 Shim 1135 Rondelle d’ajustage
1136 Buchse 1136 Socket 1136 Douille
1137 Passfeder 1137 Key 1137 Clavette
1138 Sicherungsring 1138 Circlip 1138 Circlip
1139 Buchse 1139 Circlip 1139 Circlip
1140 Passscheibe 1140 Shim 1140 Rondelle d’ajustage
1141 Passscheibe 1141 Shim 1141 Rondelle d’ajustage
1142 Sicherungsring 1142 Circlip 1142 Circlip
1143 Passscheibe 1143 Shim 1143 Rondelle d’ajustage
1144 Passscheibe 1144 Shim 1144 Rondelle d’ajustage
1160 Sicherungsring 1160 Circlip 1160 Circlip
1161 Sicherungsring 1161 Circlip 1161 Circlip
1163 Passscheibe 1163 Shim 1163 Rondelle d’ajustage
1164 Passscheibe 1164 Shim 1164 Rondelle d’ajustage

www.nord.com PL1021 45
 Spare Parts Drawing
SK 1282/02 + 03 - SK 5282/12 + 13
SK 1282.1/02
SK
SK
Doppelgetriebe / Double Gear Unit
6382/22 + 23 - SK 11382/52 + 53
10382.1/5
SK 11382.1/53

Doppelgetriebe für Flachgetriebe

Double gear unit for Parallel Shaft Gear Unit
Réducteur double pour engrenages cylindriques

650
652 325
620 653 326
615
670
634
635
636

900
650
EB 5069014E3 #1

620
643
644
105
610
602 652 911
648 653
615
638
604 642
605
631
600
110 338 737 753 740
111 339 710 744
140 141 745
711
701
320 732 700
321 100
131
130
121
120
730

310
332
334
300

46 PL1021 www.nord.com
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG
 SK 1282/02 + 03 - SK 5282/12 + 13
SK 1282.1/02
SK 6382/22 + 23 - SK 11382/52 + 53
SK 10382.1/5
SK 11382.1/53

DE EN FR
100 Gehäuse 100 Housing 100 Boîtier
105 Dichtung 105 Seal 105 Bague d’étanchéité
110 Schraube 110 Screw 110 Vis
111 Dichtung 111 Seal 111 Bague d’étanchéité
120 Schraube 120 Screw 120 Vis
121 Dichtung 121 Seal 121 Bague d’étanchéité
130 Schraube 130 Screw 130 Vis
131 Dichtung 131 Seal 131 Bague d’étanchéité
140 Schraube 140 Screw 140 Vis
141 Dichtung 141 Seal 141 Bague d’étanchéité
300 Getriebedeckel 300 Gear unit cover 300 Couvercle du réducteur
310 Dichtung 310 Seal 310 Bague d’étanchéité
320 Schraube 320 Screw 320 Vis
321 Federring 321 Lock washer 321 Rondelle élastique
325 Schraube 325 Screw 325 Vis
326 Federring 326 Lock washer 326 Rondelle élastique
332 Schraube 332 Screw 332 Vis
334 Dichtung 334 Seal 334 Bague d’étanchéité
338 Schraube 338 Screw 338 Vis
339 Federring 339 Lock washer 339 Rondelle élastique
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
602 Sicherungsring 602 Circlip 602 Circlip
604 Passscheibe 604 Shim 604 Rondelle d’ajustage
605 Passscheibe 605 Shim 605 Rondelle d’ajustage
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Roulement
615 Wälzlager 615 Roller bearing 615 Roulement
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d’étanchéité de l’arbre
634 Sicherungsring 634 Circlip 634 Circlip
635 Passscheibe 635 Shim 635 Rondelle d’ajustage
636 Passscheibe 636 Shim 636 Rondelle d’ajustage
638 Sicherungsring 638 Circlip 638 Circlip
642 Nilosring 642 Nilos ring 642 Bague Nilos
643 Distanzbuchse 643 Spacer 643 Douille entretoise
644 Distanzbuchse 644 Spacer 644 Douille entretoise
648 Passfeder 648 Key 648 Clavette
650 Sicherungsring 650 Circlip 650 Circlip
652 Passscheibe 652 Shim 652 Rondelle d’ajustage
653 Passscheibe 653 Shim 653 Rondelle d’ajustage
670 Lagerbuchse 670 Roller bearing bush 670 Douille de palier
700 Ritzelwelle 700 Pinion shaft 700 Arbre de pignon
701 Antriebsrad 701 Drive gear 701 Roue d’entrée
710 Wälzlager 710 Roller bearing 710 Roulement
711 Wälzlager 711 Roller bearing 711 Roulement
730 Verschlusskappe 730 Sealing cap 730 Bouchon
732 Sicherungsring 732 Circlip 732 Circlip
737 Passfeder 737 Key 737 Clavette
740 Sicherungsring 740 Circlip 740 Circlip
744 Passscheibe 744 Shim 744 Rondelle d’ajustage
745 Passscheibe 745 Shim 745 Rondelle d’ajustage
753 Buchse 753 Socket 753 Douille
900 Antriebsritzel 900 Driving pinion 900 Pignon d’entrée
911 Sicherungsring 911 Circlip 911 Circlip

www.nord.com PL1021 47
Bestellangaben
Order details
Informations de commande

Kontaktdaten / Contact details / Contacts:

Getriebebau NORD
Firma / Company / Entreprise:
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1
D-22941 Bargteheide
Straße / Street / Rue
Telefon +49(0) 4532/289-0
PLZ / Postcode/
Telefax +49(0) 4532/289-2253
Stadt / Town / Ville: Code postal: E-Mail [email protected]
www.nord.com

Telefon / Telephone / Téléphone:

Fax:

E-mail:

DE EN FR

Diese NORD Ersatzteilliste beinhaltet This NORD spare parts list contains Cette liste de pièces de rechange
eine standardisierte Darstellung a standardised depiction of NORD NORD contient une représentation
der NORD Getriebe. Um Ihnen gear units. In order to enable you standard des réducteurs NORD.
das Finden und Nachbestellen von to find and re-order replacement Pour faciliter la recherche et la
Ersatzteilen zu erleichtern, finden parts more easily, you can find an commande de pièces de rechange,
Sie am Ende der Ersatzteilliste order form and important information un formulaire de commande se
ein Bestellformular mit wichtigen regarding the identification of the trouve à la fin de la liste des pièces
Hinweisen zur Bestimmung der correct components at the end of de rechange et vous donne toutes
richtigen Teile. this spare parts list. les informations essentielles pour
déterminer les pièces dont vous
Für Rückfragen stehen wir Ihnen We will be glad to help you if you avez besoin.
gerne zur Verfügung. Ihren lokalen have any queries: You can find your
Ansprechpartner finden Sie unter local contact partner under http://lo- En cas de questions, n’hésitez pas à
http://locator.nord.com. cator.nord.com. nous contacter. Pour connaître votre
interlocuteur local, veuillez consulter
le site http://locator.nord.com.

48 PL1021 www.nord.com
 Bestellangaben
Order details
Informations de commande

Erläuterung des Typenschildes

Explanation of the rating plate
Explication de la plaque signalétique

 
 

DE EN FR
1 Matrix – Barcode 1 Matrix – Barcode 1 Code matriciel, à barres
2 NORD - Getriebetyp 2 NORD gear unit type 2 Type de réducteur NORD
3 Betriebsart 3 Operating mode 3 Mode de fonctionnement
4 Herstellungsjahr 4 Year of manufacture 4 Année de fabrication
5 Fabrikationsnummer 5 Serial number 5 Numéro de série
6 Nenndrehmoment der 6 Rated torque of gear unit output 6 Couple nominal de l’arbre de sortie
Getriebeabtriebswelle shaft du réducteur
7 Antriebsleistung 7 Drive power 7 Puissance d’entraînement
8 Gewicht entsprechend 8 Weight according to ordered version 8 Poids selon l’exécution du contrat
Auftragsausführung 9 Overall gear unit ratio 9 Rapport de réduction total
9 Gesamte Getriebeübersetzung 10 Installation orientation 10 Position de montage
10 Einbaulage 11 Rated speed of gear unit output shaft 11 Vitesse de rotation nominale de
11 Nenndrehzahl der 12 Lubricant type, l’arbre de sortie du réducteur
Getriebeabtriebswelle viscosity and quantity 12 Type de lubrifiant,
12 Schmierstoffart, 13 Customer’s part number viscosité et quantité
-viskosität und –menge 14 Operating factor 13 Numéro d’article client
13 Kundenmaterialnummer 14 Facteur de service
14 Betriebsfaktor

Ersatzteil-Bestellung / Replacement parts order / Commande de pièces de rechange:

Bezeichnung / Designation / Désignation: Pos.-Nr. / Item No. / N° pos :

Stückzahl / Pieces / Quantité: Getriebetyp / Gear unit type / Type de réducteur:

Fabrikationsnummer / Serial No. / Numéro de série:

www.nord.com PL1021 49
Notizen
Notes
Notes

50 PL1021 www.nord.com
 Notizen
Notes
Notes

www.nord.com PL1021 51
Intelligent Drivesystems, Worldwide Services

NORD DRIVESYSTEMS Group

Headquarters and Technology Centre
in Bargteheide, close to Hamburg
Innovative drive solutions
for more than 100 branches of industry
Mechanical products
parallel shaft, helical gear, bevel gear and worm gear units
Electrical products
IE2/IE3/IE4 motors
Electronic products
centralised and decentralised frequency inverters,
motor starters and field distribution systems
7 state-of-the-art production plants
for all drive components
Subsidiaries and sales partners
in 98 countries on 5 continents
provide local stocks, assembly, production,
technical support and customer service
More than 4,000 employees throughout the world
create customer oriented solutions
www.nord.com/locator

Headquarters:
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG
Mat.Nr. 6001999 / 3420

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1
22941 Bargteheide, Germany
Fon.: +49 (0) 4532 / 289 - 0
Fax: +49 (0) 4532 / 289 - 2253
Member of the NORD DRIVESYSTEMS Group
Intelligent Drivesystems, Worldwide Services

DE EN FR

PL1080
Ersatzteilkatalog Anbauoptionen
Spare part catalogue for attachment options
Catalogue des pièces de rechange : options de montage
Inhaltsübersicht
Table Of Contents
Sommaire

Allgemeine Ersatzteile
General parts list
Vues éclatées et nomenclature

W-Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
W-Adapter
Lanterne W

IEC/NEMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9

AI/AN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11

Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 13

Motorkonsole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 15
Motor bracket
Console moteur

Ölausgleichsbehälter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 17
Oil expansion tank
Vase d’expansion d’huile

Ölstandsbehälter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 19
Oil storage tank
Angle de commande d‘huile

Ölkontrollwinkel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 21
Oil-monitoring elbow
Vase d’expansion d’huile

Ölkontrolldeckel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 23
Oil control cover
Couvercle de commande huile

2 PL1080 www.nord.com
 Inhaltsübersicht
Table Of Contents
Sommaire

Allgemeine Ersatzteile
General parts list
Vues éclatées et nomenclature

Ölkühler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 23
Oil cooler
Refroidisseur d‘huile

Wasserkühler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 - 25
Water cooler
Refroidisseur d‘eau

Taconite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 - 27

Gripmaxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 - 29

Screw Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 - 33

Bestellangaben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 - 35
Order details
Informations de commande

Alu-Anbauten siehe auch Ersatzteilkatalog

PL1035 Universal-Schneckengetriebe
For aluminium attachments see also spare part catalogue
PL1035 Universal worm gear units

Pour les montages alu, voir également le catalogue de

pièces de rechange du réducteur à vis sans fin Universal
PL1035

www.nord.com PL1080 3
 W-Adapter
W-Adapter
Lanterne W
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare
SK 0, SK 01, SK 20, SK 25, SK 30, SK 33
SK 010, SK 200, SK 250, SK 300, SK 330
Parts Drawing
SK 11 E - SK 51 E / SK 02 - SK 62 / SK 03 - SK 63
SK 0182 NB - SK 1382 NB / SK 1282 - SK 5282 / SK 2382 - SK 6382
SK 02040 - SK 42125 / SK 13050 - SK 43125
SK 071.1 - SK 972.1 / SK 373.1 - SK 973.1
W-Adapter / W-Adaptor
SK 2S40, SK 2S50, SK 2S63, SK 2S75
SK 62 - SK 72 / SK 73 - SK 93
SK 6282 - SK 7282 / SK 7382 - SK 9382
SK 82 - SK 102 / SK 103
SK 8282 - SK 9282
SK 9072.1 - SK 9092.1 / SK 9096.1
SK 10382.1, SK 11382.1, SK 12382

1321 1245
1311 910 1230
1331 1330 910 1321
1332 900 1310 1305 1346
1311
EB 508 9014 E3 #1

1333 1305
1300 1311 1305 1231
1330 1227 1380 1232
900 910
1345 1321 1210 1321
1310 1356
1228 1300 1330 1234
1332 911 1356 1235 1357
1320 1333 1357 1311
1310
911 1312 1305
1200 910
1227 1240 1300
1200 1241 1320 911
1332 1310
1333 1330
900
1346
1227 1245
1348
1320
1200 1228
1300
1200
900
1331
1332
1333
1227
1228
1230
1231 1238

1228
1237

4 PL1080 www.nord.com
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
 W-Adapter
W-Adapter
Lanterne W

DE GB FR

900 Antriebsritzel 900 Drive pinion 900 Pignon d'entrée

910 Passfeder 910 Key 910 Clavette
911 Sicherungsring 911 Circlip 911 Circlip
1200 Gehäuse 1200 Housing 1200 Carter
1210 Dichtung 1210 Gasket 1210 Bague d'étanchéité
1227 Schraube 1227 Screw 1227 Vis
1228 Federring 1228 Lock washer 1228 Rondelle élastique
1230 Deckel 1230 Lid 1230 Couvercle
1231 Schraube 1231 Screw 1231 Vis
1232 Federring 1232 Lock washer 1232 Rondelle élastique
1234 Passscheibe 1234 Shim 1234 Rondelles d'ajustage
1235 Passscheibe 1235 Shim 1235 Rondelles d'ajustage
1237 Schraube 1237 Screw 1237 Vis
1238 Mutter 1238 Nut 1238 mère
1240 Schraube 1240 Screw 1240 Vis
1241 Dichtung 1241 Gasket 1241 Bague d'étanchéité
1245 Schmiernippel 1245 Lubricating nipple 1245 Graisseur
1300 Antriebswelle 1300 Drive shaft 1300 Arbre d'entréé
1305 Passfeder 1305 Key 1305 Clavette
1310 Wälzlager 1310 Roller bearing 1310 Palier
1311 Wälzlager 1311 Roller bearing 1311 Palier
1312 Wälzlager 1312 Roller bearing 1312 Palier
1320 Wellendichtring 1320 Radial shaft seal 1320 Bague d'étanchéité de l'arbre
1321 Wellendichtring 1321 Radial shaft seal 1321 Bague d'étanchéité de l'arbre
1330 Sicherungsring 1330 Circlip 1330 Circlip
1331 Sicherungsring 1331 Circlip 1331 Circlip
1332 Passscheibe 1332 Shim 1332 Rondelles d'ajustage
1333 Passscheibe 1333 Shim 1333 Rondelles d'ajustage
1345 Sicherungsring 1345 Circlip 1345 Circlip
1346 Sicherungsring 1346 Circlip 1346 Circlip
1348 Stützscheibe 1348 Supporting disc 1348 Rondelle support
1356 Passscheibe 1356 Shim 1356 Rondelles d'ajustage
1357 Passscheibe 1357 Shim 1357 Rondelles d'ajustage
1380 Gammaring 1380 Gamma ring 1380 Déflecteur

www.nord.com PL1080 5
 W-Adapter
W-Adapter Ersatzteilzeichnung
Lanterne W Spare Parts Drawing
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS
W0 - WIV
W0 - WIV Adapter / W0 - WIV Adaptor

1231
1232
1230
1346 1380
1311
1312
1305 1234
1235
910
1356
1330
1357
900
1227 1362
1228 1340
1300
1310 1356 1380
1357
EB 526 9054 E1 #1

1200 1320
911 1340

1346
1311
1339
1230
1332
1333

1381
1231 1380
1232

1311
1332
1333

1241
1240

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
6 Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet
PL1080 www.nord.com

1 1227, 1228
1332, 1333, 1381 03.11.16 ESie
nach
Drawn
06.06.2014 SieversE 526 9054 - E 1
 W-Adapter
W-Adapter
Lanterne W

DE GB FR

900 Antriebsritzel 900 Drive pinion 900 Pignon d'entrée

910 Passfeder 910 Key 910 Clavette
911 Sicherungsring 911 Circlip 911 Circlip
1200 Gehäuse 1200 Housing 1200 Carter
1227 Schraube 1227 Screw 1227 Vis
1228 Federring 1228 Lock washer 1228 Rondelle élastique
1230 Deckel 1230 Lip 1230 Couvercle
1231 Schraube 1231 Screw 1231 Vis
1232 Federring 1232 Lock washer 1232 Rondelle élastique
1234 Passscheibe 1234 Shim 1234 Rondelles d'ajustage
1235 Passscheibe 1235 Shim 1235 Rondelles d'ajustage
1240 Schraube 1240 Screw 1240 Vis
1241 Dichtung 1241 Gasket 1241 Bague d'étanchéité
1300 Antriebswelle 1300 Drive shaft 1300 Arbre d'entréé
1305 Passfeder 1305 Key 1305 Clavette
1310 Wälzlager 1310 Roller bearing 1310 Palier
1311 Wälzlager 1311 Roller bearing 1311 Palier
1312 Wälzlager 1312 Roller bearing 1312 Palier
1320 Wellendichtring 1320 Radial shaft seal 1320 Bague d'étanchéité de l'arbre
1330 Sicherungsring 1330 Circlip 1330 Circlip
1332 Passscheibe 1332 Shim 1332 Rondelles d'ajustage
1333 Passscheibe 1333 Shim 1333 Rondelles d'ajustage
1339 Abstandshülse 1339 Spacer bush 1339 Douille-entretoise
1340 Abstandshülse 1340 Spacer bush 1340 Douille-entretoise
1346 Sicherungsring 1346 Circlip 1346 Circlip
1356 Passscheibe 1356 Shim 1356 Rondelles d'ajustage
1357 Passscheibe 1357 Shim 1357 Rondelles d'ajustage
1362 Buchse 1362 Socket 1362 Douille
1380 Gammaring 1380 Gamma ring 1380 Déflecteur
1381 Scheibe 1381 Washer 1381 Rondelle

www.nord.com PL1080 7
 Ersatzteilzeichnung
IEC/NEMA Spare Parts Drawing
DRIVESYSTEM DRIVESYSTEM

IEC 63 - 112 / IEC 132 - 180 / IEC 160 - 315

IEC 63 - 112 / IEC 132 - 180 / IEC 160 - 315
NEMA 56C, 140TC, 180TC, 210TC, 250TC, 280TC, 320TC, 360TC, 400TSC
NEMA 56C, 140TC, 180TC, 210TC, 250TC, 280TC, 320TC, 360TC, 400TSC

1374
910
1347
1311 1375
1345 1374
1228 1327 1372
1227 1374 1354
900 1371 1355
1370 1250
1300 1253 1321
1200 1356
1357 1373
1375 1369
1349 1346
911 1373 910 1345
1350
1310 1320 1371
1320 1332
1231
1251 1333 1232
EB 507 9041 E1 #1

900
1241 1356 1230
1240 1357
1252
1349 1311
1350
911
1300
1310
1330

1260

1261
1262

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet

1 1227,1228,1262 korrig. 22.06.15 ESie

nach
Drawn
25.06.2014 SieversE 507 9041 - E 1
Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
beachten 25.06.2014 Hinkel Seite von Blatt
State Changes Date Name Checked Page 1 from 1 Page
8 PL1080 www.nord.com
 IEC/NEMA

DE GB FR
900 Antriebsritzel 900 Drive pinion 900 Pignon d'entrée
910 Passfeder 910 Key 910 Clavette
911 Sicherungsring 911 Circlip 911 Circlip
1200 Gehäuse 1200 Housing 1200 Carter
1227 Schraube 1227 Screw 1227 Vis
1228 Federring 1228 Lock washer 1228 Rondelle élastique
1230 Deckel 1230 Lip 1230 Couvercle
1231 Schraube 1231 Screw 1231 Vis
1232 Federring 1232 Lock washer 1232 Rondelle élastique
1240 Schraube 1240 Screw 1240 Vis
1241 Dichtung 1241 Gasket 1241 Bague d'étanchéité
1250 Schmierstoffkatusche 1250 Lubricant cartridge 1250 Cartouche de lubrifiant
1251 Schraube 1251 Screw 1251 Vis
1252 Abdeckung 1252 Cover 1252 Cache
1253 Verlängerung 1253 Extension 1253 Rallonge
1260 Zwischenflansche 1260 Intermediate flange 1260 Bride intermédiaire
1261 Schraube 1261 Screw 1261 Vis
1262 Federring 1262 Lock washer 1262 Rondelle élastique
1300 Antriebswelle 1300 Drive shaft 1300 Arbre d'entréé
1310 Wälzlager 1310 Roller bearing 1310 Palier
1311 Wälzlager 1311 Roller bearing 1311 Palier
1320 Wellendichtring 1320 Radial shaft seal 1320 Bague d'étanchéité de l'arbre
1321 Wellendichtring 1321 Radial shaft seal 1321 Bague d'étanchéité de l'arbre
1327 Sicherungsring 1327 Circlip 1327 Circlip
1330 Sicherungsring 1330 Circlip 1330 Circlip
1332 Passscheibe 1332 Shim 1332 Rondelles d'ajustage
1333 Passscheibe 1333 Shim 1333 Rondelles d'ajustage
1345 Sicherungsring 1345 Circlip 1345 Circlip
1346 Sicherungsring 1346 Circlip 1346 Circlip
1347 Sicherungsring 1347 Circlip 1347 Circlip
1349 Passscheibe 1349 Shim 1349 Rondelles d'ajustage
1350 Passscheibe 1350 Shim 1350 Rondelles d'ajustage
1354 Passscheibe 1354 Shim 1354 Rondelles d'ajustage
1355 Passscheibe 1355 Shim 1355 Rondelles d'ajustage
1356 Passscheibe 1356 Shim 1356 Rondelles d'ajustage
1357 Passscheibe 1357 Shim 1357 Rondelles d'ajustage
1369 Passfeder 1369 Key 1369 Clavette
1370 Kupplungsgehäuse 1370 Coupling housing 1370 Manchon d'accouplement
1371 Kupplungshälfte 1371 Half-coupling 1371 Demi-raccord
1372 Zahnkranz 1372 Ring gear 1372 Couronne dentée
1373 Kupplungshälfte 1373 Half-coupling 1373 Demi-raccord
1374 Schraube 1374 Screw 1374 Vis
1375 Buchse 1375 Socket 1375 Douille

www.nord.com PL1080 9
 AI/AN

AI160, AI180, AI200, AI225, AI250, AI280, AI315

AN250TC, AN280TC, AN320TC, AN360TC, AN400TC
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing

1220

1376
1374
1372
1371
1347
1311
1294 1295 1345
1352
1292 1245
1369 1375
1353
1293 910 1373
1346
EB 753 1290 E0 #1

1310
900 1356 1321
1387 1349 1357
1350 1376
1343
1358
911 1300 1260
1320 1374
1330
1372
1371
1200 1231
1227
1228 1347
1261
1297 1311
1240 1345
1358 1220
1373
1346
1321
1230
1356
1349 1357
1350
1343
1352

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet

0 31314 08.03.21 ESie

nach
Drawn
08.03.2021 SieversE 753 1290 - E 0
10 Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 PL1080
Kontrolliert
www.nord.com
beachten 08.03.2021 Herrmann Seite von Blatt
State Changes Date Name Checked Page 2 from 2 Page
 AI/AN

DE GB FR
900 Antriebsritzel 900 Drive pinion 900 Pignon d'entrée
910 Passfeder 910 Key 910 Clavette
911 Sicherungsring 911 Circlip 911 Circlip
1200 Gehäuse 1200 Housing 1200 Carter
1220 Schraube 1220 Screw 1220 Vis
1227 Schraube 1227 Screw 1227 Vis
1228 Federring 1228 Lock washer 1228 Rondelle élastique
1230 Deckel 1230 Lip 1230 Couvercle
1231 Schraube 1231 Screw 1231 Vis
1240 Schraube 1240 Screw 1240 Vis
1245 Schmiernippel 1245 Lubricating nipple 1245 Graisseur
1260 Zwischenflansche 1260 Intermediate flange 1260 Bride intermédiaire
1261 Schraube 1261 Screw 1261 Vis
1292 Klemmenkastendeckel 1292 Terminal box lid 1292 Couvercle de la boîte à bornes
1293 Dichtung 1293 Gasket 1293 Bague d'étanchéité
1294 Schraube 1294 Screw 1294 Vis
1295 Ölschraube 1295 oil screw 1295 Vis à huile
1300 Antriebswelle 1300 Drive shaft 1300 Arbre d'entréé
1310 Wälzlager 1310 Roller bearing 1310 Palier
1311 Wälzlager 1311 Roller bearing 1311 Palier
1320 Wellendichtring 1320 Radial shaft seal 1320 Bague d'étanchéité de l'arbre
1321 Wellendichtring 1321 Radial shaft seal 1321 Bague d'étanchéité de l'arbre
1330 Sicherungsring 1330 Circlip 1330 Circlip
1343 Dichtscheibe 1343 Sealing washer 1343 Rondelle d’appui
1345 Sicherungsring 1345 Circlip 1345 Circlip
1346 Sicherungsring 1346 Circlip 1346 Circlip
1347 Sicherungsring 1347 Circlip 1347 Circlip
1349 Passscheibe 1349 Shim 1349 Rondelles d'ajustage
1350 Passscheibe 1350 Shim 1350 Rondelles d'ajustage
1352 Rücklaufsperre 1352 Back stop 1352 Anti-devireur
1353 Passfeder 1353 Key 1353 Clavette
1356 Passscheibe 1356 Shim 1356 Rondelles d'ajustage
1357 Passscheibe 1357 Shim 1357 Rondelles d'ajustage
1358 Sicherungsring 1358 Circlip 1358 Circlip
1369 Passfeder 1369 Key 1369 Clavette
1371 Kupplungshälfte 1371 Half-coupling 1371 Demi-raccord
1372 Zahnkranz 1372 Ring gear 1372 Couronne dentée
1373 Kupplungshälfte 1373 Half-coupling 1373 Demi-raccord
1374 Schraube 1374 Screw 1374 Vis
1375 Buchse 1375 Socket 1375 Douille
1376 Passfeder 1376 Key 1376 Clavette
1387 Schalter/Sensor 1387 Switch/Sensor 1387 Changer/Capteur

www.nord.com PL1080 11
 Servo
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Servo 100/160 S, 130/160 S, 130/250 S, 165/160 S, DRIVESYSTEM
DRIVESYSTEM
165/250 S, 215/250 S, 215/300 S, 300/300 S, 300/350

Servo 100/160 S, 130/160 S, 130/250 S, 165/160 S,

165/250 S, 215/250 S, 215/300 S, 300/300 S, 300/350

1374
1372

1347

1311
1369 1373
910
1227
1310
1228 1371
EB 514 9021 E2 #1

900 1356
1357

1345
1300

1200 1320
911

1348

1336
1337
1241 1327
1240

1306
1336
1337
1327
1304

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
12
2 1227,1228 geänd. 23.06.15 ESie Gezeichnet PL1080 www.nord.com
1 Aktualisierung 21.10.14 ESie
nach
Drawn
06.06.2014 SieversE 514 9021 - E 2
ISO 16016
 Servo

DE GB FR

900 Antriebsritzel 900 Drive pinion 900 Pignon d'entrée

910 Passfeder 910 Key 910 Clavette
911 Sicherungsring 911 Circlip 911 Circlip
1200 Gehäuse 1200 Housing 1200 Carter
1227 Schraube 1227 Screw 1227 Vis
1228 Federring 1228 Lock washer 1228 Rondelle élastique
1240 Schraube 1240 Screw 1240 Vis
1241 Dichtung 1241 Gasket 1241 Bague d'étanchéité
1300 Antriebswelle 1300 Drive shaft 1300 Arbre d'entréé
1304 Stützscheibe 1304 Supporting disc 1304 Rondelle support
1306 Stützscheibe 1306 Supporting disc 1306 Rondelle support
1310 Wälzlager 1310 Roller bearing 1310 Palier
1311 Wälzlager 1311 Roller bearing 1311 Palier
1320 Wellendichtring 1320 Radial shaft seal 1320 Bague d'étanchéité de l'arbre
1327 Sicherungsring 1327 Circlip 1327 Circlip
1336 Passscheibe 1336 Shim 1336 Rondelles d'ajustage
1337 Passscheibe 1337 Shim 1337 Rondelles d'ajustage
1345 Sicherungsring 1345 Circlip 1345 Circlip
1347 Sicherungsring 1347 Circlip 1347 Circlip
1348 Stützscheibe 1348 Supporting disc 1348 Rondelle support
1356 Passscheibe 1356 Shim 1356 Rondelles d'ajustage
1357 Passscheibe 1357 Shim 1357 Rondelles d'ajustage
1369 Passfeder 1369 Key 1369 Clavette
1371 Kupplungshälfte 1371 Half-coupling 1371 Demi-raccord
1372 Zahnkranz 1372 Ring gear 1372 Couronne dentée
1373 Kupplungshälfte 1373 Half-coupling 1373 Demi-raccord
1374 Schraube 1374 Screw 1374 Vis

www.nord.com PL1080 13
 Motorkonsole
Motor bracket
Console moteur Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
MK I - MK V DRIVESYSTEMS
DRIVESYSTEMS
MK I - MK V

Motorkonsole MK I - MK V / Motor bracket MK I - MK V

1631
1630

1600

1620
EB 526 9052 E1 #1

1610

1635
1636

1634

1633

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
14 Gezeichnet PL1080 www.nord.com
1 Nr. korrigiert 15.09.14 ESie
nach
Drawn
20.06.2014 SieversE 526 9052 - E 1
ISO 16016
 Motorkonsole
Motor bracket
Console moteur

DE GB FR

1600 Motorkonsole 1600 Motor bracket 1600 Console moteur

1610 Halterung 1610 Holder 1610 Support
1620 Schraube 1620 Screw 1620 Vis
1630 Scheibe 1630 Washer 1630 Rondelle
1631 Schraube 1631 Screw 1631 Vis
1633 Schraube 1633 Screw 1633 Vis
1634 Federring 1634 Spring lock washer 1634 Rondelle élastique
1635 Schraube 1635 Screw 1635 Vis
1636 Federring 1636 Spring lock washer 1636 Rondelle élastique

www.nord.com PL1080 15
 Ölausgleichsbehälter
Oil expansion tank
Réservoir d’expansion d’huile

SK 42, SK 43, SK 52, SK 53, SK 62, SK 63, SK 72, SK 73, SK 82, SK 83, SK 92, SK 93, SK 102, SK 103
SK 4282, SK 4382, SK 5282, SK 5382, SK 6282, SK 638 2, SK 7282, SK 7382, SK 8282, SK8382
SK 9042.1, SK 9043.1, SK 9052.1, SK 9053.1, SK 9072 .1, SK 9082.1, SK 9086.1, SK 9092.1, SK 9096.1

1879
1878

1885

1870

1884

1886
1874
EB 283 9039 E3 #1

1873

1881
1882

16 PL1080 www.nord.com
 Ölausgleichsbehälter
Oil expansion tank
Réservoir d’expansion d’huile

DE GB FR

1870 Ölausgleichsbehälter 1870 Oil expansion chamber 1870 Réservoir d'expansion d'huile
1873 Schlauch 1873 Hose 1873 Tuyau
1874 Dichtung 1874 Seal 1874 Bague d'étanchéité
1878 Entlüftung 1878 Vent 1878 Évent
1879 Dichtung 1879 Seal 1879 Bague d'étanchéité
1881 Reduzierung 1881 Reducer 1881 Réduction
1882 Dichtung 1882 Seal 1882 Bague d'étanchéité
1884 Scheibe 1884 Washer 1884 Rondelle
1885 Schraube 1885 Screw 1885 Vis
1886 Scheibe 1886 Washer 1886 Rondelle

www.nord.com PL1080 17
 Ölstandsbehälter
Oil storage tank Ersatzteilzeichnung
Réservoir de niveau d’huile
Spare Parts Drawing
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS
SK 9282, SK 9382, SK 10382.1, SK 11382.1, SK 12382

Ölstandsbehälter / Oil reservoir tank

Größe I und II

1846 1840
1860 1845

1830

1866 1867
1865 1868
1850
EB 283 9046 E #1

1825 1810

1864
1836 1863
1835

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
3 Text geändert 18.09.17 ESie Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
2 Text SK... hinz. 23.06.16 ESie Gezeichnet

1 Aktualisierung 21.10.14 ESie

nach
Drawn
24.06.2014 SieversE 283 9046 - E 3
18 ISO 16016 PL1080 www.nord.com
Status Änderungen Datum Name Kontrolliert
beachten 24.06.2014 Hinkel Seite von Blatt
State Changes Date Name Checked Page 1 from 1 Page
 Ölstandsbehälter
Oil storage tank
Réservoir de niveau d’huile

DE GB FR

1810 Gehäuseentlüftung 1810 Housing vent 1810 Évent de carter

1825 Halterung 1825 Holder 1825 Support
1830 Ölstandsbehälter 1830 Oil level vessel 1830 Vase d‘expansion d‘huile
1835 Mutter 1835 Nut 1835 Écrou
1836 Scheibe 1836 Washer 1836 Rondelle
1840 Entlüftungsdeckel 1840 Ventilation cover 1840 Couvercle d‘évent
1845 Entlüftungsschraube 1845 Standard vent plug 1845 Vis d‘évent
1846 Dichtung 1846 Gasket 1846 Bague d’étanchéité
1850 Baugruppe 1850 Module 1850 Module
1860 Baugruppe 1860 Module 1860 Module
1863 Reduzierung 1863 Reducer 1863 Réduction
1864 Dichtung 1864 Gasket 1864 Bague d’étanchéité
1865 Reduzierung 1865 Reducer 1865 Réduction
1866 Dichtung 1866 Gasket 1866 Bague d’étanchéité
1867 Schraube 1867 Screw 1867 Vis
1868 Scheibe 1868 Washer 1868 Rondelle

www.nord.com PL1080 19
 Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
DRIVESYSTEMS Ölkontrollwinkel DRIVESYSTEMS

Oil-monitoring elbow
Angle de Ölkontrollwinkel
commande d‘huile / Oil-monitoring elbow
EB 283 9051 E1 #1

169

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet

Text entf. 21.09.17 ESie

nach
Drawn
23.06.2014 SieversE 283 9051 - E 1
Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
beachten 23.06.2014 Hinkel Seite von Blatt
Changes Date Name Checked Page 1 from 1 Page

20 PL1080 www.nord.com
 Ölkontrollwinkel
Oil-monitoring elbow
Angle de commande d‘huile

DE GB FR

169 Ölstandsanzeiger 169 Oil level indicator 169 Affichage du niveau d’huile

www.nord.com PL1080 21
 Ersatzteilzeichnung
Ölkontrolldeckel Spare Parts Drawing
Oil control cover
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS

Couvercle de commande huile

Ölkontrolldeckel / Oil-monitoring cover
EB 606 9065 E1 #1

940

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet

1 Text entf. 21.09.17 ESie

nach
Drawn
23.06.2014 SieversE 606 9065 - E 1
Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
beachten 23.06.2014 Hinkel Seite von Blatt
State Changes Date Name Checked Page 1 from 1 Page

22 PL1080 www.nord.com
 Ölkontrolldeckel
Oil control cover
Couvercle de commande huile

DE GB FR

940 Ölkontrolldeckel 940 Oil contol cover 940 couvercle de commande huile

www.nord.com PL1080 23
 Ersatzteilzeichnung
Ölkühler Spare Parts Drawing
Oil cooler
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS

Refroidisseur d‘huile
Ölkühler / Oil cooler
SK 62, SK 72, SK 82, SK 102, SK 63, SK 73, SK 73, S K 103
SK 6282, SK 7282, SK 8282, SK 11282, SK 6382, SK 73 82, SK 8382, SK 11382 SK 9072.1,
SK 9082.1, SK 9086.1, SK 9096.1

1700

1712

1711
EB 280 9249 E3 #1

1716

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com

3 Text entf. 21.09.17 ESie Datum / Date Name / Name

Schutzvermerk
2 Text SK ... hinzu. 23.06.16 ESie Gezeichnet

1 Aktualisierung 21.10.14 ESie

nach
Drawn
23.06.2014 SieversE 280 9249 - E 3
Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
beachten 23.06.2014 Hinkel Seite von Blatt
State Changes Date Name Checked Page 1 from 1 Page

24 PL1080 www.nord.com
 Ölkühler
Oil cooler
Refroidisseur d‘huile

DE GB FR

1700 Ölkühler 1700 Oil cooler 1700 Refroidisseur d‘huile

1711 Schlauchleitung 1711 Hose 1711 Câble souple
1712 Schlauchleitung 1712 Hose 1712 Câble souple
1716 Anschlusskopf Druckschalter 1716 Pressure switch connector head 1716 Extrémité de connexion pressostat

www.nord.com PL1080 25
 Wasserkühler
Water cooler
Refroidisseur d‘eau
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
SK 6282, SK 7282, SK 8282, SK 9282, SK 6382, SK 7382, SK 8382, SK9382,
DRIVESYSTEMS
SKDRIVESYSTEMS
10382.1, SK 11382.1, SK 12382
SK 9072.1, SK 9082.1, SK 9086.1, SK 9092.1, SK 9096.1
Wasserkühlung / Water-cooling
EB 894 9300 E1 #1

210

2965

230
243
242

241
240

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
26 Gezeichnet PL1080 www.nord.com
1 Text entf. 21.09.17 ESie
nach
Drawn
19.10.2016 SieversE 894 9300 - E 1
ISO 16016
 Wasserkühler
Water cooler
Refroidisseur d‘eau

DE GB FR

210 Dichtung 210 Seal 210 Bague d'étanchéité

230 Schraube 230 Screw 230 Vis
240 Schraube 240 Screw 240 Vis
241 Dichtung 241 Seal 241 Bague d'étanchéité
242 Schraube 242 Screw 242 Vis
243 Dichtung 243 Seal 243 Bague d'étanchéité
2965 Deckel 2965 Lid 2965 Couvercle

www.nord.com PL1080 27
 Taconite
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS

SK 9052.1, SK 9072.1, SK 9082.1, SK 9086.1, SK 9092 .1, SK 9096.1

Taconite / Taconite

409

407
408 411 416

406
EB 690 8215 E1 #1

415
421

420

403

401
410

402

404

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet

1 Text entf. 21.09.17 ESie

nach
Drawn
26.06.2014 SieversE 690 8215 - E 1
Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
28 beachten 26.06.2014
PL1080 Hinkel Seite www.nord.com
von Blatt
State Changes Date Name Checked Page 1 from 1 Page
 Taconite

DE GB FR

401 Labyrinthbuchse 401 Labyrinth bush 401 Douille à labyrinthe

402 Labyrinthbuchse 402 Labyrinth bush 402 Douille à labyrinthe
403 O-Ring 403 O-ring 403 Joint torique
404 Gewindestift 404 Screw pin 404 Vis sans tête
406 Labyrinthbuchse 406 Labyrinth bush 406 Douille à labyrinthe
407 Labyrinthbuchse 407 Labyrinth bush 407 Douille à labyrinthe
408 O-Ring 408 O-ring 408 Joint torique
409 Gewindestift 409 Screw pin 409 Vis sans tête
410 Schraube 410 Screw 410 Vis
411 Schraube 411 Screw 411 Vis
415 Schmiernippel 415 Lubricating nipple 415 Graisseur
416 Schmiernippel 416 Lubricating nipple 416 Graisseur
420 Stift 420 Pin 420 Goupille
421 Stift 421 Pin 421 Goupille

www.nord.com PL1080 29
 Gripmaxx
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS

Gripmaxx / Gripmaxx

609

1400
EB 842 9009 E1 #1

606

607

Restliche Getriebeteile siehe Ersatzteilkataloge

Remaining gear parts see Spare parts catalogues

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet

1 Aktualisierung 18.11.14 ESie

nach
Drawn
18.06.2014 SieversE 842 9009 - E 1
Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
30 beachten 18.06.2014
PL1080 Hinkel Seite www.nord.com
von Blatt
State Changes Date Name Checked Page 1 from 1 Page
 Gripmaxx

DE GB FR

606 Klemmring 606 Clamping ring 606 Bague de serrage

607 Klemmbuchse 607 Clamping bush 607 Douille de serrage
609 Klemmbuchse 609 Clamping bush 609 Douille de serrage
1400 Schrumpfscheibe 1400 Shrink disc 1400 Frette de serrage

www.nord.com PL1080 31
 Screw Conveyor Ersatzteilzeichnung
SCP Spare Parts Drawing

SK 1282 SCP - SK 6282 SCP

SK 1382 SCP - SK 6382 SCP
SK 9012.1 SCP - SK 9052.1 SCP
SK 9013.1 SCP - SK 9053.1 SCP

400

458
842 9210 E0 #1

459
696
696

1500

410

460

690

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet

0 30411 11.09.20 ESie

nach
Drawn
11.09.2020 SieversE 842 9210 - E 0
Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
beachten 11.09.2020 Weger
32
State Changes Date Name Checked PL1080 Seite
Page 2 www.nord.com
von
from 2
Blatt
Page
 Screw Conveyor
SCP

DE GB FR

400 Flansch 400 Flange 400 Bride

410 Schraube 410 Screw 410 Vis
458 Wellendichtring 458 Radial shaft seal 458 Bague d‘étanchéité de l‘arbre
459 Wellendichtring 459 Radial shaft seal 459 Bague d‘étanchéité de l‘arbre
460 Filzring 460 Felt ring 460 Bague en feutre
690 Einsteckwelle 690 Plug-in shaft 690 Arbre de sortie plein
696 Passfeder 696 Key 696 Clavette
1500 Baugruppe 1500 Modul fastening element 1500 Module élément de fixation
Befestigungselement

www.nord.com PL1080 33
 Ersatzteilzeichnung
Screw Conveyor Spare Parts Drawing
SC

SK 1282 SC - SK 9282 SC
SK 1382 SC - SK 9382 SC

400

470
842 9210 E+1 #1

696
696

1500

410

412

411

690

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet

0 30411 11.09.20 ESie

nach
Drawn
11.09.2020 SieversE 842 9210 - E+1 0
Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
34 beachten PL1080
11.09.2020 Weger Seite www.nord.com
von Blatt
State Changes Date Name Checked Page 2 from 2 Page
 Screw Conveyor
SC

DE GB FR

400 Flansch 400 Flange 400 Bride

410 Schraube 410 Screw 410 Vis
411 Schraube 411 Screw 411 Vis
412 Scheibe 412 Washer 412 Rondelle
470 Dichtungspaket 470 Seal package 470 Paquet d‘étanchéité
690 Einsteckwelle 690 Plug-in shaft 690 Arbre de sortie plein
696 Passfeder 696 Key 696 Clavette
1500 Baugruppe 1500 Modul fastening element 1500 Module élément de fixation
Befestigungselement

www.nord.com PL1080 35
Bestellangaben
Order details
Informations de commande

Kontaktdaten / Contact details / Contacts:

Getriebebau NORD
Firma / Company / Entreprise:
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1
D-22941 Bargteheide
Straße / Street / Rue Telefon +49(0) 4532/289-0
Telefax +49(0)4532/289-2253
PLZ / Postcode/
E-Mail [email protected]
Stadt / Town / Ville: Code postal: www.nord.com

Telefon / Telephone / Téléphone:

Fax:

E-mail:

DE GB FR

Diese NORD Ersatzteilliste beinhaltet This NORD spare parts list contains Cette liste de pièces de rechange
eine standardisierte Darstellung a standardised depiction of NORD NORD contient une représentation
der NORD Getriebe. Um Ihnen gear units. In order to enable you standard des réducteurs NORD.
das Finden und Nachbestellen von to find and re-order replacement Pour faciliter la recherche et la
Ersatzteilen zu erleichtern, finden parts more easily, you can find an commande de pièces de rechange,
Sie am Ende der Ersatzteilliste order form and important information un formulaire de commande se
ein Bestellformular mit wichtigen regarding the identification of the trouve à la fin de la liste des pièces
Hinweisen zur Bestimmung der correct components at the end of de rechange et vous donne toutes
richtigen Teile. this spare parts list. les informations essentielles pour
déterminer les pièces dont vous
Für Rückfragen stehen wir Ihnen We will be glad to help you if you avez besoin.
gerne zur Verfügung. Ihren lokalen have any queries: You can find your
Ansprechpartner finden Sie unter local contact partner under http://lo- En cas de questions, n’hésitez pas à
http://locator.nord.com. cator.nord.com. nous contacter. Pour connaître votre
interlocuteur local, veuillez consulter
le site http://locator.nord.com.

36 PL1080 www.nord.com
 Bestellangaben
Order details
Informations de commande

Erläuterung des Typenschildes

Explanation of the rating plate
Explication de la plaque signalétique

 
 

DE GB FR

1 Matrix – Barcode 1 Matrix – Barcode 1 Code matriciel, à barres

2 NORD - Getriebetyp 2 NORD gear unit type 2 Type de réducteur NORD
3 Betriebsart 3 Operating mode 3 Mode de fonctionnement
4 Herstellungsjahr 4 Year of manufacture 4 Année de fabrication
5 Fabrikationsnummer 5 Serial number 5 Numéro de série
6 Nenndrehmoment der 6 Rated torque of gear unit output 6 Couple nominal de l’arbre de sortie
Getriebeabtriebswelle shaft du réducteur
7 Antriebsleistung 7 Drive power 7 Puissance d’entraînement
8 Gewicht entsprechend 8 Weight according to ordered version 8 Poids selon l’exécution du contrat
Auftragsausführung 9 Overall gear unit ratio 9 Rapport de réduction total
9 Gesamte Getriebeübersetzung 10 Installation orientation 10 Position de montage
10 Einbaulage 11 Rated speed of gear unit output shaft 11 Vitesse de rotation nominale de
11 Nenndrehzahl der 12 Lubricant type, l’arbre de sortie du réducteur
Getriebeabtriebswelle viscosity and quantity 12 Type de lubrifiant,
12 Schmierstoffart, 13 Customer’s part number viscosité et quantité
-viskosität und –menge 14 Operating factor 13 Numéro d’article client
13 Kundenmaterialnummer 14 Facteur de service
14 Betriebsfaktor

Ersatzteil-Bestellung / Replacement parts order / Commande de pièces de rechange:

Bezeichnung / Designation / Désignation: Pos.-Nr. / Item No. / N° pos :

Stückzahl / Pieces / Quantité: Getriebetyp / Gear unit type / Type de réducteur:

Fabrikationsnummer / Serial No. / Numéro de série:

www.nord.com PL1080
www.nord.com PL1080 37
Notizen
Notes
Notes

38 PL1080 www.nord.com
 Notizen
Notes
Notes

www.nord.com PL1080 39
Intelligent
IntelligentDrivesystems,
Drivesystems,Worldwide
WorldwideServices
Services

NORD DRIVESYSTEMS Group

Headquarters and Technology Centre
in Bargteheide, close to Hamburg
Innovative drive solutions
for more than 100 branches of industry
Mechanical products
parallel shaft, helical gear, bevel gear and worm gear units
Electrical products
IE2/IE3/IE4 motors
Electronic products
centralised and decentralised frequency inverters,
motor starters and field distribution systems
7 state-of-the-art production plants
for all drive components
Subsidiaries and sales partners
in 98 countries on 5 continents
provide local stocks, assembly, production,
technical support and customer service
More than 4,000 employees throughout the world
create customer oriented solutions
www.nord.com/locator

Headquarters:
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG
Mat.Nr. 6002299 / 3321

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1
22941 Bargteheide, Germany
Fon +49 (0) 4532 / 289 - 0
Fax +49 (0) 4532 / 289 - 2253
[email protected], www.nord.com
Member of the NORD DRIVESYSTEMS GROUP
Intelligent Drivesystems, Worldwide Services

DE EN FR

PL1090
Ersatzteilkatalog - Motoren
Spare parts catalogue - Motors
Catalogue de pièces de rechange - Moteurs
Inhaltsübersicht
Table Of Contents
Sommaire

Allgemeine Ersatzteile
General parts list
Vues éclatées et nomenclature

Motoren
Motors
Moteurs

IEC B3+B5 - Motor Größe 63-250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

IEC B3+B5 - Motor size 63-250
IEC B3+B5 - Moteur à hauteur d’axe 63-250

IEC B3+B5 - Bremsmotor Größe 63-250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

IEC B3+B5 - Brake motor size 63-250
IEC B3+B5 - Moteur frein à hauteur d’axe 63-250

IEC B5 - Glattmotor nach IEC mit EKK Größe 71-100 . . . . . . . . 8-9

IEC B5 - Smooth motor acc. to IEC with EKK size 71-100
IEC B5 - Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification IEC B5
avec EKK à hauteur d’axe 71-100

IEC B14 - Glattmotor nach IEC mit EKK Größe 71-100 . . . . . . . 10 - 11

IEC B14 - Smooth motor acc. to IEC with EKK size 71-100
IEC B14 - Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification IEC B14
avec EKK à hauteur d’axe 71-100

2 PL1090 DE EN FR www.nord.com
 Inhaltsübersicht
Table Of Contents
Sommaire

Allgemeine Ersatzteile
General parts list
Vues éclatées et nomenclature

Motoren
Motors
Moteurs

Motor nach Werknorm B5 Größe 63-250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 13

Motor according to works standard B5, size 63-250
Moteur selon la spécification B5 à hauteur d’axe 63-250

Bremsmotor nach Werknorm B5 Größe 63-250 . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 15

Brake motor according to works standard B5, size 63-250
Moteur frein selon la spécification B5 à hauteur d’axe 63-250

Glattmotor nach Werknorm B5 mit EKK Größe 71-100 . . . . . . 16 - 17

Smooth motor acc. to works standard B5 with B5, size 71-100
Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification B5
avec EKK à hauteur d’axe 71-100

Motor nach Werknorm B14 Größe 63-160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 19

Motor according to works standard B14, size 63-160
Moteur selon la spécification B14 à hauteur d’axe 63-160

Bremsmotor nach Werknorm B14 Größe 63-160 . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 21

Brake motor according to works standard B14, size 63-160
Moteur frein selon la spécification B14 à hauteur d’axe 63-160

Glattmotor nach Werknorm B14 mit EKK Größe 71-100 . . . . . . 22 - 23

Smooth motor acc. to works standard B14 with B5, size 71-100
Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification B14
avec EKK à hauteur d’axe 71-100

Lüfterausschnitt Typ 160-250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 - 25

Fan cutout Type 160-250
Détail du ventilateur Type 160-250

Bestellangaben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 - 27
Order details
Informations de commande

www.nord.com PL1090 DE EN FR 3
 Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
IEC B3+B5 - Motor Größe 63-250
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS
IEC B3+B5 - Motor size 63-250
IEC B3+B5 - Moteur à hauteur d’axe 63-250

Lüfterausschnitt Type 160-250  24 - 25

Fan cutout
Détail du ventilateur
9430

9420

9400

9081 9080 9520

9100
9071
EB 0 - 860 04 (1) #1

9321

9070 9004
9290
9072 9003 9401
9390
9090 9330

9320 9006
9001
9323
9050 9008
9060 9260
9020 9160

9243

9260
9000 9242
1
9241
9240
9022
9021
9040

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
EB 0 - 860 04 www.nord.com
(1)
Gezeichnet
4 nach PL1090 DE
08.02.2012 EN FR
Eisenberg
1 29178 28.01.20 Lau Drawn

Status Änderungen Datum Name

ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
IEC B3+B5 - Motor Größe 63-250
IEC B3+B5 - Motor size 63-250
IEC B3+B5 - Moteur à hauteur d’axe 63-250
DE EN FR
9000 Läufer 9000 Rotor 9000 Rotor
9001 Paßfeder 9001 Parallel key 9001 Clavette
9003 Paßfeder 9003 Parallel key 9003 Clavette
9004 Sicherungsring 9004 Circlip 9004 Circlip
9006 Sicherungsring 9006 Circlip 9006 Circlip
9008 Paßfeder 9008 Parallel key 9008 Clavette
9020 A-Lagerschild 9020 A bearing cover 9020 Flasque A
9021 Schraube 9021 Screw 9021 Vis
9022 Schraubensicherung 9022 Screw securing 9022 Frein de vis
9040 Wellendichtring 9040 Radial packing ring 9040 Bague d’étanchéité sur l’arbre
9050 Kugellager 9050 Ball bearing 9050 Roulement à billes
9060 Kugellager- 9060 Ball bearing 9060 Cale de compensation des
Ausgleichscheibe spacer washer roulements à billes
9070 Klemmenkastenrahmen 9070 Terminal box frame 9070 Cadre de la boîte à bornes
9071 Schraube 9071 Screw 9071 Vis
9072 Blindverschlußstopfen 9072 Blind plug 9072 Bouchon aveugle
9080 Klemmenkastendeckel 9080 Terminal box cover 9080 Couvercle de boîte à bornes
9081 Schraube 9081 Screw 9081 Vis
9090 Dichtung 9090 Gasket 9090 Bague d’étanchéité
9100 Dichtung 9100 Gasket 9100 Bague d’étanchéité
9160 Stator gewickelt 9160 Wound stator 9160 Stator bobiné
9240 Motorfuß 9240 Motor foot 9240 Pied de moteur
9241 Schraube 9241 Screw 9241 Vis
9242 Federring 9242 Spring lock washer 9242 Rondelle élastique
9243 Sechskantmutter 9243 Hexagonal nut 9243 Écrou à six pans
9260 Dichtung 9260 Gasket 9260 Bague d’étanchéité
9290 Kugellager 9290 Ball bearing 9290 Roulement à billes
9320 B-Lagerschild 9320 B-bearing cover 9320 Flasque B
9321 Schraube 9321 Screw 9321 Vis
9323 Sicherungsring 9323 Circlip 9323 Circlip
9330 Wellendichtring 9330 Radial packing ring 9330 Bague d’étanchéité sur l’arbre
9340-9354* Rücklaufsperre 9340-9354* Back stop 9340-9354* Antidévireur
9390 Lüfter 9390 Fan 9390 Ventilateur
9400 Lüfterhaube 9400 Fan cover 9400 Capot du ventilateur
9401 Schraube 9401 Screw 9401 Vis
9420 Schutzdach 9420 Protective shield 9420 Tôle parapluie
9430 Doppelte Lüfterhaube 9430 Double fan cover 9430 Double capot de ventilateur
9520 Klemmbuchse 9520 Clamping bush 9520 Douille de serrage
9570* Stromrelais 9570* Relay 9570* Relais d‘intensité
9600* Motorsteckverbinder 9600* Motor plug connector 9600* Connecteur moteur
9680* Stillstandsheizung 9680* Standstill heating 9680* Résistance de préchauffage
9700-9774* Inkrementalgeber 9700-9774* Incremental encoder 9700-9774* Codeur incrémental
9850* Scheibenhandrad 9850* Disc-shaped handwheel 9850* Volant
9860* Impulsaufnehmer/ 9860* Chain wheel puls 9860* Récepteur d’impulsions/
Impulsgeber/Kettenrad transducer Générateur d’impulsions/Roue
à chaîne
9910* Reibflansch für IP66 9910* Rubbing flange IP66 9910* Bride de friction pour IP66

* Sonderteile ohne Abbildung / * Special parts, not illustrated / * Pièces spéciales sans illustration

www.nord.com PL1090 DE EN FR 5
 IEC B3+B5 - Bremsmotor Größe 63-250
Ersatzteilzeichnung
IEC B3+B5 - Brake motor size 63-250
Spare Parts Drawing
IEC B3+B5 - Moteur
DRIVESYSTEMS
frein à hauteur d’axe 63-250 DRIVESYSTEMS

Lüfterausschnitt IEC B3+B5

Type - Bremsmotor
160-250  24 - 2563 - 180
Fan cutout
Détail du ventilateur

9420

9400
9401

9006 9430
9383
9370
9380
EB 0 - 860 05 #1

9900 9006
9330 9390
9080 9120
9005
9081 9121 9006
9007 9360
9008
9100 9005
9070 9003
9071
9076 9321
9111 9320
9110
9290
9075
9323
9090
9001 9260
9050 9160
9060
9020
9243

9242
9000 9240
9260 9241
9022
9021
9040

6 Getriebebau NORD
PL1090 EN& Co.FR
DEGmbH KG www.nord.com
Rudolf-Diesel-Straße 1 D-22934 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/4010 - 04532/401253 - www.nord.com

Datum / Date Name / Name

IEC B3+B5 - Bremsmotor Größe 63-250
IEC B3+B5 - Brake motor size 63-250
IEC B3+B5 - Moteur frein à hauteur d’axe 63-250
DE EN FR
9000 Läufer 9000 Rotor 9000 Rotor
9001 Paßfeder 9001 Parallel key 9001 Clavette
9003 Paßfeder 9003 Parallel key 9003 Clavette
9005 Sicherungsring 9005 Circlip 9005 Circlip
9006 Sicherungsring 9006 Circlip 9006 Circlip
9007 Paßfeder 9007 Parallel key 9007 Clavette
9008 Paßfeder 9008 Parallel key 9008 Clavette
9020 A-Lagerschild 9020 A bearing cover 9020 Flasque A
9021 Schraube 9021 Screw 9021 Vis
9022 Schraubensicherung 9022 Screw securing 9022 Frein de vis
9040 Wellendichtring 9040 Radial packing ring 9040 Bague d’étanchéité sur l’arbre
9050 Kugellager 9050 Ball bearing 9050 Roulement à billes
9060 Kugellager- 9060 Ball bearing 9060 Cale de compensation des
Ausgleichscheibe spacer washer roulements à billes
9070 Klemmenkastenrahmen 9070 Terminal box frame 9070 Cadre de la boîte à bornes
9071 Schraube 9071 Screw 9071 Vis
9072 Blindverschlußstopfen 9072 Blind plug 9072 Bouchon aveugle
9075 Blindstopfen 9075 Blind plug 9075 Bouchon borgne
9076 Kabelverschraubung 9076 Cable gland 9076 Passe-câbles à vis
9080 Klemmenkastendeckel 9080 Terminal box cover 9080 Couvercle de boîte à bornes
9081 Schraube 9081 Screw 9081 Vis
9090 Dichtung 9090 Gasket 9090 Bague d’étanchéité
9100 Dichtung 9100 Gasket 9100 Bague d’étanchéité
9110 2-poliges Klemmbrett 9110 2-pole terminal board 9110 Plaque à bornes à 2 pôles
9111 Schraube 9111 Screw 9111 Vis
9120 Gleichrichter 9120 Rectifier 9120 Redresseur
9121 Schraube 9121 Screw 9121 Vis
9160 Stator gewickelt 9160 Wound stator 9160 Stator bobiné
9240 Motorfuß 9240 Motor foot 9240 Pied de moteur
9241 Schraube 9241 Screw 9241 Vis
9242 Federring 9242 Spring lock washer 9242 Rondelle élastique
9243 Sechskantmutter 9243 Hexagonal nut 9243 Écrou à six pans
9260 Dichtung 9260 Gasket 9260 Bague d’étanchéité
9290 Kugellager 9290 Ball bearing 9290 Roulement à billes
9320 B-Lagerschild 9320 B-bearing cover 9320 Flasque B
9321 Schraube 9321 Screw 9321 Vis
9323 Sicherungsring 9323 Circlip 9323 Circlip
9330 Wellendichtring 9330 Radial packing ring 9330 Bague d’étanchéité sur l’arbre
9340-9354* Rücklaufsperre 9340-9354* Back stop 9340-9354* Antidévireur
9360 Bremse 9360 Brake 9360 Frein
9370 Handlüftung 9370 Manual brake release 9370 Déblocage manuel du frein
9380 Bremsenmitnehmer 9380 Brake dog 9380 Entraîneur de frein
9383 Buchse 9383 Socket 9383 Douille
9390 Lüfter 9390 Fan 9390 Ventilateur
9400 Lüfterhaube 9400 Fan cover 9400 Capot du ventilateur
9401 Schraube 9401 Screw 9401 Vis
9420 Schutzdach 9420 Protective shield 9420 Tôle parapluie
9430 Doppelte Lüfterhaube 9430 Double fan cover 9430 Double capot de ventilateur
9520 Klemmenbuchse 9520 Clamping bush 9520 Douille de serrage
9570* Stromrelais 9570* Relay 9570* Relais d‘intensité
9600* Motorsteckverbinder 9600* Motor plug connector 9600* Connecteur moteur
9680* Stillstandsheizung 9680* Standstill heating 9680* Résistance de préchauffage
9700-9774* Inkrementalgeber 9700-9774* Incremental encoder 9700-9774* Codeur incrémental
9850* Scheibenhandrad 9850* Disc-shaped handwheel 9850* Volant
9860* Impulsaufnehmer/ 9860* Chain wheel puls transducer 9860* Récepteur d’impulsions/Générateur
Impulsgeber/Kettenrad d’impulsions/Roue à chaîne
9900 Reibblech 9900 Rubbing plate 9900 Tôle de frottement
9910* Reibflansch für IP66 9910* Rubbing flange IP66 9910* Bride de friction pour IP66
* Sonderteile ohne Abbildung / * Special parts, not illustrated / * Pièces spéciales sans illustration

www.nord.com PL1090 DE EN FR 7
 IEC B5 - Glattmotor nach IEC mit EKK (B5) Größe 71-100
IEC B5 - Smooth motor according to IEC with EKK (B5) size 71-100
IEC B5 - Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification IEC B5 avec EKK
à hauteur d’axe 71-100

Lüfterausschnitt Type 160-250  24 - 25

Fan cutout
Détail du ventilateur
EB 0 - 860 15 #1

8 PL1090 DE EN FR www.nord.com
IEC B5 - Glattmotor nach IEC mit EKK (B5) Größe 71-100
IEC B5 - Smooth motor according to IEC with EKK (B5) size 71-100
IEC B5 - Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification IEC B5 avec EKK
à hauteur d’axe 71-100
DE EN FR
9000 Läufer 9000 Rotor 9000 Rotor
9001 Passfeder 9001 Parallel key 9001 Clavette
9004 Sicherungsring 9004 Circlip 9004 Circlip
9020 A-Lagerschild 9020 A bearing cover 9020 Flasque A
9021 Schraube 9021 Screw 9021 Vis
9040 Wellendichtring 9040 Radial packing ring 9040 Bague d'étanchéité sur l'arbre
9050 Kugellager 9050 Ball bearing 9050 Roulement à billes
9060 Kugellager- Ausgleichscheibe 9060 Ball bearing spacer washer 9060 Cale de compensation des
roulements à billes
9070 Klemmkastenrahmen 9070 Terminal box frame 9070 Cadre de la boîte à bornes
9071 Schraube 9071 Screw 9071 Vis
9077 Scheibe 9077 Washer 9077 Rondelle
9090 Dichtung 9090 Gasket 9090 Bague d'étanchéité
9160 Stator gewickelt 9160 Wound stator 9160 Stator bobiné
9260 Dichtung 9260 Gasket 9260 Bague d'étanchéité
9290 Kugellager 9290 Ball bearing 9290 Roulement à billes
9320 B-Lagerschild 9320 B bearing cover 9320 Flasque B
9321 Schraube 9321 Screw 9321 Vis
9323 Sicherungsring 9323 Circlip 9323 Circlip
9324 Scheibe 9324 Washer 9324 Rondelle

www.nord.com PL1090 DE EN FR 9
 IEC B14 - Glattmotor nach IEC mit EKK (B14) Größe 71-100
IEC B14 - Smooth motor according to IEC with EKK (B14) size 71-100
IEC B14 - Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification IEC B14 avec EKK
à hauteur d’axe 71-100

Lüfterausschnitt Type 160-250  24 - 25

Fan cutout
Détail du ventilateur
EB 0 - 860 14 #1

10 PL1090 DE EN FR www.nord.com
IEC B14 - Glattmotor nach IEC mit EKK (B14) Größe 71-100
IEC B14 - Smooth motor according to IEC with EKK (B14) size 71-100
IEC B14 - Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification IEC B14 avec EKK
à hauteur d’axe 71-100
DE EN FR
9000 Läufer 9000 Rotor 9000 Rotor
9001 Passfeder 9001 Parallel key 9001 Clavette
9004 Sicherungsring 9004 Circlip 9004 Circlip
9020 A-Lagerschild 9020 A bearing cover 9020 Flasque A
9021 Schraube 9021 Screw 9021 Vis
9030 Scheibe 9030 Washer 9030 Rondelle
9040 Wellendichtring 9040 Radial packing ring 9040 Bague d'étanchéité sur l'arbre
9050 Kugellager 9050 Ball bearing 9050 Roulement à billes
9060 Kugellager- Ausgleichscheibe 9060 Ball bearing spacer washer 9060 Cale de compensation des
roulements à billes
9070 Klemmkastenrahmen 9070 Terminal box frame 9070 Cadre de la boîte à bornes
9071 Schraube 9071 Screw 9071 Vis
9077 Scheibe 9077 Washer 9077 Rondelle
9090 Dichtung 9090 Gasket 9090 Bague d'étanchéité
9160 Stator gewickelt 9160 Wound stator 9160 Stator bobiné
9260 Dichtung 9260 Gasket 9260 Bague d'étanchéité
9290 Kugellager 9290 Ball bearing 9290 Roulement à billes
9320 B-Lagerschild 9320 B bearing cover 9320 Flasque B
9321 Schraube 9321 Screw 9321 Vis
9323 Sicherungsring 9323 Circlip 9323 Circlip
9324 Scheibe 9324 Washer 9324 Rondelle

www.nord.com PL1090 DE EN FR 11
 Ersatzteilzeichnung
Motor nach Werknorm B5 Größe 63-250Parts Drawing
Spare
Motor according
DRIVESYSTEMSto works standard B5, size 63-250 DRIVESYSTEMS

Moteur selon la spécification B5 à hauteur d’axe 63-250

Lüfterausschnitt Type 160-250  24 - 25

Fan cutout
Détail du ventilateur
9430

9400

9401
9080
9081 9390
9100

9071 9320
EB 0 - 860 06 (1) #1

1 9070 9290 9420

9072
9520
9003
9330
9090
9321 9006
9260 9004
9001 9323
9008
9060 9260

9160
9000 1
9050

9021
9020
9040

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com

12 PL1090 DE EN Name
Datum / Date FR / Name www.nord.com
Schutzvermerk
EB 0 - 860 06 (1)
Gezeichnet
nach 17.02.2012 Eisenberg
Motor nach Werknorm B5 Größe 63-250
Motor according to works standard B5, size 63-250
Moteur selon la spécification B5 à hauteur d’axe 63-250
DE EN FR
9000 Läufer 9000 Rotor 9000 Rotor
9001 Paßfeder 9001 Parallel key 9001 Clavette
9003 Paßfeder 9003 Parallel key 9003 Clavette
9004 Sicherungsring 9004 Circlip 9004 Circlip
9006 Sicherungsring 9006 Circlip 9006 Circlip
9008 Paßfeder 9008 Parallel key 9008 Clavette
9020 A-Lagerschild 9020 A bearing cover 9020 Flasque A
9021 Schraube 9021 Screw 9021 Vis
9040 Wellendichtring 9040 Radial packing ring 9040 Bague d’étanchéité sur l’arbre
9050 Kugellager 9050 Ball bearing 9050 Roulement à billes
9060 Kugellager- 9060 Ball bearing 9060 Cale de compensation des
Ausgleichscheibe spacer washer roulements à billes
9070 Klemmenkastenrahmen 9070 Terminal box frame 9070 Cadre de la boîte à bornes
9071 Schraube 9071 Screw 9071 Vis
9072 Blindverschlußstopfen 9072 Blind plug 9072 Bouchon aveugle
9075 Blindstopfen 9075 Blind plug 9075 Bouchon borgne
9080 Klemmenkastendeckel 9080 Terminal box cover 9080 Couvercle de boîte à bornes
9081 Schraube 9081 Screw 9081 Vis
9090 Dichtung 9090 Gasket 9090 Bague d’étanchéité
9100 Dichtung 9100 Gasket 9100 Bague d’étanchéité
9160 Stator gewickelt 9160 Wound stator 9160 Stator bobiné
9260 Dichtung 9260 Gasket 9260 Bague d’étanchéité
9290 Kugellager 9290 Ball bearing 9290 Roulement à billes
9320 B-Lagerschild 9320 B-bearing cover 9320 Flasque B
9321 Schraube 9321 Screw 9321 Vis
9323 Sicherungsring 9323 Circlip 9323 Circlip
9330 Wellendichtring 9330 Radial packing ring 9330 Bague d’étanchéité sur l’arbre
9340-9354* Rücklaufsperre 9340-9354* Back stop 9340-9354* Antidévireur
9390 Lüfter 9390 Fan 9390 Ventilateur
9400 Lüfterhaube 9400 Fan cover 9400 Capot du ventilateur
9401 Schraube 9401 Screw 9401 Vis
9420 Schutzdach 9420 Protective shield 9420 Tôle parapluie
9430 Doppelte Lüfterhaube 9430 Double fan cover 9430 Double capot de ventilateur
9520 Klemmbuchse 9520 Clamping bush 9520 Douille de serrage
9570* Stromrelais 9570* Relay 9570* Relais d‘intensité
9600* Motorsteckverbinder 9600* Motor plug connector 9600* Connecteur moteur
9680* Stillstandsheizung 9680* Standstill heating 9680* Résistance de préchauffage
9700-9774* Inkrementalgeber 9700-9774* Incremental encoder 9700-9774* Codeur incrémental
9850* Scheibenhandrad 9850* Disc-shaped handwheel 9850* Volant
9860* Impulsaufnehmer/ 9860* Chain wheel puls 9860* Récepteur d’impulsions/
Impulsgeber/Kettenrad transducer Générateur d’impulsions/Roue
à chaîne
9910* Reibflansch für IP66 9910* Rubbing flange IP66 9910* Bride de friction pour IP66

* Sonderteile ohne Abbildung / * Special parts, not illustrated / * Pièces spéciales sans illustration

www.nord.com PL1090 DE EN FR 13
 Bremsmotor nach Werknorm B5 Größe 63-250
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Brake motor according to works standard B5, size 63-250
Spare
Moteur selon la spécification B5 àParts Drawing
hauteur d’axe 63-250

LüfterausschnittBremsmotor nach Werknorm

Type 160-250  24 - 25(B5) 63 - 180
Fan cutout
Détail du ventilateur
9430

9420

9400

9401
EB 0 - 860 07 #1

9390
9370
9005
9081
9080
9100
9006
9121
9006
9076 9330
9120 9383
9070 9380
9290
9071 9360
9008 9003
9007 9005

9111 9900
9090 9075 9321
9110
9320
9001 9006
9260 9323

9050 9260

9160
9000

9060
9021

9020
9040

14 PL1090 DE EN FR www.nord.com

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Bremsmotor nach Werknorm B5 Größe 63-250
Brake motor according to works standard B5, size 63-250
Moteur selon la spécification B5 à hauteur d’axe 63-250
DE EN FR
9000 Läufer 9000 Rotor 9000 Rotor
9001 Paßfeder 9001 Parallel key 9001 Clavette
9003 Paßfeder 9003 Parallel key 9003 Clavette
9005 Sicherungsring 9005 Circlip 9005 Circlip
9006 Sicherungsring 9006 Circlip 9006 Circlip
9007 Paßfeder 9007 Parallel key 9007 Clavette
9008 Paßfeder 9008 Parallel key 9008 Clavette
9020 A-Lagerschild 9020 A bearing cover 9020 Flasque A
9021 Schraube 9021 Screw 9021 Vis
9040 Wellendichtring 9040 Radial packing ring 9040 Bague d’étanchéité sur l’arbre
9050 Kugellager 9050 Ball bearing 9050 Roulement à billes
9060 Kugellager- 9060 Ball bearing 9060 Cale de compensation des
Ausgleichscheibe spacer washer roulements à billes
9070 Klemmenkastenrahmen 9070 Terminal box frame 9070 Cadre de la boîte à bornes
9071 Schraube 9071 Screw 9071 Vis
9075 Blindstopfen 9075 Blind plug 9075 Bouchon borgne
9076 Kabelverschraubung 9076 Cable gland 9076 Passe-câbles à vis
9080 Klemmenkastendeckel 9080 Terminal box cover 9080 Couvercle de boîte à bornes
9081 Schraube 9081 Screw 9081 Vis
9090 Dichtung 9090 Gasket 9090 Bague d’étanchéité
9100 Dichtung 9100 Gasket 9100 Bague d’étanchéité
9110 2-poliges Klemmbrett 9110 2-pole terminal board 9110 Plaque à bornes à 2 pôles
9111 Schraube 9111 Screw 9111 Vis
9120 Gleichrichter 9120 Rectifier 9120 Redresseur
9121 Schraube 9121 Screw 9121 Vis
9160 Stator gewickelt 9160 Wound stator 9160 Stator bobiné
9260 Dichtung 9260 Gasket 9260 Bague d’étanchéité
9290 Kugellager 9290 Ball bearing 9290 Roulement à billes
9320 B-Lagerschild 9320 B-bearing cover 9320 Flasque B
9321 Schraube 9321 Screw 9321 Vis
9323 Sicherungsring 9323 Circlip 9323 Circlip
9330 Wellendichtring 9330 Radial packing ring 9330 Bague d’étanchéité sur l’arbre
9340-9354* Rücklaufsperre 9340-9354* Back stop 9340-9354* Antidévireur
9360 Bremse 9360 Brake 9360 Frein
9370 Handlüftung 9370 Manual brake release 9370 Déblocage manuel du frein
9380 Bremsenmitnehmer 9380 Brake dog 9380 Entraîneur de frein
9383 Buchse 9383 Socket 9383 Douille
9390 Lüfter 9390 Fan 9390 Ventilateur
9400 Lüfterhaube 9400 Fan cover 9400 Capot du ventilateur
9401 Schraube 9401 Screw 9401 Vis
9420 Schutzdach 9420 Protective shield 9420 Tôle parapluie
9430 Doppelte Lüfterhaube 9430 Double fan cover 9430 Double capot de ventilateur
9570* Stromrelais 9570* Relay 9570* Relais d‘intensité
9600* Motorsteckverbinder 9600* Motor plug connector 9600* Connecteur moteur
9680* Stillstandsheizung 9680* Standstill heating 9680* Résistance de préchauffage
9700-9774* Inkrementalgeber 9700-9774* Incremental encoder 9700-9774* Codeur incrémental
9850* Scheibenhandrad 9850* Disc-shaped handwheel 9850* Volant
9860* Impulsaufnehmer/ 9860* Chain wheel puls 9860* Récepteur d’impulsions/
Impulsgeber/Kettenrad transducer Générateur d’impulsions/Roue
à chaîne
9900 Reibblech 9900 Rubbing plate 9900 Tôle de frottement
9910* Reibflansch für IP66 9910* Rubbing flange IP66 9910* Bride de friction pour IP66

* Sonderteile ohne Abbildung / * Special parts, not illustrated / * Pièces spéciales sans illustration

www.nord.com PL1090 DE EN FR 15
 Glattmotor nach Werknorm mit EKK (B5) Größe 71-100
Smooth motor according to factory standard with EKK (B5) size 71-100
Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification B5 avec EKK à hauteur d’axe 71-100

Lüfterausschnitt Type 160-250  24 - 25

Fan cutout
Détail du ventilateur
EB 0 - 860 13 #1

16 PL1090 DE EN FR www.nord.com
Glattmotor nach Werknorm mit EKK (B5) Größe 71-100
Smooth motor according to factory standard with EKK (B5) size 71-100
Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification B5 avec EKK à hauteur d’axe 71-100
DE EN FR
9000 Läufer 9000 Rotor 9000 Rotor
9001 Passfeder 9001 Parallel key 9001 Clavette
9004 Sicherungsring 9004 Circlip 9004 Circlip
9020 A-Lagerschild 9020 A bearing cover 9020 Flasque A
9021 Schraube 9021 Screw 9021 Vis
9030 Scheibe 9030 Washer 9030 Rondelle
9040 Wellendichtring 9040 Radial packing ring 9040 Bague d'étanchéité sur l'arbre
9050 Kugellager 9050 Ball bearing 9050 Roulement à billes
9060 Kugellager- 9060 Ball bearing spacer washer 9060 Cale de compensation des
Ausgleichscheibe roulements à billes
9070 Klemmkastenrahmen 9070 Terminal box frame 9070 Cadre de la boîte à bornes
9071 Schraube 9071 Screw 9071 Vis
9077 Scheibe 9077 Washer 9077 Rondelle
9090 Dichtung 9090 Gasket 9090 Bague d'étanchéité
9160 Stator gewickelt 9160 Wound stator 9160 Stator bobiné
9260 Dichtung 9260 Gasket 9260 Bague d'étanchéité
9290 Kugellager 9290 Ball bearing 9290 Roulement à billes
9320 B-Lagerschild 9320 B bearing cover 9320 Flasque B
9321 Schraube 9321 Screw 9321 Vis
9323 Sicherungsring 9323 Circlip 9323 Circlip
9324 Scheibe 9324 Washer 9324 Rondelle

www.nord.com PL1090 DE EN FR 17
 Motor nach Werknorm B14 Größe 63-160
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Motor according to works standard B14, size 63-160
Spare
Moteur selon la spécification B14 à Parts
hauteurDrawing
d’axe 63-160
DRIVESYSTEM DRIVESYSTEM

Lüfterausschnitt Type 160-250  24 - 25

Fan cutout
Détail du ventilateur

9430

9420

9400
9401

9390
EB 0 - 860 08 (1) #1

9081 9080
9320
9100
9071 9290
9070
9260 9520
9072
9003 9330
9321
9090
9004

9260 9323
9006
9001

9060
9160 9008

9000
1
9050

9020

9040 9021

18 GetriebebauPL1090
NORD DE EN
GmbH & Co. KG
FR www.nord.com
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Motor nach Werknorm B14 Größe 63-160
Motor according to works standard B14, size 63-160
Moteur selon la spécification B14 à hauteur d’axe 63-160
DE EN FR
9000 Läufer 9000 Rotor 9000 Rotor
9001 Paßfeder 9001 Parallel key 9001 Clavette
9003 Paßfeder 9003 Parallel key 9003 Clavette
9004 Sicherungsring 9004 Circlip 9004 Circlip
9006 Sicherungsring 9006 Circlip 9006 Circlip
9008 Paßfeder 9008 Parallel key 9008 Clavette
9020 A-Lagerschild 9020 A bearing cover 9020 Flasque A
9021 Schraube 9021 Screw 9021 Vis
9040 Wellendichtring 9040 Radial packing ring 9040 Bague d’étanchéité sur l’arbre
9050 Kugellager 9050 Ball bearing 9050 Roulement à billes
9060 Kugellager- 9060 Ball bearing 9060 Cale de compensation des
Ausgleichscheibe spacer washer roulements à billes
9070 Klemmenkastenrahmen 9070 Terminal box frame 9070 Cadre de la boîte à bornes
9071 Schraube 9071 Screw 9071 Vis
9072 Blindverschlußstopfen 9072 Blind plug 9072 Bouchon aveugle
9080 Klemmenkastendeckel 9080 Terminal box cover 9080 Couvercle de boîte à bornes
9081 Schraube 9081 Screw 9081 Vis
9090 Dichtung 9090 Gasket 9090 Bague d’étanchéité
9100 Dichtung 9100 Gasket 9100 Bague d’étanchéité
9160 Stator gewickelt 9160 Wound stator 9160 Stator bobiné
9260 Dichtung 9260 Gasket 9260 Bague d’étanchéité
9290 Kugellager 9290 Ball bearing 9290 Roulement à billes
9320 B-Lagerschild 9320 B-bearing cover 9320 Flasque B
9321 Schraube 9321 Screw 9321 Vis
9323 Sicherungsring 9323 Circlip 9323 Circlip
9330 Wellendichtring 9330 Radial packing ring 9330 Bague d’étanchéité sur l’arbre
9340-9354* Rücklaufsperre 9340-9354* Back stop 9340-9354* Antidévireur
9390 Lüfter 9390 Fan 9390 Ventilateur
9400 Lüfterhaube 9400 Fan cover 9400 Capot du ventilateur
9401 Schraube 9401 Screw 9401 Vis
9420 Schutzdach 9420 Protective shield 9420 Tôle parapluie
9430 Doppelte Lüfterhaube 9430 Double fan cover 9430 Double capot de ventilateur
9520 Klemmbuchse 9520 Clamping bush 9520 Douille de serrage
9570* Stromrelais 9570* Relay 9570* Relais d‘intensité
9600* Motorsteckverbinder 9600* Motor plug connector 9600* Connecteur moteur
9680* Stillstandsheizung 9680* Standstill heating 9680* Résistance de préchauffage
9700-9774* Inkrementalgeber 9700-9774* Incremental encoder 9700-9774* Codeur incrémental
9850* Scheibenhandrad 9850* Disc-shaped handwheel 9850* Volant
9860* Impulsaufnehmer/ 9860* Chain wheel puls 9860* Récepteur d’impulsions/
Impulsgeber/Kettenrad transducer Générateur d’impulsions/Roue
à chaîne
9910* Reibflansch für IP66 9910* Rubbing flange IP66 9910* Bride de friction pour IP66

* Sonderteile ohne Abbildung / * Special parts, not illustrated / * Pièces spéciales sans illustration

www.nord.com PL1090 DE EN FR 19
 Ersatzteilzeichnung

Spare Parts Drawing

DRIVESYSTEM DRIVESYSTEM

Bremsmotor nach Werknorm B14 Größe 63-160

Brake motor accordingBremsmotor
to works standard B14, size 63-160
nach Werknorm (B14) 63 - 160

Moteur frein selon la spécification B14 à hauteur d’axe 63-160

Lüfterausschnitt Type 160-250  24 - 25

Fan cutout 9430
Détail du ventilateur

9420

9400
9401
9390
9370 9006
9081

9080
EB 0 - 860 09 #1

9100
9121
9900 9006
9120
9070 9005
9321
9071 9076 9383
9111 9320 9380
9008
9110 9003
9360
9007
9075 9005
9330
9090
9001
9006
9260 9290
9050 9323
9060 9260

9160

9000

9020

9021
9040

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Tel. 04532/4010 - 04532/401253 - www.nord.com
Rudolf-Diesel-Straße 1 D-22934 Bargteheide
Schutzvermerk
Datum / Date
Name / Name
Gezeichnet
nach 31.10.2011 Eisenberg EB 0 - 860 09
Drawn
Status Änderungen Datum Name ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
beachten Seite1 von
Blatt
State Changes Date Name Checked Page from1 Page
20 PL1090 DE EN FR www.nord.com
Bremsmotor nach Werknorm B14 Größe 63-160
Brake motor according to works standard B14, size 63-160
Moteur frein selon la spécification B14 à hauteur d’axe 63-160
DE EN FR
9000 Läufer 9000 Rotor 9000 Rotor
9001 Paßfeder 9001 Parallel key 9001 Clavette
9003 Paßfeder 9003 Parallel key 9003 Clavette
9005 Sicherungsring 9005 Circlip 9005 Circlip
9006 Sicherungsring 9006 Circlip 9006 Circlip
9007 Paßfeder 9007 Parallel key 9007 Clavette
9008 Paßfeder 9008 Parallel key 9008 Clavette
9020 A-Lagerschild 9020 A bearing cover 9020 Flasque A
9021 Schraube 9021 Screw 9021 Vis
9040 Wellendichtring 9040 Radial packing ring 9040 Bague d’étanchéité sur l’arbre
9050 Kugellager 9050 Ball bearing 9050 Roulement à billes
9060 Kugellager- 9060 Ball bearing 9060 Cale de compensation des
Ausgleichscheibe spacer washer roulements à billes
9070 Klemmenkastenrahmen 9070 Terminal box frame 9070 Cadre de la boîte à bornes
9071 Schraube 9071 Screw 9071 Vis
9075 Blindstopfen 9075 Blind plug 9075 Bouchon borgne
9076 Kabelverschraubung 9076 Cable gland 9076 Passe-câbles à vis
9080 Klemmenkastendeckel 9080 Terminal box cover 9080 Couvercle de boîte à bornes
9081 Schraube 9081 Screw 9081 Vis
9090 Dichtung 9090 Gasket 9090 Bague d’étanchéité
9100 Dichtung 9100 Gasket 9100 Bague d’étanchéité
9110 2-poliges Klemmbrett 9110 2-pole terminal board 9110 Plaque à bornes à 2 pôles
9111 Schraube 9111 Screw 9111 Vis
9120 Gleichrichter 9120 Rectifier 9120 Redresseur
9121 Schraube 9121 Screw 9121 Vis
9160 Stator gewickelt 9160 Wound stator 9160 Stator bobiné
9260 Dichtung 9260 Gasket 9260 Bague d’étanchéité
9290 Kugellager 9290 Ball bearing 9290 Roulement à billes
9320 B-Lagerschild 9320 B-bearing cover 9320 Flasque B
9321 Schraube 9321 Screw 9321 Vis
9323 Sicherungsring 9323 Circlip 9323 Circlip
9330 Wellendichtring 9330 Radial packing ring 9330 Bague d’étanchéité sur l’arbre
9340-9354* Rücklaufsperre 9340-9354* Back stop 9340-9354* Antidévireur
9360 Bremse 9360 Brake 9360 Frein
9370 Handlüftung 9370 Manual brake release 9370 Déblocage manuel du frein
9380 Bremsenmitnehmer 9380 Brake dog 9380 Entraîneur de frein
9383 Buchse 9383 Socket 9383 Douille
9390 Lüfter 9390 Fan 9390 Ventilateur
9400 Lüfterhaube 9400 Fan cover 9400 Capot du ventilateur
9401 Schraube 9401 Screw 9401 Vis
9420 Schutzdach 9420 Protective shield 9420 Tôle parapluie
9430 Doppelte Lüfterhaube 9430 Double fan cover 9430 Double capot de ventilateur
9570* Stromrelais 9570* Relay 9570* Relais d‘intensité
9600* Motorsteckverbinder 9600* Motor plug connector 9600* Connecteur moteur
9680* Stillstandsheizung 9680* Standstill heating 9680* Résistance de préchauffage
9700-9774* Inkrementalgeber 9700-9774* Incremental encoder 9700-9774* Codeur incrémental
9850* Scheibenhandrad 9850* Disc-shaped handwheel 9850* Volant
9860* Impulsaufnehmer/ 9860* Chain wheel puls 9860* Récepteur d’impulsions/
Impulsgeber/Kettenrad transducer Générateur d’impulsions/Roue
à chaîne
9900 Reibblech 9900 Rubbing plate 9900 Tôle de frottement
9910* Reibflansch für IP66 9910* Rubbing flange IP66 9910* Bride de friction pour IP66

* Sonderteile ohne Abbildung / * Special parts, not illustrated / * Pièces spéciales sans illustration

www.nord.com PL1090 DE EN FR 21
 Glattmotor nach Werknorm mit EKK (B14) Größe 71-100
Smooth motor acc. to factory standard with EKK (B14) 71-100
Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification B14 avec EKK à hauteur d’axe 71-100

Lüfterausschnitt Type 160-250  24 - 25

Fan cutout
Détail du ventilateur
EB 0 - 860 16 #1

22 PL1090 DE EN FR www.nord.com
Glattmotor nach Werknorm mit EKK (B14) Größe 71-100
Smooth motor acc. to factory standard with EKK (B14) 71-100
Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification B14 avec EKK à hauteur d’axe 71-100
DE EN FR
9000 Läufer 9000 Rotor 9000 Rotor
9001 Passfeder 9001 Parallel key 9001 Clavette
9004 Sicherungsring 9004 Circlip 9004 Circlip
9020 A-Lagerschild 9020 A bearing cover 9020 Flasque A
9021 Schraube 9021 Screw 9021 Vis
9030 Scheibe 9030 Washer 9030 Rondelle
9040 Wellendichtring 9040 Radial packing ring 9040 Bague d'étanchéité sur l'arbre
9050 Kugellager 9050 Ball bearing 9050 Roulement à billes
9060 Kugellager- 9060 Ball bearing spacer washer 9060 Cale de compensation des
Ausgleichscheibe roulements à billes
9070 Klemmkastenrahmen 9070 Terminal box frame 9070 Cadre de la boîte à bornes
9071 Schraube 9071 Screw 9071 Vis
9077 Scheibe 9077 Washer 9077 Rondelle
9090 Dichtung 9090 Gasket 9090 Bague d'étanchéité
9160 Stator gewickelt 9160 Wound stator 9160 Stator bobiné
9260 Dichtung 9260 Gasket 9260 Bague d'étanchéité
9290 Kugellager 9290 Ball bearing 9290 Roulement à billes
9320 B-Lagerschild 9320 B bearing cover 9320 Flasque B
9321 Schraube 9321 Screw 9321 Vis
9323 Sicherungsring 9323 Circlip 9323 Circlip
9324 Scheibe 9324 Washer 9324 Rondelle

www.nord.com PL1090 DE EN FR 23
 Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Lüfterausschnitt Typ 160-250
Fan cutout Type 160-250Lüfterausschnitt / Fan cutout
Détail du ventilateur Type 160-250
Type: 160 - 250W

9390

9006
EB 0 - 860 12 #1

9003

9008
9006

9000

Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet

24
nach
PL1090
Drawn
11.01.2017
DE EN
Borysewicz
FR EB 0 - 860 12
www.nord.com
Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
beachten 11.01.2017 Losak
Lüfterausschnitt Typ 160-250
Fan cutout Type 160-250
Détail du ventilateur Type 160-250
DE EN FR
9000 Läufer 9000 Rotor 9000 Rotor
9003 Passfeder 9003 Parallel key 9003 Clavette
9006 Sicherungsring 9006 Circlip 9006 Circlip
9008 Passfeder 9008 Parallel key 9008 Clavette
9390 Lüfter 9390 Fan 9390 Ventilateur

www.nord.com PL1090 DE EN FR 25
Bestellangaben
Order details
Informations de commande

Erläuterung des Typenschildes

Explanation of the rating plate
Explication de la plaque signalétique




DE EN FR
1 Matrix – Barcode 1 Matrix – Barcode 1 Code matriciel, à barres
2 NORD - Motortyp 2 NORD - Motor type 2 Type de moteur NORD
3 Herstellungsjahr 3 Year of manufacture 3 Année de fabrication
4 Phasenzahl 4 Number of phases 4 Nombre de phases
5 Fabrikationsnummer 5 Serial number 5 Numéro de série
6 Wärmeklasse 6 Heat class 6 Classe thermique
7 Schutzart 7 Protection class 7 Type de protection
8 Betriebsart 8 Operating mode 8 Type de fonctionnement
9 Norm 9 Standard 9 Norme
10 Halbkeilwuchtung 10 Half key balancing 10 Équilibrage dynamique avec une
demi-clavette
11 Frequenz 11 Frequency 11 Fréquence
12 Motorspannung 12 Motor voltage 12 Tension du moteur
13 Nennstrom 13 Nominal current 13 Intensité nominale
14 Nennleistung 14 Nominal power 14 Puissance nominale
15 Leistungfaktor 15 Power factor 15 Facteur de puissance
16 Nenndrehzahl 16 Nominal speed 16 Vitesse nominale
17 Motorspannung - Weitbereich 17 Motor voltage - wide range 17 Tension du moteur – plage étendue
18 Nennstrom - Weitbereich 18 Nominal current - wide range 18 Intensité nominale - plage étendue
19 Wirkungsgrad 19 Efficiency 19 Rendement
20 Bremsmoment 20 Braking torque 20 Couple de freinage
21 Anschlußspannung Bremse 21 Brake connection voltage 21 Tension de raccordement du frein
22 Bremsenspannung 22 Braking voltage 22 Tension de freinage
23 Gewicht 23 Weight 23 Poids
24 Lagerung A-Seite 24 A side bearing 24 Palier côté A
25 Lagerung B-Seite 25 B side bearing 25 Palier côté B
26 Kundenzeile 26 Customer line 26 Ligne réservée au client

26 PL1090 DE EN FR www.nord.com
Bestellangaben
Order details
Informations de commande

Kontaktdaten / Contact details / Contacts:

Getriebebau NORD
Firma / Company / Entreprise:
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1
D-22941 Bargteheide
Straße / Street / Rue Telefon +49(0) 4532/289-0
Telefax +49(0) 4532/289-2253
PLZ / Postcode/
E-Mail [email protected]
Stadt / Town / Ville: Code postal: www.nord.com

Telefon / Telephone / Téléphone:

Fax:

E-mail:

Ersatzteil-Bestellung / Replacement parts order / Commande de pièces de rechange:

Bezeichnung / Designation / Désignation: Pos.-Nr. / Item No. / N° pos :

Stückzahl / Pieces / Quantité: Motortyp / Motor type / Type de moteur:

Fabrikationsnummer / Serial No. / Numéro de série:

DE EN FR
Diese NORD Ersatzteilliste beinhaltet This NORD spare parts list contains Cette liste de pièces de rechange
eine standardisierte Darstellung a standardised depiction of NORD NORD contient une représentation
der NORD Motoren. Um Ihnen das motors. In order to enable you to find standard des moteurs NORD. Pour
Finden und Nachbestellen von and re-order replacement parts more faciliter la recherche et la commande
Ersatzteilen zu erleichtern, finden easily, you can find an order form de pièces de rechange, un formulaire
Sie am Ende der Ersatzteilliste and important information regarding de commande se trouve à la fin de
ein Bestellformular mit wichtigen the identification of the correct la liste des pièces de rechange et
Hinweisen zur Bestimmung der components at the end of this spare vous donne toutes les informations
richtigen Teile. parts list. essentielles pour déterminer les
pièces dont vous avez besoin.
Für Rückfragen stehen wir Ihnen We will be glad to help you if you
gerne zur Verfügung. Ihren lokalen have any queries: You can find your En cas de questions, n’hésitez pas à
Ansprechpartner finden Sie unter local contact partner under http://lo- nous contacter. Pour connaître votre
http://locator.nord.com. cator.nord.com. interlocuteur local, veuillez consulter
le site http://locator.nord.com.

www.nord.com PL1090 DE EN FR 27
Intelligent
IntelligentDrivesystems,
Drivesystems,Worldwide
WorldwideServices
Services

NORD DRIVESYSTEMS Group

Headquarters and Technology Centre
in Bargteheide, close to Hamburg
Innovative drive solutions
for more than 100 branches of industry
Mechanical products
parallel shaft, helical gear, bevel gear and worm gear units
Electrical products
IE2/IE3/IE4 motors
Electronic products
centralised and decentralised frequency inverters,
motor starters and field distribution systems
7 state-of-the-art production plants
for all drive components
Subsidiaries and sales partners
in 98 countries on 5 continents
provide local stocks, assembly, production,
technical support and customer service
More than 4,000 employees throughout the world
create customer oriented solutions
www.nord.com/locator

Headquarters:
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG
Mat.Nr. 6002599 / 1320

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1
22941 Bargteheide, Germany
Fon +49 (0) 4532 / 289 - 0
Fax +49 (0) 4532 / 289 - 2253
[email protected], www.nord.com
Member of the NORD DRIVESYSTEMS GROUP